of the bombay branch of the royal asiatic society
TRANSCRIPT
THE J OU RNA L
OF THE
BOMBAY BRANCH
OF THE
ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY.
VOLUME XI.
187 5 .
EDITED BY THE SECRETARIES .
B OMB A Y
SOCIETY'
S LIBRARY,TOWN HALL.
LONDON - TRiiRNRR Cc .,57 m o 59 LUDGATE HILL.
CONTENTS OF NUMBER XXXI.
ART. PAGE
I.—A Descr iption of the Mekranee-Beloochee Dialect. By
Mr . E . PIERCE
II.—Sangamesvara Mahatmya and Liiiga
-Worship. By the
H on . RAO SAHEB V . N. MANDLIR
III.—Memoir on the H istory of the Tooth-relic of Ceylon
By J . GERSON DA CUNHA, Eng .
IV .—The Subjugation of Persia by the Moslems,and the
Extinction of the sasanian Dynasty. By E . Rehatsek,Hon . Mam. B . B . R . A . S .
V .—Old Canarese and Sanskrit Inscriptions relating to the
Chieftains of the Sindavaiiiéa. Edi ted,w ith Translations,Notes,and Remarks,by J . F. Fleet,Esq.,Bo. O.S
PROCEEDINGS
A ccounts of the Society for 1874
List ofMembers
XXX
Presents to the Library
CONTENTS OF NUMBER XXXII.
ART .
VL—Additional Remarks on the Age of the Naishadhiya.
By J . G. BURLER,Ph. D.
VIL—Ah H istorical and Archwological Sketch of the Island
of Angediva. By J. GERSON DA CUNHA, dzc.
VIII.—The Labours of the ArabAstronomers,and their Ih
strumenta,w ith the Description of an Astrolabe in the
Mulls Firuz Library. By E. REHATSEK, Hon. Mem
B . Br . B . As . Soc. (withfour P lates)
IX .—ThreeWalabhi Copper Plates,w ith Remarks. By the
Hon . Rio S iiheb V. N. MANIQLIK,Vice-President (with seven
PAGE
PROCEEDINGS xxxv
J OURNA L
O F THE
B OMB A Y B R A NCH
OF TH E
ROYA L A SIA TIC SOCIETY .
No. XXXI. VOL. XI .
ART . I.-A Descrip tion of the Mekmnee-Beloochee Dialect.
BY Ms . E. PIERCE.
Presented October 9th,1874.
Tan: Mekranee-Beloochee is the dialect spoken by the people livingin the eastern and southern parts of Beloochistan . Its limits on the
seacoast are the Malan mountains on the east,and a line drawn about
fifty miles west of (Jharbar on the west. Inland it is spoken generallyover the large provinces of Kej,Kolanch,and Kolwéh,with the adjacent districts.
The dialect spoken over the whole of this tract varies very slightly,and the people of any one district are intelligible to people of the others.
There are,however,innumerable small variations in the words used in
every district,and people are often unacquainted withwords in common
e amongst people living forty or fifty miles distant.
In the districts of Baho and Dushtyéri,N.W. of Gwadur,thecountry is inhabited by Judgalls (Sindee tribes settled inMekran),andthe language of these districts is consequently a dialect of Sindee.
The dialect Spoken by the Mayds (med a fisherman),inhabiting thecoast villages of Ormara,Pusnee,and Gwadur,differs slightly from
that spoken by themaple living in the jungle.
I r a s
4 ms n am es-sum ac; pu Lsc'r .
SUBSTANTIVES .
Substantives have only one inflection in the singular for the genitive,dative,and accusative cases. viz . a added to the nominative case. The
nom. plural is formed by adding an to the nom; singular and the gen .,dat.,and sec. plural are formed by adding a to the nom. plural. For
the dat . and ace. cases r‘
i r r’
i is sometimes added instead of a.
It would appear at first sight that some confusion must arise from
gen.,dat.,and ace. eases being alike,but in practise it presents very
little difficulty.
There may be said to be no gender in Beloochee. Female animals
have either different names,as packin a male goat,and 6112,a female
goat ; or their names are formed by prefixing the adjective madag(female) to the name of the male,as yak,a bull,mr
‘
idag in gale,a cow .
The latter form is rare,as almost every animal has a separate name for
the female.
A noun in the gen. case is placed before the noun signifying the
thing possessed,instead of after it as in Persian,as marduma dust,a.
man’s hand.
The inflections of the Beloochee substantives,it will be seen,arevery different from those of the Persian. The termination mi of the
dat. and ace. is rarely used and of the two forms of the plural,viz .
an and hit,only an is retained.
As in Persian the singular is very often used with a plural significa
tion.
A noun of agency is formed from some verbs by the addition of stk
to the root,e.g .
buyer or taker, z i rfik.
seller, bahokanfik.
speaker, gwashfik
giver, deuk
goer . rofik.
latter word is applied as an adjective to a swift camel .
following is themode of declension ofa Beloochee substantive
Singular .
mardum, a man.
mardum-a, of a man.
mardum-a,a,Era, at,to,or for aman.
mardum-a,5,lira, a man.
was n am es-summers ma nor . 5
Plural.
mardum-i a, men.
mardum-ana, ofmen.
mardum-i na,i nn,anara,at,to,or for men.
mardum-iina,ans,soars,men.
The vocative and ablative cases
l
are formed by ai,O,for the former,and ash,from,w ith,or by,for the latter
ADJ ECTIVES.
The adjective in Beloochee takes only one inflection,viz . the addition
of in,which is added when an adjective is used to qualify a substantive.
Adjectives precede the substantives they qualify,instead of followingthem as in Persian,e.y .,shar iaroch,a fine day.
When an adjective precedes a substantive beginning with a vowel.
the it of the termination loses its nasal sound.
The comparative degree is formed by adding tar to the positive,except maz an,great,and hasr
’
in,small,which have irregular comparatives,viz . mastar and hastar .
There is no superlative degree,but onemay be formed as in Hindu
stani,e.y .,c ash drusté n shar tar fit. This is the best. Literally z—Thisis better than all.
In such a sentence as this a Belooch usually omits the word ash.
The possessive adjectives are the gen. cases of the pronouns.
Some adjectives are formed from nouns by adding iy
as nug rc'
iig,silvern,from nuyra,silver .
tzlaiy,golden,from tile,gold.
dar ig,wooden,from dar,wood.
Mohammcdiy,belonging to Mohammed.
as c hé rch nugraig m, This knife is silvern.
e nugr é ig ih Icar ch fir, This is a silver knife.
c Mohammadig fir. This isMohammed’
s.
PRONOUNS.
The pronouns in Beloochee appear to follow the Persian much closer
than most other parts of speech .
8 THE MEKRANSE-BELOOCHEB DIALECT .
Kuj cin,kudrin,Which ?kujan,which
G. kujz'
mi,of whichD. A . kujiinra,kujana,to
which which 7
Plural same as singular .
Che,What.che,what
G. chea,of what ? Plural same as singular .
D. A . chea,to what ?
what
Relative and Cor relative.
Rel. akeh,he who,whoev er . Jorrel . hams,that same.
e.g . He who is wise speaks little. 5 keh akalwand iii,hams. kamagwashit.
Rel. hanch,whatever . Correl. honcho,that same.
e.g .,Whatever I say,yen do. Hanch keh man agwashi il hancho
pekan .
Rel . e Ireh,this which . Correl. hamesh,home,this same.
e.g .,This which I have is good. E keh go man iii hame shar in.
The correlatives are very often omitted entirely.
Sufi x
The suflix i or ish is often used for eshia or eshira,e. g .,Shall I take this away ? Man eshia
’barar
’
i,or Man abarani,or Man sharanish,
I will give this to you,Man turadeinish.
These suffixes appear to be only added to the verb,and nouns
as in Persian.
Possessives.
The possessive pronouns are formed by adding g to the
the other pronouns,as manig,mine,lalig,thine,atig,his,shumaig,yours,aanig,theirs,lcaiig,whose,as
ep eti munig iii,this box is mine.
For the possessive adjectives my,thy,&c.,the gen. case of the
pronouns is used,as
E mani peti i ii,this ismy box.
ms usxasssr -nsnoocnss DIALECT . 9
VERBS.
The Beloochee verbs are extremely irregular,and it is impossible to
reduce them to any system of conjugations.
The irregularities,however,are very rarely in anything but the
formation of the preterite tense. I have given a table of the most
irregular,and in the vocabulary I have given the aorist,preterite,and imperative of each verb .
It will be noticed that the irregularities aremostly derived from the
original Persian verbsj anaga,&raga,war aga,deaga,&c.
The principal peculiarities of the Beloochee verb are
(1) There is no distinction between the present and future
tenses,both being represented by one tense which I have
called the Aorist . This does not appear to give rise to any
difficulty in actual practice,as the context generally shows
whether the verb should be in the present or future sense.
(IL) That part of the verb ending in ago,which appears to be
the nearest approach to an infinitive,is ofvery rare occurrence,Itch with the aorist generally taking its place ; e. g .
Man alotih lreh man aroah,I want to go,for Man aloti ir roaga .
This resembles the Persian Man mikhwaham berawam.
(III. ) Almost entire disuse of any compound tenses.
(IV.) Prefixing a to aorist tense.
(Vide REMAR KS .)
Root .—The root is formed from the infinitive by cutting off ago.
In those verbs in which the ego of the infinitive is preceded by ch
or j,those letters are changed to tic or ht in the root,as dochaga,rootdoth or doht.
Verbs coming under this head are mostly those derived from Persian
verbs ending in khtan,and which change the Irht into in the aorist
tense.
Infinitive,ending in age . This part of the verb,although it bearsno resemblance to the Persian infinitive,yet appears to have the exact
meaning of an infinitive. It is,however,rarely used. From it is
2 r u e
10 ms murm ur -ssmocnss manner .
formed by changing aga into agi an adjective signifying to be
to be about to or,tobe— able
e.g .,gwashagi,to be said,i.e. ought to be said,fit to be said ;
about to say,or speakable ; roag i,about to go,or ought to
go man roagi uh,I am about to go,I am to go.
This correSponds very closely with thePersianwordsguftanl,raftani,&c.,which are formed by adding i. to the infinitive.
Aorist—Formed by prefixiug a and adding various personal termi
nations to the root.
This tense has present,future,andpotential significations,e.g .,Man
agwashi ir,I am speaking,I shall Speak,or I may speak.
When preceded bya word ending in a short vowel,the aorist usuallyloses its a prefixed.
(Vide REMAR KS .)
P reter ite.—This is formed from the root generally by the addition
of ta or ita,and has no variation for the three persons,singular and
plural. It is evidently the preterite participle of the Persian verb.
This tense is not in such common use as the Perfect.
The Preterite has often an abbreviated form,as for hur ta,g it for
gwashta,di for di ta,and in conversation the final a is very frequently
omitted.
Perfect—This tense is formed by the Preterite Participlewith vari
ous personal terminations added.
There appears to be no difference in the meaning of this tense and
the preceding. It is perhaps applied more to past and completed
actions.
Imperative—The 2ud pers. sing. is formed by prefixing be or p e
to the root. . The 2nd pers. plural is formed by adding i or id to the
2ud pers. sing.
Some verbs,instead of taking be or pe,require the 6 to be followedby the first vowel in the root,as here,bubur,bigir .
The first and third persons are formed by compounds with the verb,ltaga.
”See Let.
12 mmMEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT .
verb with the aorist of the verb hanaga. The verb hanaga may per
haps be considered to have themeaning of to be able,in which case
the following sentences correspond very closely with the Persian
I can go,Man shuta’Iranair Persian—Man mitawé nam raft.
I cannot lift it,Man chis kur ta no’hananish.
It is also expressed by thepast tense with the futureof theverb to be.
I cannot fasten this,E basto nabi t. Literally—It cannot,or will
not,be fastened.
Could.—This is expressed by the preterite tense of the verb w ith
the preterite of the verb Icanaga. The abbreviated form of the latter,viz .,hit,is generally used. If the first verb is formed by a compound
'
of the verb Iranaga,his is invariably used. I could not lift it,man chis
hur ta no hit I could not fasten it,man basta na hur ta .
Let.—This is expressed in the first and third persons of the imperative by bil (the imperative of liaga,to permit) with the aorist of the
verb.
Letme go,Bil Irehman aroan. I will let himgo is expressed byMan
oir r'
i roega li-i it (or hilin).
I allowed him to go,or I let him go,Man air r‘
z raago ishta.
ifstin or list,negative nistin or nist.
This is used to signify possession or existence,and takes the place ofthe verb to have. It undergoes no inflection.
e.g . Tara. fursat fist ? Have you leisure?
ach iist ? Is there any fire
itch nist, There is no fire.
Kanaga,deaga,and Irapagm—These verbs are often used in
conjunction with another word to forma verb . When used in this way
they take no prefix to the 2nd persons of the imperative.
Conj ugation of Verbs.
BUAGA,BIAGA,To be,or to become.
This is the only verb with separate present and future tenses.
Present.
Sing .
1. man uii, we are.
2. to
3 ii. if) or int,
14 run nsxaanss-nsw ocnss DIALEC‘I‘.
Agar bebtd.—This phrase is used to express ifthere be any, e. g .
Boro ripa bio'
r,go and fetch water agar bebtdman olré r iit,if there beany I will bring it.
—Vide Potential.
The present tense of this verb appears to correspond to the verbal
terminations of the samemeaning in Persian.
The future appears to correspond with buwomof the Persian verb
budon,to be,and the second form of the preterite is evidently fromthe same verb.
The following show themethod of conjugation of the irregular verbs
Iconoga,oiago,and raago,the defective sorpodo’
boiii,and the regularverb gwoshago. The latter shows the method of inflection of all
Beloochee verbs w ith the exception of the manner of forming the
preterite tense,in which there is considerable irregularity.
KANAGA,To do.
Aorist,I am doing,or I will do.
1. man akan-lfi,as. air. auraakan-ar’
i .
2. to akan-e. shunn'
i akan-e,it.3. 5.akant,akani t. ii akan-ant.
Preter ite,I did.
emit
kurta,kuta,kii . shumfi kurta,kuts,5
Perfect,I did,I have done.
mankurtag-aii,uii ;kurtag-air,nix. amakurtag-aii,kutug-air.
to kurtag-e,kutag-e. shumfi kurtag-i,hutag-i .
ii kurtag-ait,ant,kutagaii ant . ii kurtag
-aii,kutag-aii .
P reterite Par ticip le,Done.
Kurtag or kutug .
Imperative.
2nd pers. sing. p ehon,Iran. 2nd pers. pl. pehant,hunt.
fat and 3rd persons formed by aorist with bil.
AIAGA,to come.
This verb has two forms of the aorist.
18 ms nnxsansE-ssLoocnss DIALECT .
ADVERBS .
In Beloochee adverbs exhibit no peculiarities. In construction they
generally precede the verb.
They are generally the inflected forms of nouns.
Following is a list of thosemost in use
above, sarbara,halal.afterwards gudan,gudin,(time), pashtara.
after,behind randa.
(Place).again, noka (literally
anew) .
yek-kashii .
pesara,peshtera.
dema,saria.
i dem,dema.
miyanji,toka.
buna,chira.
pada.
randa.
jala.
izhbar,izhbi .achida,azhda,ashida,chamidz
'
i .
chitor,choni,choan.
chuut,chinka.
whence,ngii,hamingfi . why,ids,hamida. in themorn
thar,tahar,laps . ing,izhbar,izbbi (with in the even. bega.
us) . ing, 0
yet, tanagi,tanagei .
The following are used as Relative and Correlative.
Rel. harwahdi keh,when. Correl. hamawahdi,then.
i ja,har ji,har kuja,wh hamaugii,hamuda,there,ever . thither .
nfin,nin,hanfin,hanin.
darai,dar,dana.
Barbara.
yebari,yek bar .
chosh.
marochi .
banded.
ishap.
edem,e nemaga.
achuda, ashudz'
t,chamuda (for
ach hamuda) .buna,chira.
bala.
kadi ii .
kuj ii,kii,with theverbroaga,Irvj d &ngil is
used ; e.g . where
are you going,huj a dugi
’
t aroe.
ash kujii .
parche.,parche.
soba.
20 r s s msxmnnn-ssnoocnss DIALECT.
e.g . I amgoing toGwadur,ManGwadara’roait
He went from Gwadur to Pusnee,a ash
Gwadur taP rient shutagah How far is it
from here to Gwadur ? Az hda ta Gwalior
chant di r in.7
under, chi ra,buna.
upon, sara.
with, gen,go,him. In the sense of by ash,ach.
without, bagar.
in possession of, gofi,go,gwara ; e.g . I have it,Goman list,ormani gwara fist.
d sh and och are very often changed to’sh or
’eh before a word
beginning with a vowel,and are sounded as if part of the next word
as’ch e (pronounced che) for och e,from this.
Gait and go have the peculiarity of being frequently both used to
express the word w ith : e.g.,Come with me,GO man bit? Bringthose things with you,A chiana goi: wot biiir go.
CONJUNCTIONS.
These present no peculiarities. The following are the most com
mon
ham.
0 .
bali,lekin.
agar .
INTERJECTIONS.
Besides the ordinary Mussulman phrases,the principal areBravo Sh
'
abash.
Oh ! Ai (vocative) .
Q uick quick ! Make haste! Haya-haya.
Indeed Honcho.
DIVISIONS OF TIME.
The following names of various parts of the dav and night,areuseful to any one travelling in Mekran
The Space from about two to four hours mazanm gwarbam.
before daylight,
About one hour before daylight, gwarbam.
rns nsm nss-srnoocuss Dra wer . 21
When there is just faint dawn, i tarag.
Just before sunrise, nimaz, roshanal
(prayer) .About one to two hours after sunrise, naharia wahdi.
From about three hours after sunrise swaragiini .
till noon,Noon,Noon till about 2 r .u .,2 till sunset,About two hours before sunset,From sunset till dark,When just dark,About one hour after sunset,From the time it becomes quite dark till
midnight,Midnight, nimshap
NUMERALS.
These almost exactly the same as the Persian numbers
yak,yek. l l . yoazda.
do. 12. dowiizdit.
sai . 13. sizda.
chai r . 14. charda.
pauj,punch. 15 . paazda.
shash. 16. shahzda.
hapt,haft. 17 . haptd'
it .
hasht. 18 hashtda.
no. 19 . 110d .
da. 20. bist.
21,22,23,&c.,bist-o-yak,bist-o-do,&c.
si . 80. hashti d.
chehil. 90. nowed.
panja. 100. sad.
shiist,shfisht. 200. dosed.
haptiid. 1000. hazar .
ORDINALS .
l st,awwal. 2nd,domi .
For the rest add mi to the cardinal numbers
nimroch .
zuhr (prayer) .bega.
asr (prayer) .
magrab (prayer) .shiim.
ashar (prayer) .shap.
22 m s ass assins-sn ow s“ nm scr .
FRACTIONS.
i nim saick rub or charek i panchek.
For the rest add eh to the cardinal numbers.
DAYS OF THE WEEK .
These are the same as the Persian
Sunday, yak shambe.
Monday, do shambe.
Tuesday, sai shambe.
Wednesday, char shambe.
Thursday, panj shambe.
Friday, juma,adina.
Saturday, shambe.
DAYS,NIGHTS,AND YEARS PAST AND TO COME.
Four days ago, pishta-pareri or pishta
-
pair i .
Three days ago, pesh-
pareri or pesh-pairi .
Day before yesterday,pareri,pairi .Yesterday, 21.
To-day, marochi .
To-morrow, bfifidfid.
Day after tomorrow, poshi ponshi .
Third day hence, paramposhi .
Fourth day hence, pishti-
paramposhi .
Last night, doshi .
Night before last, parandoshi .
The third night past,pisparandosh‘
i .
Beyond the above limits the number of days is expressed as
follows
I arrived five days ago,Ponchm'
i roch man Zitagun,or Marochi
ponchmi roch int Itch man atoguh.
I am going in five days,Panch rocho gud mon aretri .
Last year, par'
i .
Year before last, pair'
ari .
Third year past, peshta
This year, imbarii .
IRREGULAR VERBS.
The following is a list of the principal irregular verbs,showing thel st person singular of the aorist,the preterite,and the imperative with
rut: assesses manner . 25
Drohi jfir e ?
taiar bi t) . To taisr jfir e ?
Droha bi t (or Are vou well ? May you be well !
Are you well ? Are you veryTo shar taiar jfir e ? To wat well ? Are you well yourself?
taiar e ? Tai Elam taiar an? Are your peoplewell ? Is your
Tai bri s taiar iii ? Tai z i l brother well ? Is your wife
taiar in. &c. &c . well ? &c . &c .
B .—Habar de,habar kan,or Give news.
mihrbfini kan.
4.—Ash hudai mihrbani draiir
'
r From God’
s kindness all is well.
hair iii .
or,ash hudai rahm badi na
hair if) .
or,ash tai selamati draiinhairiii .
to habar dc,to habar kan.
or to mihrbiini kan .
B . gives the same answer as A .
dreha bot,&c.,is often repeated,then
A .—Nokin hala kan.
B .—Man na hush kurta badiir
bai l,to nokiii hills. kan.
A .—Mannahushkurtabadtnhal. I have heard no bad news.
This is all subject to variations at the will of the speaker,but theabove is the most usual form.
From God’
s mercy it is not bad
but well (with me) .From your safety all is well.
You give news.
After this,wash at,drohoj ur e
Give news.
I have heard no bad news,you
give news.
In the case of a salutation of one man toa body ofother men the rule
is that the new comer addresses the Salem olih to theothers generally.
and it is answered by them together . The wash at,droha bat,&c. is
then interchanged by the new comer with each individual of the party
in turn,or if the party be large w ith a few of the head people only.
After this,the headman of the party,addressing his followers,sayshabar gir,ask for news. The followers decline doing this by saying j i,implying that they leave it to the chief to ask for news. The chief
then proceeds with the salutation from habar de.
Should one ofthe parties be in a house and the other ar rive from out
side,the former must be the first to say wash at and habar hon.
Answering a man’
s enquiries by less than he asks you is a proofof
assumption of superior position or of ill manners.
l r a s
run: xsxaanss-ssnoocnss DIALECT. 27
Light the lamp.
Put out the lamp.
Turn to the right .
s.
Don’
t make a noise.
Do as I say.
Mind your own business.
Stand still.
Bring some drinking water .
Bring some water for washing
hands .
Go slowly.
Don’
t let him go.
When are you going to leave ?
We shall leave to-morrow morn
ing early.
Whojare you ?Are you Mahomed ?
Where have you come from?
Where have they gone ?
What do you want ?Where do you live ?Where are you going ?When will he come back 7
He will never come back.
What is the use of that ?Why do you do thus ?What is the matter ?What do you call this ?
What is the name of this ?
Do you understand ?
I don’
t understand.
Make him understand (i. e. ex
plain to him) .Listen to me.
What you say is all tr ue.
Say it again.
or To Maho
Mani habara gosh di r.
Hanch keh to agwashe drust that
in.
Noka begwash.
Chir iga rok pekan.
Chirfiga pukush.
Ri sta pitar .
Mani salama bedi or berssi n.
Towfir mskan.
Hanch keh man agwashi ii hancho
pekan.
To wati kfira pekan.
Bosht.
Waragi iipa btar .
Dast shodaga zi ps btar .
Wash-wash(a) boro.
Airamail roaga.
To kadlr’
nsark agire
Amii soba mahala ’roan.
To kai e
Mahomed to e
med e I
To ash kuja iitkage ?
A kujii {ingu shutagar'
i ?
To che lote
To kujit ninde ?
To kujafingfi aroe ?
A kadi ii pada’kait ?
A izhbar pads na siat.
A che kiir akait ?
To parchii chosh akaue ?
Che bii ta ?
To eshira che’
gwashe?
Eshi nt’
tm che
To sarpada’be ?
Man sarpada na’
batn.
Airasarpad kan.
28 rm: MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT .
I will give you ten rupees per Man turi mi ha di kaldi ra’dci ii .
mensem.
Very good Sir,I agree. Sak shar Wi ja,kabfll in.
Bring those things with you . A chi i na goh wat bii r go.
It is very hot. Sak garm iii .
The sky is cloudy. Asmi na nod i n.
How dark it is. Cho tahi r in.
It will rain to-day. Marochi haur abi .
Does much snow fall on the hills ? Kohi na sara harp bi z akapi
There was thunder yesterdav . Z i grund buts .
Has the moon risen yet ?ITanagi mi h dar at
Last night there was lightning Doshi kutube girok at (or bi ts) .in the north. Probably the Geshtar marochi kohr i pa
’ki r t.
river will fill to-day (bring waterto-day) .
Why do you go on foot To .parchi pi da roe ?
I am fond ofwalking . Mana dost abinpi da roaga.
Are you tired? To dam burta ?
Come with me. Go man bii goii .
Call me early in the morning. Mana sobami hala pi da kan.
They went six months ago. Shash mi h ail keh i shutagant
It is three years since I was about Sai si l ah keh man paridi us.
here. i tkagun.
Do you like to go? Tur i dost abi roaga ?
As you like. Hanch keh turi dost abi .
Give me a little water . Manakamin(or tukurifi) i pabedi .Have you learnt Hindustani ? To Hindusti nia burta.
I will wear this shirt. Man e ji maga gwara’kanai1.
I will wear these trousers . Man e shalwi ra pi da’
kanafi.
A little remains in this inkstand E maadi na li pa tukur mi n ii) .
I have nothing to eat or drink. Mana waraga-charaga hich chl
nist .
Go in front . Si rla boro.
Put these things in the bag . E chii na pelaga li pa mi nkan (ormi n gij) .
Put it down here. Hamidi ir kani .
Come down from there . Ashudi i r kap .
Go down into the nullah here and Hamidi kohra li pa i r kap,i demout there on the other hamudi dar kap.
sr e.
Pour water into this. Eshin i pa i r reeh.
rm: usxaaass-asnoocnss manner. 29
Have you
water
Take those things out of the
Whatever be lost I will find.
Have you water with you
Haveyou brought water
you
Come with the things.
thrown away To i pa retka ?
A chli na dar gej’che pelaga li ps .
Har che gi r ab! man dan gejtfi.
Ap goil iii go ?
Ap aurta gofi ?
To get: simi na boro (or got: simina lura here) .
This was formerlymine,now it is E awwalmanig buts,hanlr'
i ang iii .his.
of.)
Are the camels readyYes sir,they are all ready.
The camelmen want an advance tobuyprovisions for the jour ney.
Start ofl'
.
How far is to-day’
s stage ?
We shall arrive there at sunset.
What kind of a road is it,goodor bad ?
The road is all good,but in thecreek there may be some difficulty.
When is it high tide ?
It is high tide now,but by the
time we reach the creek there
will not be much water in it.
Will there be moonlight to-night?
What time does the moon rise?
Themoon will rise at midnight
Take care that the camel’s feet do
not slip in the creek.
I will follow you.
I shall go by the sea-beach.
The way will be stopped on the
at Buddook‘ when
the tide rises.
Bag h er in ?
Ben wi ja drust tii r air.Hushterli u zara
’lotai1keh tosh
aga’
girai1.
Sark gir.
Marochlaminz il chant di r tn
Ami magraba’rasar
'
1.
Ri oqhoan iii ? Shar in ? Gandag
in
Drohi iii r i shar tn,bali kohartukurir
'
i mushknli abi .
Buryi kadin pur abi?
Daryi hanl il pur in,lekin harwahdl ami kohra rassfi i p bi sna
’
bl .
Ishap mi hi ki n! abl
Mi h che wshdi dar akait ?
Mi h ntmshapa dsr akait.
Habardi r keh kohra li ps hushteraa pi d na
’lugushi (or us
’shitterl) .
Man tai rands’haish.
Man tii ba’roan.
Harwahdl keh daryi bi li’kait.
tii bs ri,Badfika gat abi .
A name given to places where the beach is impassable at high tide.
30 THE usxaanns-ssnoocnss manner .
What is that which I can see in
the distance
I think it is a camel.
Do you see those trees ?
That is where a Kulmuttee was
killed last year by the Rinds.
Indeed !
What kind ofground is it there ?
It is salt ground.
Is there a well near those trees ?
Yes sir,there is. It would bewell
ifwe were to stay there to-night.
Is the water sweet there?
It isnot very sweet,but it is drinkable.
Is theregood grass for the camels ?
There is plenty of salt grass and
babul trees.
Do you think there will be anyrain ?
No there will not be any rain
till the winter .
What people live in those huts ?
Are these the people who have
been lately stealing camels?
No,these are good people and do
not steal .
How did they come by these
fields ?
It was given to them as blood
money.
Are there any hares here?
In the winter there are a very
great many grouse and par
Are there any deer here
At night the deer come from the
hills.
Is the tent pitched ?
Have the camelmen fetched woodand water ?
A che tn keh dt'
rt pedi tn?
Tai dila haur abi
Na,z imisti na haur ahi,peshtarana
’bi .
A halka kai anindi ?
Hami u ail keh hanifi hushteri na
duzd knrtagar’
i ?
Na,e sharihmardumi n ail duzdu
na’kanai1.
E zamin chitor airi rasita?
Airi hfina rasita,(or hiina sara
rasita)Ingfi kargoshk abi ?
Z imisti ua ingfi kataugar o kapin
jar bi z iii,hancho keh much.
Ingfi i sk ahi ?
Shapa i sk ash koh akaian.
Tambila jata, (or tambiia lils
kurta)?
Hushterii n di r 0 i p aurtagar'
i
Geshtar hushtera in.
A dri ehi na ginde to ?
Gwastagih si la,hsmi ngfi Bindi nyek Kalmatia kushta.
Hancho !
Angfi chitor zamin in ?
Shor iii (or kalar in).A drachki na naz ik chi h i st
Hi waja astin. Agi r ami shapa
hami ngfi adi raii sak shar ahi .
Angii i p wash iii ?
Sak wash na iii hali waragi ahi .
Hushteraa wi sts shann ki abi ?
Si rag o ebish bi z iii .
32 THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT .
z indagdrust,drohi,hams,hsmuk
liaga,lii r'
1,ishta.,hilbi dim
goh,go,li raham
pitiiki.
yekkashi
o
zahr
rastar (if harim),dalwat (if hali l)
much
hali k
jawi hmor
tumir,di rwarsirimugsindi n
chiz i
kas
har-che-behid,hanchoshi
soreh
chama siyi hag
dast,hi zkbagal
lashkar
rasags,arasi ii,rastaor rasita,beras
rasi naga,rasi nih,rasi nta,berssi n
rag
hanch,hancho
pur
justb kanaga,justakanaga
har
hing (hind)
awaken
kumak deaga
kumak
expressed by dative case,Gwadara at Gwa
dur”
hi ga hiaga
pi dakanaga(tronsitivc)
pi daaiaga (intronsi tive)
towi r
beat,to
6 r a s
THE MEKRANEE-BRLOOCHI E DIALECT .
den
0
li kaga,ali klh,likits,beli k
shapchar
lach,lachuk,kapi t lahr kanaga
pi t
lahr hfiaga
benaga makask,gwama
rich
rish
gundi r,gokindi r,dandfi
janaga,ajaniu,jataor jat,bej
gud,gandaltaht,ti htdema,si rii
awwal, peshtara.,pesara
paki r,mii rsi ri kanaga
randa
tlllii
li p
huna,chira
toka,miyi njii dem,demabisi h
murgz i hir,zahrsiyi h
li ri
kor,hecham
hi m
hi na zar
nil brother
msjgpri hi
prushaga,sprushIil prushta,beprush
sindaga,asindiix,sista,besind
gin
it,isht
phul
lagim
i raga ; i rl it or kir ifl ; aurta ; bii r
bri s,bri t
butterfly
THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT .
bor
garnish
ti r
ki lib,tir-rechki rigar,gok
gwurm,gorung
gor
sochaga,asochi ii,sotka,hesoch
sfichaga,asiichifi,si tka,hesi ch
kalakanaga
charz
hali,lekinkasi h
nemagkimat kanaga
(z uraga org iraga
generally used)
pirik
C .
gwask
gwi n kanaga
hushtera
chi rmi t,jari,hir,banduki
kowi t,kowi nf
di chi
senag
saramsi
gwarhand
pi rdin
ki ffir
top
yekdi r
top,kulii.topi (him! )parwfi
beparwz'
x
jul
P1P
pfishi
giraga,agir ifi,gibta bigir
pirik
see fall,tocause to
THE NEKBANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
we“arrive, to collect,to
cause to"
ishkiir,ishkarfisfin
kalak,gul
shili’
mch
dil
z i g,choku nik
patfisl,hushkuuagnmrgu
dfirchlul
kilfit,shah rhi k
pi hk
shiL dupi
si’at
gud
poshiik,guda’
m
istlu
cook,to
nod
tii b
mochi
zad
koros,Rams,bi ngii
ni lagiau
kfihaw ii cry,tosard
moch kanagamuch kanaga
rang
shak,sarandrazfi,rfiz iaiaga ; mm, or
akain’
x,fitka,i t;or at bifi
dar kapaga
it kapaga
dero
yebara
mubdei
bri
gaga, abnfix
’
x.
r lhta,brijgrfidaga, agri dl ix
gradita or gri sta,begrfid
rod
sai d
kinich
buj i,buchkarpi a
mi dagm gok
kukli,nfihuchinkang
kurakush,chirattakai r,taski t,gunichotz amik
gurfig
greaga, agrewu l'
u.
grew,bngrikusijDuraga, abur l l
'
l
burita,bubur
36 THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
alotlfi.
papuk ( lst stage)
kulunt (2nd stage)
pogaz (3rd stage)
muzati
karabé
hurmagmach,macbijanikroch dotal kanaga
murtagkar
kari
giran
wamdar
juhlask,ander
nazurk
lotainaga, alo
taini r'
x,lotainta,belotain
dosar i
juhlilotaga,lotita
namb,gwapshlapa dard,express
ed thus I
have diarrhoea,mani lap dardakauit
miraga,amirfi l.murta,bemir
moshkul
kanda janagasham
nemaga
legar,childir,dii rkanaga akaul r
’
x
kurta or In] ;
pekan or bekan
tabib
kuchak
har
dotal
kapot
jala
huqmaga,ahurjiui il,hurjinta,hurjin
uamfina
waraga,awarm,Warta,bur
galenaga,agaleui ixgalema,galenor gali
dysentery
each,every
TB ! U EKRANEE-BILOOCB I E DIALECT.
pit
dohl
kaipl
hushk
bat
gungmujhak
nindaga,nisbta,beh ind
same as diarrhcea
hai r,bar, hamahamuk
gosh
mi hala earlymorning, soba
mi hala
dunya
hak
rodarat
asan
waraga, awarin
warts,burmagir
dap
rechaga,arechh'
i.
retka,tech
fall,cause to
iz hbar,izhbi
ki bfi,zahr,shar
bagar
hatch
ajab
charp,pig
37
sak
dem
ka
gaga, akapi ii,apta,behap
perenaga,aperenlr’
x,perenta,peren ;or pen nanaga,perenfinir
'
i,perenanta,peteni a
datog
dahikan
ufilband
bandagn,abandlr'
n,busts,beband
lagaga,alagln,lagita,belag
38
find,to
THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT .
kismat,nasib
pis,pit
guna
trus
trusaga, atrusin,trusita,betrus
tap
kam
dagi‘
rr,zamin
panchmi
panchek
anj i r
jang kanaga,mi raga,amirl r
’
x,mirita,bemir
suhan
subz’
in kanaga
ra rasitagm'
n?
dargejaga,daragej in,dargetka,dargej
malz‘
im
baliis
lankuk,lankuhchuki-lankuk
i ch,i sjanaga,njnnifi,jata or jat,bejan
mohr
awwal
mahi
med
musht
li kar i (Sindee)
gosht
rlmag,310cap or
goal :
flock,herd
forgh e
gwurum,goruug,oxen
bag,camel:ar t
pul
makask
biil kanaga
dang
kap
nod,11am!)dotiil kanaga
randa aiaga. rand:roaga
waragi,warnsbewukiif,gunok
piid
pad ; pada rand
par ; generally ex
wasta,occasionallyused but pro
bably only by
persons ac
quainted with
H industani or
Sindee
z ii riiwarl,u bsrdastl
peshani
d
40 ms msxaaxaa-astoocnaa DIALECT.
char]:
li pmurda
hi'
ipsa sarahur
zarnin
katangar, katun
gar,chakur
grow],to guraga, aguri il .
gunta,gurzaitun
rago,ragfimallr
tfipak
shfiro rfi,kishk,sark
n.
kmya,lurem
i
nd,a ndhilt
n m
di rgan, adfgrl in,
da
fia
sfi'
ficffl
iihn
érdashta,bedar
kal,kandadast
dasmalsumb,tung
dranjaga; adrauji in;dratka,drahta,or dranjitabedrfinj
sak
kargoshk
top,kula'
i
expressed as
follows : I have,mana fist ; you
have,turii int,&c.,or manigwara i st &c.
bi fu,shikarl5
m ag,sarsara dard
dil
garmag ban
hibisht chitor, choni,choan
dajuk
plnz
bal lad
dozak,dozesee
“ flock"
ingfi,idz'
i,hamingfi.hmnidii
paridii
kang
burz
heuag
kfint
gwamz,sochfikohiips,hiispsawiir
ual
garm
garmagsii
’
at
log,metaghulk
THE Li l-2KRANEE-BELOOCUEB DIALECT .
chuat,chiokz‘
i
tung
tolag
shfigur
limbiiri
darya'
ii sochiiko
headubi
tahz'
i r,lz'
ipa,thiir keep,toalbat
nil
izmat kanfik
bachak
kfifir
masa
41
daraga, adii rin,dashta,bedfir
kilit
lotia
lagata janagashanik
kushaga,akushh'
i,kushta,pukush
rakam
mihrbanl
badshah
THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
gosh daraga
kasiin
tukur,kam,kamk,all take in
flection iii
nindaga,anindln,nishta,beniud
ladaga,‘
aladm,ladita,belad
lor,hikatakubl
madagthren
draj
( l ) chfiraga,acharif] chi rita,bichz
'
rr (2) haiyiilkanaga
sust
hiil
hfil kanaga
gar kanaga
nuksi‘
m,nuskiin
mardum
hamb
timar
tor,paima. Do itin this manner ;e tor pekan,or epaima pekan
baz very rna
hancho
much
sark giraga,darkapaga
madifin
uishun
bfiz fir
sir
daur
wi jatagird
hasi r
maul
gosht
dharm,dfiwfi,darmun
dochfir kapaga
ltfitag,ki tagtejagsaudagar
para,pi rotok
toka
shir
trushpin shir
jantar,charknamb
rad
rad kanaga
lilt kanaga
tar
zar,nagdmah
shadfi
ma
mai lta'
mi
gesh,geshtarangar
sob
44 THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
no hich
sowz'
u' kanaga,or
sowfir bfiaga
J lmfiz bfiaga
sar kapaga
koh
kasanmmushk
barfit, shrapar,barot
dap
men,gil sogind,saugind.
rizhgfik charz
kun,hiin habar z iraga
kado tel,roganmashk,kali zahrm tel
kachal,istal,ltachar
nakun,nfihun
tank
nafagzarfir
gardin
siichin,sichinshirish
33 7388 : asari i'
i,sarita,besar
izhbar na,izhbi nanok
ha],hfil-i-nokshap
bulbul
na
towiir
nimroch
kutub
poz
granz,granz
na
niin,hanun,haninkohr
shep,jurdai
janai-biiak
O .
malham
pi r
kwahn
yebar i,yek bar
pimaz
pach kanaga,bojega
afifin
niiring
hukm
digar
dara'
ii,dar,dansarbara,sari
Tar. MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT . 45
kaplnjar
gwastag
ra,kishknamuna
pagar
plsh
mesh-murgkalam
sorir'
i mirch
siyahm pilpil
kabt’
i,z ahrliaga,ali iii,ishta,bil
arz l
tikam
chain
kapodar
sarjawatach
darap,e. 9 . massdarap,an ink
stand
ja,jfisai r bfiaga
dak,dalt,wadhash !
gwiiz i
gwaz i kanaga
dost
kamir
nangfir
ans:
garib,kangalsikun
goko,gokinsee to have
kimat
tung
wadi kanaga
kabfi
kashaga,akashir’
i,kashta,bekash
hurymaga,shuntnin, hurjinta,burjin
palwar
z iruk
(1) man kanaga
(2
man kashsga
i t brings
Q .
jangali bathancho keh much
46
quit,to
quarter,a
rabbit
THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT .
yele deaga,yelekanaga
rub
R .
kargoshk, wilai
yati kargoshk
haur
drinag,drinuk
chis kanaga,chistakanaga
maw‘
ich
ti rkfi
istraginushk
wanaga,awanin,wanta,bewan
tiar
sfir,sohrlagam
mabar
siyad
daraga, adar in
dashta,bedarman bfiaga,pashkapaga
mana tura, &c.,haiyal in
ad kanaga
joko, (Sindee)z imma
I am responsible
for this, eshi
jokomani sarain
pahli
birinjdunyadar
rast
rast
hak
mundar i
ripe pakka
rise,to pi da ainga
rise (sun or dar aiaga
moon)
run,to
saddle,camel, raht,katabbaggage
saddle,cameh pakaroriding
saddle,horsesail
kohr
ra,kishkduzdi kanaga,h illkanaga
duz d‘
i,hfil
pataaga,apatam,pat
'
ata,pats-
1.
li ra deaga
gulab
gird
mushaga,amushinmushta,mush
(1) maidana roaga
(2) tachaga,atachin,tschita or
tatkata,betachkaldar
zang
zangi
S
48 THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
mocb‘
i (hind)duki n
saudagar
patak (things,)gwand
tiab
reza
kopak,kapagpezh di raga
nfidrohfi
nadrohiii
gechin
betowfir
nugra
lewar
sbaita janagabudaga, abudi ii,budita,bud
gwahfir
nindaga,anindi ii,nishta, benind
or mind
jokinaga,ajokini i’
i,jokinta,bejokin
post
asmiin
wiib
wapsaga,awapsm,wapta,bwaps or
bwaSp
lugushan
( l ) lugushaga,alugushin, ln
gushta,lngush(2) shitteraga
(3) trapunzagawash-wash
kasfiu
kastar
bo kanaga, bfi
kanaga
smoke
smoke, to
( tobacco)
snake
snow
sometimes
dit
tambak kashaga
sowfiso
pada dil
laht,kam,kamk(take inflection“ in
”inch ru
k'
i,inchki
harwahdi,wahdi
kas
chi z i
zag
resh
trushp
kishaga,akishifnkishta,bekish
patriishag,triposhk( l ) gwashaga,as.
washi r’
n,gwashtaor gfi,begwash
(2) habar kanaga
gwashfilt
chashmak
habar
hizar
moko
kuntag
dilui
hasag
hidrik
tabila
miuz il,manz i l
ran nnxamnn-nntoocann manner . 49
standstill,to wushtaga,awush
tin wushtata
bosht or bwusht
istar,tartsarkgiraga, dar
aiaga,dar kapagastay,to,stop daraga, adarin,
dashta,heda'
i r
bapfigbfit
puléid
kadamT .
lattake,to ( l ) z firaga,azurin,
angar z t'
irta,buz fir,betom
‘
ir(2) z iraga,az irln,
li p airts,biz ir,sing (3) giraga,agirin,gat gibts,bigirtulan baraga, abari1
’
1.
"m burta,beber
geebags,agechln, d“
age
d”
getka,gechgetlta,
’
dar gej
Janaga,ajanin,jata ir e a a,ir aor jat,beja" 1
8113igr getka
ge
iir
lugaga,alagi r’
i,lagej
g1ta,belag burz
charz, karwanak
mohukurn
tear,to
gwarm
( l ) sangindwaraga
(2) I swear it is
thus,&c. hudt'
i i
sarin chosh int
turl
wash
uzhnag kanaga
zam,shamshirbulando, daryal
asp.
chlchar
gaz
wateg,talambnishiin
pichak
dapa kanaga
chi
diraga, adirln,dirta,bidir
dirgind
tambii
achudii,sahadi
THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT .
tanak
kalai-inch,kalidam buatag
m dam baraga.
zand
leng
chi
( t) geshtar,geshtar chosh in,I think it is so
(2) mana dila (inmy mind) e. y .
mana dnla chosh
i1’
1,I think it is sosaimi
saiek
tuung
e,eshhamc,hamesh
edem
kuntag
to,taudaur deaga
daur deaga,chagaldeaga
rechaga,arecli i ii,retka,rech
lamkuk
grund,hfirii
bandik,bandi
gardin
chosh,chokitag
bandaga,aba 11din,basta,beband
pulank
trund
wahdi,wakt (rare)bar,bar,bar i
( l ) Dative case or
(2) ti ; tais usedwhen speakingof two places or
objects,in th esense of fromone to theother .
He went to
Pusnee ii Fasniashuta. He w en t
from Gwadu r toPusnee 11 ashGwfidar tz
’
i Pasn'
i
slmta. How faris it fromhere to
marochi
lamkuk
goil,go,ldra,yessara
bfifidfid
z uwiin
ishap
dant
sa
l'
touch,to
turtle
unfasten
vacant
rns MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT . 51
lagaga, alag111,lagita,belag
nemaga
shahr
saudagar
drach,drachkbal
chish,tish
kunfir (Il ind.,ber)mach,machikarag
shalwar
P58
halagdfir,halidii rtaraga,star in,tarita,pltar
kfisib
nfikfi
chi ra,buna
( l ) defecth e \ erb ;aor ist,man,to,&c .,sarpadabaiorsarpad al111
°
1; p re
ter zte,man, to
&c .,8111padhlita.
(2) zanag a,az i ni r’
i,z finta,bez iin
pach kanaga,bojaga
bi h’
t
sara,sarbariikar
kiir ainga
waragi,waragshahr
pedi,pedi g,gindagi
shanag
shanag kanaga.
gij,geti
pagfir
thren
pi da kanaga
sail,sel
pilda toaga
taraga, atar in,tan ta,pitar
diwar
janggarm
shodaga, ashodmshodita or
shushtu,pushod
gudshod
gwodar,nz‘
ii gwamz
edat
morn
pi da kanaga
bapta,haftashahima kashaga ;
e. g . weigh this,shahima peka
nish,or eshirashiihima kan
pekash
chah
fir,drobi
THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
roirsht,magrabtar
pulenaga,apulenmpulente,pulen
pulaga, apulin,pulita,pul
iibro,lilche
gandin,galachark
kadih
harwahdi
ash kuja
w ith verb to
go”kujaangii.
where are you
going kujaangii aroe
7
kujz'
in,kudanchabuk
ispet
kai ? wrong
keh
tanagei
sharab
z imisti n
akalwand,pahamdar,hosh i
gon,go,lfirabagar
shahid
gwark
janindar
pazhm
kar,izmat
dunyi
kirm
swag
halas
tap
dasta much
nimishtakanaga,ornovista kanaga
rad
a or ii
ach,asach v . ash
achfir
achida,ashidii,azhdii
achuda,ashudii{1d kanaga
aia a,aii ii ora ailn, Etta,i tka or at,bii
'
i
ajabalt
akalwand
akl v . agl
albat
alla
umi,mi5115:
THE l EKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
prefix to aorist tenses of
verbs
termination of dative
and accusative case
53
he,that (demonstrative) I i n P.
a whale gal all m,going in P.
water
a sail
from here ach and idii
from there,thence ach and uda
to make, prepare, iimi da,prepared P,repair ada,fulfilment A,
on that side
Opium
if
sense,understanding
summer
iron
a string for fasteningtrowsers.
to come umadan
“f“? ajab4 67 iihak
t aklmand
indeed,certainlyGod
we
pomegranate
54 THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE D IALECT .
anamat kanaga,to lend (anything except
money)angar still,.more,encoreangur a grape
anjir a fig
5p water
apus. aps pregnant (animals)araga,{winor to bring u O
J,T fiwardanakii rin,aurta,biar
{i s 0 . 50h
asan cheap,easy easy
ash,ach,azh from,by,w ith38115 the prayer time in even
ing,about 1hour aftersunset
ashidz’
i v . achida
ashudii va chuda
ask,an a deer
asman the skyasr the prayer time,about
2hours before sunset
the early dawn
iiwarda
awwal first,before (adverb of J fl awwal
time)aah v. ash
azhdz’
i v. achidz'
i
boy,child,infantto abuse
to abuse
the back (of the body)almond p la
t-3 badam
a king 8L550U badshah
56 ms usxm sa-nnmocnnnmanner .
a cock fowl
a hawk
steama load,a time (occur
rence)bar,bar,bar
'
i a time (occurrence)barabar
bereber
baraga,aban n. to take away,to learnhurts,beber
barig thin (applied to round J ) lg biirikobjects a. tanak and
lagar )
has enough
bashkaga,abash to give,to forgivekin, bash
kita,bebashkhat a duck 1” bat
bi z abundant,many,muchbi zar market
biizk an arm
be prefix,meaning“ with
out”
impudence,impoliteness V“ 4 beadab
blind e . be cham
the period from about 2 begi b,eveningp.m. till sunset
beguna innocent
behaiyal,biaga to forgetbenag honey
benaga makask a bee
beparwr'
i careless beparwa
bereber hard
bar
betowr'
ir quiet,noiseless
THE MEKRAKEB-BELOOCHEE DIALECT. o)
bewukr'
if fool,foolish bewukr’
rf
bhai kanaga v . to sell
baho kanaga
bhai kanuk v . a seller
baho kaniik
blaki mad
bihisht heaven
bil imperative of liaga
birinj v . brinjhizar spices
bo smell,scent
bo kanagato smell
boga knuckle
boings,abojin,to Open. to unfasten,tobohta or unload a camel
butka,bojbor brown
hot,but a louse
bowiit a kind of salt grass
bras,brat brother J0 I) ? baradar
brijaga,abnj ifi,to cook,to roast
br ihta,brij
brinj,birinj brass,r ice
b1'
1 e. bo smell,scent
bfi kanaga v. bo to smellkanaga
bfich dried grass (sweet)budaga,shudin,to sink,to set (the sun)budita,bud
buj i,bueh a cork
bulando a sword fish
bulbul nightingale bulbul
bun,hi m a one,a unit (of trees)buna below,beneath bun,root,basis P.
bunag baggage
bnraga,abnrm,to cutburidan
burira,buburbnrwa
'
m eyebrow
bur z (adj . or high,talladv. )
but an idol,a louse but,idol
8 r a s
THE “ KEANEE‘BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
fat (substantive)a bustard,ebi rahspectacles
what
a small pile of stones putin a conspicuous place
to mark the road
amongst hills
a thing
a tamarind
dirt,dirtya rope made of peesh
chunt
chis kanaga,or chista
kanaga
chiin
chunt,chinks
beneath
a cricket
a lampa sucking camel,lessthan 1year old
to lift,to raise
a Babul tree
a rope ofany kind
some,somethingthus
how
thus,cho and ish
crooked
lime
how many,how much
a female camelmorethanfive years old
a field
agriculturist,farmer
charb
4 03? chashmak
f ? che
J O»; l ‘? chi kadr
zer
chiri gh
name signifiesunder the
mother, 0 .
chlra andmi t
chi,like
genu
dihlshi n
59
THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
dajuk a hedgehog
dak,di k a plain d a dak,a desert
dalwat v. rastar an animal (if hali l)dam baraga to become tired dam,breathdam bnrtag tired
darn kanaga to rest
dan barren,outsidedans a sand or dust storm
dandfi a beetle was» dhindinu
dang a horse flydant a tooth
on) dand
dap the edge (of a knife, u : c dahan
a mouth,a lid mouth,cover ofa vessel,edgeof a sword,&c.
dapa kanaga
dapi
dar,v dari idi r wood,a stick
dar aiaga v. dar to come out,to start,tokapaga rise (the sun)
di raga,adi rm,to halt,to stop,to hold, di shtan
di shta,bedi r to keep
dari i,dar,dan outside,out
the placewhere anythingis kept e.g . masa
darap,an inkstand
di rchini cinnamon I'> di rehini
dard pain«MO dard
dar gejaga,dar to take out from any.
agefin,dar where, to find by
getka,dar gej seeking
dari a window,i .e. aholemade 145"
J a daricha
in the side of a mat
house for ventilation
dar kapaga v . to come out,to go out,dar aiaga to star t ;
darmi n a. medicinedharm
THE HEKRA'
NEE-BEDOOCHEE DIALECT.
durog false,a lie i ”a durogh
darogband a liar
datog bandaga to lie,to tell untruth
(darog gwashaga is
not used)di rr
‘
i gunpowder ”Ia di rr'
i
di rwar v . di r a white ant,meaning a
and waraga wood-eater
daryi the sea lg)c daryi
daryi i sochi ko a jelly fish with long0 . sochako stinging streamers,
meaning sea hornet
a knife for cutting grass
11handkerchief J le-i 0 dastmi l
a hand cm a dast
the palm of the hand,meaning heart of
the hand
the wrist
3“ di da
a flying column of sand,Sind devil
a mast
di r,fard“ ? deaga to throw away daur,a revolu
tion
daur kanaga to jumpdi wi v . dharm medicine (this word
rarely used)
to give a)“ di dan
the face fi0 dim
before, beyond
dem)
to send
delay,late fi t) der,dir
a compass e daur,a circle
a giveragent noun
fromdeaga
dharm medicine
61
P.
P.
62 THE nnxm sn-ssnoocnsn manner.
other,another j .) digar
breast,chest,mind,heart da dil ; mmheart,soul
dila baraga v. to forget
behaiyi l
dih'
ii the spleen (disease) tili
dir 11. di r distant,far tar-M) " daridan
diraga,adirin,to teardirta,bedir
di rgind 17. di r a telescope
and gindaga
dit smoke «530 di d
diwi r a wall lfi e diwi r
do two y ) do,dfidochaga,ado to sew dfikhtan
chin,dotka,dechita or
dohta,bedochdochi r kapaga to meet face to face di chi r zadan
dohl a drum d,0 duhul
do-danti ni having twoteeth,a camel v. dant
5 to 6 years old
both
the second if ) duwumi
double (aswork,expense,&c.)
last night
a friend,pleasing,pleasant
mana dost in,I like it,itis pleasing to me
do-ti l double (as cloth)03° dota
do-ti l kanaga to double,to fold (cloth)dozak,doze hell
dri ch,drachk a tree daralght
drai the whole (takes inflec contraction of
tion in) drobi
dri j long0 dari z
dranjaga,adran to hang up
jin,dri hta,dranjita or
dratkabedranj
64
galena. agal
eni i1,galenta,galen or gali
garnish
gandag
°THE MEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
to drive away
a buffalo
had (applied to anything,road,man,&c.,not usedasganda in Persian)
bedding,clotheswheat
a fool
leprosy,mange,secondary symptoms
to be lost
the neck
a leper afflicted with an
infectious skin disease
poor,tractable,mildhot,warmheat,the summer
a tour (of inspection&c. )stepped up,impassable(as a road by mud,rocks,water,&c.) ; unattainable (as a place
amongst hills which
cannot be got at on
account of obstacles
in the way) ; stepped
by any obstacle.
a lamb between the
gwark and guri nd
stages
the tamarisk
to strain,to sift
a sieve
more
more ; probably,mostlikely,I think
a vulture
mud
breath
gandum
gar,seab,mange
gaz
v. gechiu
66 ms usxssusn-sstoocnr s manner .
gul
guli h
gnni
gundi r v. go
kindi r
gung dumb gung
guri g a crow é l}re l) “si gh,ghuri b
guraga,agurln,to growl (dog) gharldan
gurita. gur
gnri gii a sandpiper
guri nd a male sheep,full grown,
a shell
hungry A 30 } gurusna
the worms (disease) J j ;
maw-worm
gwahar ague,intense coldgwahi r sister J ‘l) “ khwi har
gwi lag a goat-hair bag
gwamz,gwaba a bee,hornet,waspgwi n kanaga to call
short (applied to inani
mate objects)breast (man or woman)in possession of
to wear,to put on (anyclothing for the body)
a sucking lamb
the cried from about
1 our before day
light to the first
dawn
gwarband the band passing under a
camel’s neck and fas
tened to front of the
saddle
a wolf,a sucking lamb gurg,a wolf
THE I EKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
hasag a spoon khi shfik
hasbag a kind of salt grass
hasir a grass mat fl .“ hasir
hi sp v. hi ps
ban a. i h
haur rain
hayi shame,modesty “A
hay i kan ! hayi !make haste
hich none,nothinghidrik squirrel
hik a bear
himmatdi r strong (applied to humanbeings and animals)
assafrntida J 5“ hinga sucking camel
account (money),billsense,understandingwise,cleverGod khudi
adjuration meaning“ I
swear”
hukm an order (56 hukm
bri l booty,loot,robberyhri l kanaga to rob,to loot [neyhr
'
in blood murder,blood-mohuri thunder
hurj in a saddle bag kharz inhurjinaga,ahur to pull,to haulj1nir
'
1,hurjrnta. hurj rn
hnrk emptyhurk kanaga to make emptyhurmi g dried dates bo
j.-i khan" ;
hushk dry & A khushkbashki roaga
to travel by land
hushkunag a chisel
hushtera,hush a camel (of any kind) ushtur
ter
hushteri a camel-man
hushyi r active,clever,intelligent J Q3 ) . hoshvi r
69
70 THE usxasuss-sswocass nrsnse'r .
idhi ridi v . ingi
’
lhidhi r
’
1
ilm knowledge pl5
t ilrninchruki,inchki a very little
ingfi,idi here
inki thus much J “ m" 111 kadr
insi f justice ‘J l‘” insi f
i r bri nga to be placed z ir,underi r kanaga to put down,to place,to
lay down
i r kapaga to come down, to go
down intoany place,toleaveaplace,todescend,
i ro
gejaga,i r to take down
agejin,i r-getka,i rgej
i r rechaga to pour into anything (as v . rechagawater into a glass)
iri da intention gal) ! iri da A,
l shap to-night“
in ! imshab P,
ishki r,ishkar charcoal ashkara,an ex P,tinguished
firebrand
a brick khisht
preterite of liaga
hurried,in a hurry,hurry shiti b
haste,hurrywhite
a sheepa star
amule
a black cloud
a razor
a brick
ever,at any time,usedin conjunction with na
to express never
work,labour
izmat-kaniik industrious
72
j usta kanaga,orjusto kanaga
kabfil
kabfrl kanaga
kachal,kacharkadam
kadin
THE K EKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
a small nullah j r'
r,a river
well,in good health z ar,.
strength,v igour
to ask justan
sweet grass 8K 1; ah
perfect,excellent,proper kabrl,worthy,sufficient
agreement,agreed kabfil
to agree
a mule khacharu
a step p0-3 kadam
when kadl1i r'
1
a mussel0
an infidel J’F kfifil'
camphor ) J ’(5 kafri r
paper ki ghad
coffee miidle an ; ki hil
a kind of tree (acacia)common in Mekran
who (interrogative), 15 kehwhose
a kind ofshark
a drunkard
a flea
a kind of salt grass
a grave,a hole in the
ground
to bury
tin a “ kali i
a check L}? galu
a pen pli kalam
a clove karanful
salt earth Jlf kalaru
a small mussack,madeof the skin of a kid,
P .
A .
ran naxm na-snm cn n manner . 78
kali v . kalannch
ki lib P.
kaldi r fl ak kaldim. name 3.
ofaparticular
coinage of
rupees
small,less l" kam.
alittle,few,smallquantity(takes inflection in)
kamir a ploughshare
kamk v . kam
kanaga, akan to do we) : kardan
1a,kurta or
kr'
i, pekan,kan or bekan
kanda a hole in the ground,atrench
kandi name of a tree commonin Mekri n
kanda janaga to dig a hole
handaga,akgn. to laugh khl fldan
din,kandita,bekand v.
bandaga
hang a heron,a cranekangi l P00r
ki nt a horn
kapfoam,froth
hapaga shoulder
kapaga,akapi1’
r,t0 fall. to happen,totapta,bekap occur
kgpi4 h ry§the bone of the cuttle
fish,meaning sea
foam
kapinjar a partridge
a wild pigeon
a dove
deaf
work,use,usefulki r aiaga to be useful
an inferior kind ofdates
generally packed in
baskets
lO r a e
THE HEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
a banian tree
edge,margina large knife a) K ki rd
ahare,wilaiyati kargoshk,J ’j j » khargosha rabbit
kar i deafness
ki rigar ti bullock
karkink,kar a bivalve shell
kiank
karpi s cotton,cotton treekas any one,some one
kassi h butcher
kasi n little,smallkasimn mushk a mouse
v . mushkkash kanaga to pull,to weigh in scales
kashaga,aka to pull,to take out from u se“ kashidanshin,kashta, anywhere,to weigh inbekash scales
ki sh i a plate cf“; ki shi
ki sib a tortoise,turtlekastar smaller,less cempan
tive of kasi n
katangar,ka a grouse
tungar
kaush a shoe
ki wi a v . ki
ki z i
keh,(conjunc~tion)
keh, (relative that,who,which I ; keh
pronoun)kikata a lobster
kilat fort,c itykiln a key
kimat price
kiw i t kanaga to buy (z firaga generallyused)
coriander seed
the end,the edge,margm
kiriyi,kire hire I} kiri
THE MEKRANEE oBELOOCHEE DIALECT .
kiriyi kanaga to hire
kirm a worm
kishaga,akish to sow,to till,to digin, kishta,bekish
kishk a road,a pathkismat fate
kiti b book
kitag a tick (insect)kitag v. kti tagkltti a house liz ard
kOdi l a powrah
koh a hill,mountainkohi buz a hill goat (female)kohi pi chin a hill goat (male)kohi guri nd a hill sheep (male)
75
kohr a river,a nullah J ’s khaur
kont a bag made of carpet
kopak a shoulder c . kapagkor blind ) )
f kfir
koros,kurus a cock,fowl u‘ khuros
kot a fort Gaff kot
kewi t,kowi nt a male camel under five kafrwi tu
years old
a lock
a corner
a dog6
country (as opposed to kiich,migration,P.
town) decampingkuchk small shells,cowrieskudi n v. kuj i nkuj i where ls
; kujiikuji -i ngt
'
i 7 where (interrogative,used with the verb“roaga
”)
fl “
which
a crab
a fowl
cap,hata cough
76 was maxmuss-nsw ocnns manner .
kulunt dates in the slightly red
stage
assistance kumak
to assist
a lake
the lots tree (Hind. ber) kuni r
a knee
blunt
a thorn,spine ofa treea basket made of matting
kurakush a cricket
kurshi a chair kurshi
kurus,v. koros
kushaga,aku to kill kushtan
shin,kushta,pukush
kusij a cucumber
ki tag,ki tag a water melon
kutub the north “ 53 kutb
kwahu old (applied to inanimate wtf kuhan
objects)
lach,lachuklndaga,aladi r
'
1, ladanuladita,belad
ladok,ladi k the long rope with 2 literally a
loopspassing complete loader,froml
lysound a camel
’
s ladnga”
Os
lugaga,alagi r'
i. tostrikeagainstanything,lagita,belag to touch,to fasten on
to anything (not bybinding,0 . bandage),to hit a mark
a bridle,reinslean,thin,weak (appliedto animate objects)
to kick lskad
boiling
to boil any thing
THE HEKEANEE-BELOOCHEE DIALECT .
lahr bri ngs to be boiling
lahr kanaga to cause to boil
lab t some,a few (takes inflection in
laj shame,modestyli kaga,ali ki r
'
l,to bark as a dogli kira
li kari a flamingo
landin a kind of salt grass
lang lame
lankuhv. lankuk
lankuk,lankuh a finger ; chuki lankuk,the little finger
the abdomen,stomach,inside
inside
li pa dard diarrhcea,dysentcry e .g .
mani li p dard akant,I have diarrhe a
li pmurda gripes
armydirt,dirtybut
a thigh
a male camel more than
5 years old
lewar hotf wind
llaga,klli r'
r,alir'
r to allow,permit don’
t
or ali if1, let,” “ mail
”
)ishta,bil
lik kanaga (im to erect,to cause to stand
perative uplik kan,
or likke
kan,) ar mikkanaga
limbi ri a jelly fishlira deaga to roll anything alonglimk an insect
log a house
[or a lobster
li khejanji S.
luh
bilidan, to
dismiss,abandon,quit
78 THE mammals-133m m DIALECT .
lotainaga,alot to demandaini ii,lotainta,belotain
lotaga,alotin, to want,desire,wish for lochanu
lotita
lotia a khojahlugushaga,alu to slip,to slide laghz idan
gashi r’
i,lngushta,lngush
lugushan slippery lughz i’
m
lunj dark,darkness
lunt a lip
lfir a flying column of sand ;Sind devil
tomix
along w ith
a blacksmith ”1 luharu
a date tree
a locust,a prawn malakh,alocust ;rnalakhi dar
yai,a prawnfemale mada
a cow
a mare a lga l/0 madiyiin
an eclipse,meaning“seiz
ing the moon
magrab the west. The prayer at magh ribsunset . The period
from sunset till dark,the evening twilight
the moon,a monthearly sobami hala,earlyin the morning
mabar a camel°
s rein ) l,bo or J V mahiir or mihz
'
ir
80 mmusaaanaE-aaw ocnaa DIALECT
a season
raisins
a camel 2 to 3 years old.
The name signifies
that the camel’
smother
produces young againthis year ; 0 . mas and
Persian verb weal}zaidan,to bear . at? “
majadumyoung camel,S .
J majfiku,acamel 2 to 3years old,S .
mazan great,largemazamn gwar the period from about 2
barn to 4 hours before daylight
a fisherman
a nail (ofiron),a tent pegmud
a sheep of either sex,ahammer-headed shark
meshmurg a pelican,meaning thesheep bird.
”In Per
sian meshmurgh is a
bustard
metag a house of any kind
meak a kind of salt-grass
miar a beggar
micht'
tch an eyelash A sa
migras scissors
mihrbiini kindness,mercymik kanaga to erect,to cause to
(imperative stand upmik kan or
mikkekan)v. lik kanaga
minz il,manz il a stage,a day’
s journey manz ilmiraga,amiria,to die we)
;
murdanmurta, be
mirmiraga,amiria to tight,mirita,bemir
THE MEKRANEE-BELOOC l lEl-J DIALECT.
a par rot
in the middle rni:. iingin
to collect
shoemaker a ir )” "100m
firm,tight,fastenedstrong (applied to inaui muhkammate objects)
a Spider
wax
an ant mor
plantain,banana man: or mi'
rz
socks mnza
a cook
a multitude. Hanchokeh much,a verygreatmany
hair i s mt'
i P.
to forgive d l“ mugi
‘
tf,forgive A
ama seal,a stamp muhra dust-storm
a country,an estate,atract of land beingcultivated by any one
mundart a ringmurg a bird
martagv.miragadead
mushaga,amu to rub,to scrapeshin,mushta,mush
mushk v. kas rat mfisb,a mouse P.
i ninmushk
musbkul diflicult
musht a fist w
muz i tt best kind of dates,generally packed in earthen
chatties
m o: 0. mon
v . drohii
88 1as nemmxss-asaoocnaa maascr .
rasaga,armi ir, to arr ive. With the Bat. y oga-J rasidan
rasita or rasta, case of pers. pronouns
beras to find as mana,tu rn,&c .,rasita I,thou &c .,found or te
ceised it
rasii naga,arm to cause to arrive,to L9 “? l"Urasanldan
siini it,rasi no forward
ta berasiin
right,true,straight,t ight hand
an animal
contented
leave
a camel 3 to 4 vears
to throw away, rekhtan
empty (liquids)
a sandy place,sandhills, ti f!) regsand
.a sore
a rope made of goathair
resa shot rez a, scraps,P.
crumbs
r ich a bear I iChh‘l
rigit a kind of salt grass
r ish a beard
rizghgfik a mongoose
roaga,aroai1 to go
of arei h,shuta,shut
or sh in,boro
roba a fox
roch a dav,the sun,sunshinerod cOpper
rodarat v. roch the east,meaning“ Sun
and dar-niaga came out”
rogan oil,ghee roghanP
rok kanaga to light a lamp or fire afrokhtan P
roshanaii the period just before gu y roshanai,light P.
sunrise
roshant (sub.stantive)
rotag
totik
sara dard
sarag v. sar
saraga,asarin,sarita
saramsa
st rand
sarap
l2 r a s
THE NEKRANEE-BELOOCHEE BIALEG'I’.
light,brightness roshani
a root
a goer,one going ; as an agent formedadjective applied to a from roaga
swift going camel
a quarter 61,tuba
a white ant
an hour,a clock,awatchaccount,reasonsoap
green
cord,rope ofany kind
a journeyany kind of game (espe
cially deer )a third par t
4 -1 m sih yak
a walk J ew sal t
the third guy slyumi
hard,very sakht,hard
a year J L. sEil
a cattle-fish
baggage,thingsto take care
head,end,top3”
to get over the top of v . sar “ d kapa
anything,to chmb up 83
headache oJo dard: sar
above,over
to neigh wmfi shakhfilidan
a camel’s head gear
a comb
quietly,secretly Lx sirran,quietly
89
A .
90 run MEKRANEE-BELOOCHBE DIALECT.
above,overcold (temperature)before (place),in front
a pillow v . sar ja
a road,footpath “55“ sarak
to start off
the small string at the v. sar mabar P
end of a camel’
s rein
which is fastened
round the piece of
wood passing through
the nose
sarpad-abai, I understand, defective
sarpad-biita, verb : side Grammar
&c.
saudagar a merchant,trader J! lb) “ “WES"
saugind an oath saugand
saugind waraga to swear v. waraga
sawar a person mounted J i ) “ suwar
sawar bfiaga to be mounted (on a
horse) v. jimi z“W5" kanaga to mount or elevate any
thing,to hoist up on
to anythingsawas the sandals made 0f
peesh worn by Be
loochees
the circle on a camel’
ssins,breast
breast
a camel’
s neck band
a monkeythe jaw-bone
a witness
scales (for weighing)a town,villageto singa comb
sugar
a long cloak generallymade ofgoat hair
shalwar trousers shalwar
92 THE maxemas-samocnss DIALECT.
shuma you tat. shuma
shumal a sea breeze J ud
. shimal
shiiro saltpetre,gunpowder {Uj j
'
i' shora
sichin,v. sfichin”J “ shoro
sid a kind of shark
sikun a porcupine
sim wire
sindaga,asindin,to break (intransitive) shikastansista,besind a rope,wire,&c.
sindi n an anvil
smg a stone
sir marriage
antimony,collyrium surma
relations
black giyfih
a goat, v . pas
black pepper filfil,pepperthe morning just before (
wsubh
sunrise,the morninggenerally
early in the morningto burn (transitive) sokhtan
86 lei ) “ Sll l'lj hbfida,erysipelas
sonn mirch white pepper mirch,pepper S. H .
sorob apple seb P,
sowaso a sole fish
sowasfi a centipede
subuk light (in weight)si
'
rchaga,asii to burn (intransitive)chin,sfitkaorsi
'
ihta,besiicho. sechuga,
sfichln,sichiusuhfin
suhan kanaga
sumb e. kal,kanda
sund
st'
ir,sohrst
'
ir
anrag
siiraga,sanrin,sfirita,besfirv . siirlnaga
THE KEKRANEB-BELOOCHEE DIALECT.
a needle w} sozan
a file mu) “ suhan
to file
ahole(not in theground)
dried ginger
red
salt (adj ective)salt grass
to shake (intransitive)
siirinaga,asfir i to shake (transitive)nin,sfirinta,besii rin
v. suraga
siirii
sfir t'
t kanaga
sumpsurushk
sust
susti
st'
it,sitswarag
swaragani
jowareeto begin
lead (metal)elbow
loose (not tight)idleness,laz iness
profit
breakfast,meal taken between about 3 hours
after sunrise and noon
the period from about
3 hours after sunrisetill noon
to,up to ; used whenspeaking of two placesin the sense of fromone to the other
doctor
a stable
0) U taz idan
ow takidanto run
amat,matting
93
THE MERRANES -BELOOCHEE DIALECT .
v i sta for waste
wat self 0} khud
wati ch a pistol tabancha
wateg,wuteg or a tank m l,wahi
uteg
wushtaga, to stand up,to stand biishidan
awushtm. still
wushtats,bosht or
bwusht
yebara completely,entirelyyebari,yek-bar onceyek,yak one
yekdiir a canoe (meaning one
piece of wood)”
yek kanaga to join
yek-kasha always
yeledeaga,yele to let go,to let loose, ,J g' yala,escape,kanaga toabandon (sometimes release
yelo deaga)
yassara together
force,tyranny uk 'Uf)
.
zabardasti
excellent, very good,zabar,
perfect superior
the cock of a gun zadan,to strike
a child 6 I) z iik
zi bir,v. zahr
zahra,the gallangry,bitter
J r} zahr,angrybitter oil,mustard oil
a guava (in P. H .
z aitfin is an“olive
”)
a wife
a sword
a crap
a field,the ground zamin
the knee zami
13 r a
97
P.
A .
P.
P.
smou aévaaa ru m-mu AND m os woasmr . 105
grant is set forth in the above inscription. There is no date to the
inscription as given byMajor Graham,and in his Summary at pages
334 and 335 the column of dates is bisak. The king who succeeded
Kama-den is said to have had his capital at Vijayaput”* (as it is
there designated),and thismust,I think,he the same as Juyunugur orJ ayamgar at p. 314 of the same work. If so,it takes us,accordingtoMajor Graham,to 789. In Brown
’
s Comatic Chr tmology‘
l’ the
Chi lukya era begins with A .O. 1016. The two branches of the
Cha'
lukyas are there described,one reigning at Kalyana,in theWestern
Kamitaka,and the other ruling Kalinga. But thenames given in myaccount of Sangameévara are not mentioned byMr. Brown .
Major (now-Major General Sir) George LeGrand Jacob gives Chi
luhya grants fromKudfil Desi,near Goa,of the 6th and 7th centuries of
the Christian era.1 The same learned writer notes in the next vol
ume§ a Chalukyagrant ofTervxina,a villagenear Rajdpura,about fiftymiles to the south-west of Sahgameévara,of the year A .O . 1261.
The late Professor Bail Gangidhar Shastri gives uoticell of a
Chi lukya grant of the year A . c . 733 ; and he seems to hold“that
the power of the Chalukyas had then (at least temporarily) declined.
This grant refers to a place near Puns. Another referred to in the
same paper is described as of the 5th century of the Christian era.
The list of Chalukyas given by Mr . Wathen (J our . R . As. Soc.,No. VIL,pp. 1—41) is said to tally with those which Dr . Bhau
reported upon in his paper to this Society read in November 1870.
Kolh‘pura is mentioned as a tributary state of the Chalukyas byMr . Wathen ; and more than one prince of the name Someévara or
Boma occurs in his account of the Chalukyas of the loth or 11th
In his Sur vey ofIndian Chronology (see Vol. VIII. of this Society’
s
J ournal,p. Dr . BhsuDaji puts the dates of the previousChalukya
grants till then published as ranging from Sake 411downwards. It
0 Statistical Accountoff olktpur,byMajor Graham (above quoted),p. 479.
a m ta’
o Chmwlogy,by C R Brown, Madras Civil Service ;
1J our. B. Br. 3 . As. 80a,vol. III.,p. 208.
5 J our. B. Br . B. As. Boa,vol. IV.,p. 98.
J our . B. Br . R. As. Soc,vol. IL,p. I.
1 Ibid . p. 2.
14 r u e
106 sauou sévaas nam nu AND macs woasnrr .
seems to me,however,from the scanty notices of the Chi lukyas in
Nelson’s Madam Mama!“ that a great deal of light will yet be
thrown on the history not only of the Chalukyas,but on the spread
ofH iya-worship and the progress of Saivism,by the publication and
translation of all the Tamil works which date many centuries before
the Chri stian era.
How the Chi lukyas prospered,and brought with them a more
elaborate form of liriga-worship,can be completely illustrated by re
searches into the history of the South of India and connecting it with
that of Western India. For Malabar and Canara form a part of
the Konkana,which once extended far into the southern portion of
Gujari t.
This country is said to have been recovered from the sea by Parab
rima—who was then standing at Gokarnaf (as some would hold),or at Saiugameévara,which at one time was called Rémakshetra.
And if the lost portions of the Swayddri Khagzda could be recovered.
they would throw additional light on the subject. The Rev . Mr.
Taylor speaks of amanuscript ofParoéardmaviioyam,the publicationofwhich would doubtless give some help in the same direction.
Paraéurima was evidently no ordinary person. He is connected
with the passage of the Brahmaputra into Assam I in the east and
coloniz ing the western coast of India And yet on the establish
ment of what is understood in those parts as the oldest Brahmanical
seat,we find the first shrines consecrated are dedicated to the lisiya of
Siva. It is remarkable that the tr imur ti’
or triad at the present town
of Paraéurfima,near Chipluna,to the north-east of Sairgameévara,where there are now three images of Vishnu,is also known to have
been a lingo-shrine set up by a paramaliaissa Gosavi,who after
wards removed to the village of Dhi vadéi,near S‘t‘ri . On the
site of the present three images there once stood three lirigas. The
images now consecrated are z—Kl lau ssa,Paras'sré aa,and Buy oeardrum. This must have been at least two hundred years ago. All
the oldest temples at Sangsmeévara are Him-temples ; and the style
0 pm 111,pp. as,as,75.f A Handbook of Hindu l ytlwlogy,by the Rev. W. N. Taylor : I ndu s,
1870 (8nd pp. M .
1As. Rss.,vol. xiv” p.883
5M ,p'm,“ d
112 smcu sévsss ru nn e rs AND u ses wosss rr .
(14) Issuing (tom the summit of the tangled hair of the Bapteia,Q angt,takingthe northerly direction,flowed on to the lower ground . (15) From the eastem
part arose the Gautama-Tirtha. On the western part also [appeared] the
fair Koletvar i. (18) Bangamcévara stood at the junction of Var-uni and Ala
kauandt. [He also saw]other holy places like the Dhutaptpa [or remover ofsin]. (17) On the north t anttha,and 8iva under the name of Nibaudheh,then on the east Kodars,facing the south. (18) In the middle of the river,the s ored hot spr ing giving 00m to all beings ; thence on the western side,also Tilabhtndeévara. (19) In that Badgameévara [there]was the welloknown
celebrated Ptrvati so [was]the superior god Ganeéa,the giver ofthe eight pre .
teruatural faculties,intelligence,and desires. (20) From thence,out he westernside,therewasGomukheévaraka,then Svarnavati Gauge,where therewere threegreat goddesses Durgt. (21) Thus,the king Karna saw a holy place in his
dream. Then the king awoke and comprehended at the same moment the
meaning of everything . (22) He then resolved onmaking it his happy capital,and in the morning invited an astrologer of the Studilya family,who was an
inhabitant of 8ri Safigameévara Kshetra,who was an austere and pious man,versed in the science of astronomy,and named Nrisifiha. (28 and 24) Havingduly honoured him with fruits and jewels,the King joyously asked him the
propitious time. When the propitious time with propitious conjunction of star s
and the support of the planets was mentioned by the astrologer,King Karna,having duly worshipped Korma,8esha,Vartha,t o.,established his capital
there. (25,28) t apura was founded by t a,and Singhana by Gingha.
Then,abandoning Karavira,they lived here many years. (27 ) KarnamadeSafigameévara altogether like that Kshetra (si s. Karavira) ; and founded the
pr incipal liiiga after his own name. (28) Having spent amore ofgold pieces,that great-minded king built 860 temples there. ( 29) I will brieflymentionthe names of some of them. On the east,Bramheéa,g raced by five (surrounding) gods ; (80) the great god Kar ueéa,surrounded by ten other gods,andwho is celebrated in Ssugamakshetra,and is the giver of the means of sub
sistence and salvation . (81) On the river -side,Gir ijeéa (or the lord of Girija),and thereafter Kumbhcévara ; the great goddess Ekavirt accompanied by 84
Q uads. (82) Bavaneéa,near the Gafiga,who is Sankara himself. It was a Hinge
founded by Btvana,which Karena repaired. (38) There also was Vi raua.
Tir tha,the destroyer of all sin,by bathing in and drinking of which,a mortal attains salvation. (84) Then there was Bhandapurtneta,surrounded by five Ntr iyants ; also Hahtkaletvara and K0pan£tha. (85) In themiddle of the city,Nagareia,giver of the means of subsistence and “ Ivan
tion,by seeing whom only,a mortal can become sinless. (88) Then the godBomei vara,the seat of the god of the universe ; then the great god
Amr iteia,and next Pantajeta. (87 ) Then Khadgesvars,and Naudikeia,sur rounded by water. There was Ki labahirao for the pro tection of theKshetra.
(88) Facing the south,he was served by 8iddhas and Gandharvas. By lookingathim,liviug in the Kshetrabem es n fe. (89) Hewho diligently worships himwith the beaten (flees indicts),fig (fleas glam our),and other trees,would obtainhis desires. (40) He who bathes in and drinks of the tlrtha nu r Bhairava.
amou rs'
vsn mann ers AND LINGA WORSHIP. 113
Bramhei vara attains Bramhaloka. (41) On its west is the great renowned
tlrtha Dnytnavtipi,by the drink of which men on earth become acquainted
with the Bromha. (42) Then the goddess Vindhytdr ivtsini,next Bramhaksbetra,where formerly austere penance was performed by the seven
Bishis. (43) Then the fourteen steps together with Vishnu,where the
manes desirous of salvation always dwell ., (44) By ofi‘
er ing funeral balls there,one should reap the fruit of performing the éroddha at Gayé . Then,theVaitarani-tirtha,giver of strength to the virtue of a chaste woman ; (45) bybathing in it and drinking of it one does not see the region of Yams [or Pluto].
There,also,by giving cows,one attains heaven. (48) Thence to the north is
situated the perpetual banian -tree known as Akshayya Vata (imperishable),(ficus indies ),under which giving funeral oblations to the m oss leads them to
beatitude . (47 ) Thus a gr eat holy place of this descr iption was founded by
King Kar ua ; then he bui lt a pleasant city named Saugama,(48) and placed onthe eastern side Bharavas endued w ith bliss,Wastoshpatis (i . s. guardians),Kirtimukhas,a class of demons. (49 ) The Bharava at the door was the King
'
s
giver of gifts. The extent of this holy place was undoubtedly five koéa. (50)By bathing and heaping g ifts there,the manes of ancestors attain heavenly
bliss. By worshipping Someévara always,a souless man obtains a son. (51)He who worships Sapteéa does not become subject to disease. By the worship
of Va ijau itha a man shall always become successful. (52) On the south-east
is a burning-
g round leading to heaven for the deliveranceof the manor of ances
tors. Ou the west from Satragananatha is the Svar uavtihini. (53) On the nor th
[is]the v illage Turvari,so on the south [is]Sapteéa. This holy place of five
koéa in extent is the giver of themeans ofsubsistence and salvation . (54) Around
this are eight well-known habitations of the Sftkti (goddesses),and eight tirthas
in the eight quar ters of this holyplace. (55) In the east [is]the Kamalaj t'
xt ir tha,always presided over by Kamal i . By bathing and giving at that tir tha,amenbecomes wealthy. (56 ) There also is the Goshpada
-tirtha,the destroyer of all
sickness ; even now a beautiful lmya is v isible in the Goshpzula-t ir tha. (57)
In the south-east is the Gautama-tir tha,founded by Gautama,by bathing and
giv ing at which a man is delivered from all sins. (58) In the south lies the
Agastya-tir tha,inhab ited by multitudes of li ishis .where,by bathing and dr ink.
ing,[sins such as] the killing of a Brfihmana,&c. are destroyed. (59) In the
south-west is the Ek nv ir i khya-tir tha,w ith a class of heavenly beings called
S iddhas . By dr inking of it,injury from infernal beings immediately ceases.
(80) In the west,there where the r ivers Vfiruna and S ver na unite,is the tirthaVin-nus,v isited by Siddhas and Gandharvas,crowded by various classes of
B ishis.and adorned by var ious trees. By bathing and drinking there nodanger
from water ar ises. (61,(52) In the nor th-west is the Ganané tha,ever fond of
dr inking milk. Nodoubt,by worshipping himeven an idiot shall become aPen
of which the dumbness ofmen vanishes. (84) In the north is the great super ior
tir tba Muller-ilm,w here dwells the venerable Siva,the destroyer of Malls,andthe giver of all desired objects. (85) By bathing there,a person is liberated
from all diseases. That mortal who on a Sunday would with devotion worship
l 5 r a s
114 sw osusévsss ususr liu AND LINOA wease ls.
Hallari in company ofPtrvatl with powdered turmer ic,fruit,flowers and mealshall meet with all success diEcult even for the gods to obtain. (88,87 ) In thenorth-east is the great goddess Mahishasuramardini (destroyer ofMahishasura) .
By worshipping her feet danger fiom an enemy immediate ly disappears. (88)
There also is the very pure and holy tirtha Gauri. By bathing in and dr ink
ing its waters men shall gain health quickly. (89 ) At these eight holy
places,ofi’
er ing funeral cakes and oblations,bathing,giving,meditating,and sacr ificing,all shall become ever lasting. (70) That king had a great
for tress in the east occupied by several warriors and possessed of var ious r iches.
(71) The King granted nine villages to the Karnoti for maintenance [of the
establishment]ofDharmapur for char itablepurposes ; Gunavallikt for betelnuts,Devauimichaka village for refreshment,Sivani for ghee,Lavala for meals,Phanas for fruits,Dhamani for a char itable ferry,Kadamba and Aptravall ika
for the god’s servants. (72,74) He granted the whole Katuki village to
Someta,and the village Turiya to Kedh a and Somoéa jointly. (7 5) The
powerful King Karna founded Btmakshetra in the year 100 of the fitllvtbanaera. (78) In his kingdom there is no poverty,no separation of fr iends,nosouless person,none diseased,none foolish. (77) In this Kshetra the Bri b
manas are versed in all kinds of knowledge,posseu ed of all qualities,skilledin the 84 arts,and r ich in penance. (78) In this K shetr a that wicked
mortal who lives disrespectfully,even losing his merit,becomes poor instautly. (79) In this Kellen-0,inhabited by gods and Brthmanas,he who
enjoys the company of the good cannot but much the presence of Bin .
(80) He who built the temple of Mahtlakshmi at Karavira (Kolhtpur ),thesame built the temple of Karneh here. (81) When the M ple was completed,the noble-minded king paid ten thousand pieces of gold to the master -builder.
(82) At the palace of that king there also lives a master -poet of the name ofBosh; who composed this for the delight of that gentle and abstemious king.
(88) Bomeh and other li r'
lgas seen in the dream by the king were all former lyestablished by Bi ghava. (84) The greatness of these litigas is also describedat length in the Sohyddri Khaglda by the venerable Vytsa. (85) The i lobasthere in are the following—As the delightful Kséi,Praytga,Pushkara,Prabhfiu,Naimisha Kshetra,Chakra-Pushkarini are celebrated,so is this great citynamed Safigama There are ten holy places established by Etna. Among theten,six are super ior ; the names of which hear from me z—Gokarna,Saphkoteh,Kunakeéa,Safigama,Haribara,and Tryambakeia. There are six holyplaces z—Kuddaleéa (Kudal P),Dhil taptpa,Di labhcta (Dabhol),Vardhana(Shr ivardhanaP),and the great godMmetvara. These are the five holy places.Even Bhargava Elma,by his devotion,founded the lingo: at Sangameivara inthe vicinity of Siva These are the i lokas in the Bahyddn
’ m ade .
The proceding i lokas are the principal ones descr ibing Bangameivara
posed by each ,and forming part of a work named Karm adMaidM.
116 marrow on THE HIST O RY or
Both statements,so diametrically opposed,cannot of course be
correct.
Partly from a desire to collect all the available information that mayserve to throw light on the subject,especially from the Portuguese
annalists of the period and their European contemporaries,and partlyfrom the interest and curiosity I,with several others,feel in all that
concerns the venerable Hindu sage,this attempt at one connected and
continuous narrative has been made.
The earliest authenticrecordsofthis tooth-relic ofBuddhaare—Fi ner,the Dalada
'
vausa or DIuitdd/l cituvaks'
a,contracted into Ditti tuval'
téa or
Chronicle of the Tooth,of unknown authorship,written formerly inElu,the ancient language of the Sihalese,about the year 310A .D .,andtranslated into Pilli by the priest Dhammakitti There. in the thirteenth
century A .D .
* SECONDLY,theMahdeafiéa,a metrical chronicle,whichliterallymeans theGenealogy of the Great,
’
containing theearly historyof the kings Ill a/lavails
'
e,or the Great Dynasty,of Ceylon. The first
section of this Odyssey of the Sinhalese,extending from 543 to
301A .D .,was compiled in the reign of his nephew,the king Batusoan,between the years 459 and 4 7 7 A . D .,by the priest Mllll t
‘
lnamo,and isbased both on the Dillavails
'
a—a work of greater antiquity but yet of
unknown authorship,which unfortunately ends just before the events
recorded in the t tuvails'
a took place—and on annals in the vernacular
language then existing at Anuradhi‘
lpura,the ancient capital of Ceylon .
The second section was written in the reign of the Saluvails'
e,or theInferior Dynasty,the story of whose line occupies the continuation of
this mystic chronicle. It was the king Pandita Parakrfima Bilbo
III. who caused it,under orders ofanother illustrious king of the same
name,to be extended as far as the year 1266 A.D . and thence the
narrative has been carried on,under subsequent sovereigns,down to theyear 1758 A .D .,the latest chapters being compiled by command of
K riti Srl,the king of Kandy,partly from Sinhalese works brought
back from Siam,and partly from native historical accounts preserved
from the general destruction decreed about the year 1590 a n . by the
apostate from Buddhism,Rfija Sifiha I. It is the second section that
alludes to the history of the tooth : Tumou r,the Rtijavali,a work of
spot where his bodywas burned would correspond with the siteof thegreat stapescalled .Devl
'
sth iin.—Ounningham
’s A ncient Geography of India,pp. 488
Alabaster ’s Wheel of the Law,p. 165 .
Awarding to Mr . D’Alwis the Dathavaiu'
c appeared in 1328 a.o.,but hegives no authority for this statement : Introduction to Bid“ Sanger ttwa,p. clxxv .
r ns a°
oor n. nnr.xc or CBYLON. 117
difi'
ereuthands,compiled from local annals and used generally as acorollary or addition to theManama} as well as to the Rafjaratndlcari
'
,the latter also a valuable historical work,deservedly held in high
estimation by the Buddhists as a record of events from 540 to the
settlement of the Portuguese in the metropolis of their religion in
India. The Rt'g'
javali continues the narration through the mightystruggle for political ascendancy between the Portuguese and their rivals
the Dutch,which resulted in the latter gaining possession of Colombo,and ultimately of all the maritime districts of the island.1
' Foua'
rnmr,the P lantPa
‘
tnom,a Siamese version of a Paili work partially translated
by Colonel Low I
The Dita'
turansa,which,as chronicling the events connected with
the tooth,is naturally regarded as the great authority on the subject,issaid to have been written,as already mentioned,about 3l0 A .D .,whenthe relic was first brought to Ceylon from Dantapura (Odontopolis) in
Kalir'
tga,in Southern India.§ The original work in Elu is said to
have experienced the fate that befell all the Sihhalese chronicles and
commentaries during the reign of Parakra’
ima the Great'
s widow,Lilai vati,who reigned as queen at Pollanarua three times,and was
dethroned as often—ia 119 7—1200,1209 - 10,and again in 1211—12a.n.—that of being entirely rewr itten in Pai li,which unfortunately
caused almost all the Eln works to disappear although Tumour,wellknown as the Colebrooke of the S inhalese saranls,notes that it wasstill extant in Ceylon in 1837 .II As regards the antiquity of the
0 It is also said that ample allusion is made to the tooth-relic in several
chapters of the untranslated portions of the 310 /u?rwis'
a .
f Upham's Collection of Tracts,&c.,Lond . 1833. Burnout
’
s articles in the
J ournal da Saennts,l e33 (Sept ),1834 (J an and
1 J aw . B . A s. Soc. B u rg,t a]. 1848,vol. xn i.,pt. ii.,p. 82.
§T he town of Bandagula,tho Dantapnra ot'
the Buddhist chronicles,is nowmjaml hendri,which is about30 miles to the north-east of Koringa : see Colonel
Cunningham’
s Ancient Geography of Indm,pp. 518-10. Another Dantapura
is said to have been situated on the northe r n bank of the K rishna,and to corre
spond n th the modern Amaravatl,one of the ancient Tri-Kalingas.
I] J oar . A s. Soc. Beg.,Cal. 1837,Vol. i.,pp. 856 ct seq. Turnout also sup
gsa the tooth-relic of Cey lon to he alluded to in the ( pening passage of therss 14 ; Inscription,but this hasbeen questioned by later wri ters .
The inscription,facing west,is as tollows The Beja I’tndu,who wasthe delight of the Devan,has thus said : This inscription on Dhammo is recorded by ma in the twenty
-seventh year ofmy mauguration‘ My public func
tionaries intermingle among many hundred thousands of living creatures,aswall as human beings. If any one of them should inflict injur ies on the mostalien of these beings,what advantage would there be in this my edict 1” [On theother hand,]should these functionaries follow a line of conduct tending to allayalum,they would confer prosperity and happiness on the people,as well as onthe country ; and by _
such a benevolent procedure they will acquire a know .
118 tremors on w e nrsr oav or
Bu tt e-J ain,to prove that it was really composed 310 a.n.,or,at thelatest,some time before the end of the fifth century of our era,anargument founded on this work being alluded to in the 37th chapter of
theMahdvariéa—which,as above stated,was compiled between459 and477 A .n.
—has been put forth . In the Mahdvaiss‘
a the chronicle is
referred to thus In the ninth year of his reign Srlmeghavana (orMeghavarna,possibly the Vardja of theWestern Cave Inscriptiom—see
J our .BosaBr .R . As. Soc.,vol. v .,p. a certain Brfihmana princessbrought the t tddndtn or tooth-relic ofBuddhahither fromKalings,under the circumstances set forth in the Now
theMandvariéa,notwithstanding its accepted authenticity and chrono
logical precision,was not completed,as before mentioned,between459 and 477 am. It contains a hundred chapters in all,divided intosections,and only its first section,compiled within that interval,extends to 301A d ) . or theendofMahfisena
’
s reign,while theDMtavasisais said to have been written when the relic was removed to Ceylon,in the ninth year of the reign of his successor,al e. 310 a n.
Difi cult as it is,then,to assign a fixed date to its composition,concurrent circumstances,too tedious to enumerate here,have led
ledge of the condition both of the prosperous and of the wretched,and will atthe same time prove to the
llpee lo and the country that they have not departed
from bum . Why sho d ey inflict an injury either on a countryman oftheir own or an alien P Should my functionar ies act tyrannically,mymph,loudly lsmenting,will be sp tome,and will appear also to hsve msalienated from the effects of 0 are enforced] by royal authority. Thoseministers o mine who proceed on circuits,so far from inflicting oppressions,should cher ish the peo le ss the infant in arms is cherlshed by the wet-nurse ;and those capet ian circuit ministers,moreover,hke unto the wet-nurse,should watch over the welfare ofmy child (the people) . By such a proceduremy ministers would ensure perfect happiness to my redm.
By such a course,these (the people released from all disquietude,andmost fully conscious of their security,wo d devote themselves to their avocations. By the same rocedurs,on ih being acclaimed that the grievous powerofmyministers to
'
ct tortures is abolish it would prove a worthy subjectof
'
oy,and be the established compact (law of the land) . Let the crimmslj or executioners of sentences [in the instances] ofpersons committed toprison,or who are sentenced to undergo specific punishments,without myspecial sanction,continue their judicial investigations for three days,till mydem
'
sion be given. Let them also,as regards the welfare of living creatures,attend to what affects their conservation,as well as their destruction ; let themestablish offerings let them set aside animosity .
Hence those who obser ve and who set up to our precepts would abstainfrom amicting another. To the ple also man blessings will result byliving in Dita-sass. Themerit m ugging from the would spontaneouslymanifest itself. -
'1‘urnour on the Inscriptions on theCo umus at Delhi,t o.
I quote these lines fromtheedition of theDt m'
sia by Sir d mi,who,inrespect to the inscription,says The spir it ofuniversal charityand philanthropywhi ch animstss this drstt is not unworthy of the consideration of the presentenlightened rulers of the great Indian empire.
”- Intrcd.
120 M EMO I R on rm; ms'
ronv or
cord,between two such great religious bodies as the Brfihmans and the
Buddhists,as the teeth of Buddha,exerting its influence on Indian
society from that reformer’s death to the present time. Its adventures,trials and triumphs afford the best indications of the tenets of its per
scouters,and the firm belief and superstitious tenacity of its votaries.
The history of the left upper canine-tooth,or,as vulgarly called,
the left eye-tooth,may be divided into two periods,viz . the first from
the death of Buddha to its removal to Ceylon,and the other fromthat time to the present.
‘
The tooth is said to have been saved from the flames by one of
his disciples named Khema,while the funeral obsequies of Buddha
were being celebrated at Kusmagara in the magnificent funeral pile
in the forest of er’
il trees,near the spot where he expired in
5 43,and whilst the princes of the surrounding countries were quar
relling for the possession of the relics.1~ When in his possession he
was commissioned to take it to Dantapura or the Tooth-city,thecapital of Kaliirga,and deliver it over to the king Brahmadatta,who,along with his son and grandson Kari and Sunanda,greatly honouredthis relic of the divine sage by offerings and festivals. In Dantapura
it remained thus honoured for about eight hundred years,in spite
of the Brahmanical protests against“a piece of human bone being
set up as an object of worship. At the expiration of this long period
In th e D7,‘ f-H '
u
'
z h ih first four routes are taken up w ith the history of‘l ll n r ll : l i -t
'
n" It s l l in and the fi lth and last w ith its historyin (
‘s-v lun l l l l l l l th u r
-Iu w at the re ig n of Near ln var ua. See also Forlws'
s Dangr'
s lra
l hr’rrl-v. ( l m' J mm u
', :nu l R Ii lN ’s Er clhmdc,vol. ix p. 201.
Mr . {inn h n i h st rtv s that i t w ould he interesting to know whether
there is anv
i
lu' nticm of this in the Ma le 71mr imbbrina—Sulm,the text Of w hich,w ith a trans]rtmu is hamg published by Mr . Childers,while an ancient Elli work
named T/u’
rpma fh a,a hi -tury of the pr incipal d iyobrls in India and Cey lon,andr eckoned hv the Bud dh i-i s among their sacred sc r iptures. although not belongingto the Three ll as lu -ts,
’
describing minutely the death of Buddha,passes over th i.fact quite in sile nt-v . ( 77 m Im cit. ) l lio former refer s to tho time;fo llow ing the attainment of Pu r im
'
r r -l urr . or state of extinction,by Gantama.Buddha,and th run s s ome light,fra gmentary though it he as a record,onthe ancient lxi~tur y nf India. and on the strugg les betw een Brahmanism and
B u ddhism f u'
suprc-nuu
-
y in Kalifim in the South and l’fitufi in the North the
lat t e r—a history par t ly of miracles,and par tly of the superstitious ideas cf
w orship which,thoug h loathsome,as S ir Swami justly obser ves,to the Hindu
mind,and repugnant to the genius of Gautama himself—remains the sole
symbol and substance of faith amongst the people,to whom the higher
teachings of Buddhism are unknown,and this wor ship is kept up W i th a.
considerable degree of state and splendour out of the revenues der ived fromextensive lands and states w ith which their temples had been endowed in
olden times by the Sinhalese sovereigns and others. It is rather interesting
r un r oor u-nsu c or car bon . 121
weare told that Guhasifiha,aking ofDantapura,apparently ignorant ofthe very existence of the tooth,notwithstanding his capital beingnamedafier it,seeing one day a great festival going on in the city,inquired thecause of it,and was informed by a Buddhist priest that the people were
worshipping the relic of Buddha which Khems,some eight centuries
before,had brought over there. Thereupon Guhasi‘
fiha,recalled fromapathy and infidelity by the remonstrances of his minister—who re
presented to him the unanimous belief of the people in the power of
the relic—renounced heresy,and,with all the zeal and intolerance of a
mophyte,persecuted and expelled from his kingdom all the Hindu
den t's,called in the Dirdhw aftéa ‘Niganthm,’
a sect ofSaivites elsewhere called Achailakae or naked ascetics),who hadhithertoenjoyed his favour . This took place early in the fourth century of
our era.
To revenge themselvesfor this outrage,theNiganthas repaired to thekingdomofPiltaliputra,modem Patnfi,and prevailed upon its sovereign—whose name is given as Palndu,andwho is probably the Gautamaputraof the Satkarni dynasty,also called the Emperor of all India—tocommission a subordinate rzlja named Chaitfiyana to start at the head
of a large army for the Kahnga country and bring his tributary kingGuhasihha fromKaliiiga,and the teeth,to him. This ultimatum was
conceivedmoreor less in these terms Whereas he(l ndu)worshippedthe true gods Brahma,Vishnu,and Mahesa,his subject Guhasi
’
fiha in
Dantapura worshipped day and night a piece of bone of a dead body ;
therefore Guhasiiiha must repair to his court,bringing the relic with
him. Chaitr‘tyana accordingly proceeded with a great army toDenta
pura,where he was most amicably received by Guhasiiiha,who enter
tained him as an honoured guest,and related the history of the relic
in justification of his conversionto Buddhism. The narrative made
such an impression on Chaita‘
ryana and his otfieers that they requested
an inspection of the wonderful relic,which being willingly complied
with,Guhasihha opened the casket,exposed the relic,and implored a
recurrence of the miracles it had already wrought,which were once
more repeated,and ended in the conversion both ofChaitx‘
ryana and his
army to Buddhism.
to learn that the Sinhalese,besides the History of the Tooth,’ are also in
pon ession of the Kesridlui turahéu,the History of Buddha’s lIalr,’mentioned
m the 39th chapter of the .llalui va itsa,a translation of which has been latelypublished in the J ournal of the Royal Asiatic Secrety. They haw got also the
“ am ide,or the History of the Frontal Bone relic of Buddha,’
whose
date and author are yet unknown . See J our. It. As. Sea,vol. vii,lb“ .
l fi r a s
122 mamom on was ms'
roav or
As the order of the Emperor ofall Jambudvipa could not be dis
obeyed,Guhasiilha,accompanied by Chaitfiyana,departed to the courtof the suzerain at Pataliputra,hearingwith him in a splendid procession
the precious relic,amidst the tears and lamentations of his people,and crossing rivers and mountains they in one time reached Patalipu
tra. Then commenced what Buddhists term the trials of the data“.
Pflndu,exasperated with rage at what he regarded the perversion of
his army,commanded the teeth tobe cast into a large pit prepared
in the courtyard of his palace and filled with glowing charcoal,thatit might be annihilated Throw now into a burning heap of char.
coal,” said the emperor, the bone worshipped by this man,who hasabandoned the gods worthy of adoration,and burn it without delayt tuoaliéa,ch . iii.,v . 10. The order was obeyed,but by the
mystical power of the relic a lotus-flower of the size of a chariot-wheel
arose above the flames,and the sacred tooth,emitting rays which
ascended through the skies and illumined the universe,alighted onthe tep. This is supposed by a writer toexplain the esoteric meaningof the Buddhist formula 01» manepadme harem,‘Thejewel is in thelotus.
" Pandu then subjected it to several other trials and indignitica to destroy or dishonour it,such as throwing it into a deep and
filthy ditch,which speedilybecame a clear pond covered with five kinds
of lotus-dowers,on one of which the relic was seen reposing ; burying it in the earth to be trodden down by elephants
’feet,but,
spurning a subterraneous retreat and bonds of clay, it reap
peared in the centreofanother golden lotus-flower : thus coming outofall
ofthese trials quite unscathed. Be at last directed that the tooth should
be placed on an anvil and smashed with a ponderous sledge-hammer,
but the tooth penetrated and became imbedded in the anvil. where it
remained safe and immoveable. The irate king,finding all efiorts to
extract it unavailing,then proclaimed that whoever would remove the
tooth should receive a great reward. Whereupon,several persons
having made attempts to extract it but in vain,a pious Buddhist,byname Subhadra,at last,after expounding the doctrines,and history ofBuddha,evoked the relic,which immediately disengaged itself from
the iron and floated in the water placed in a golden bowl which
Snbhadrfi held. The emperor,however,at the instigation of his
At that moment the toothmelie of Buddha,ascending to the skies,andillumining all directions like the planet Venus,pleased the Is,their doubtbeing removed.”—t tuvaiiic,var. 54. Also see Asiatic m l and l enti l);Record,Lond. 1888,p. 90.
rm: r oor n-asmc or car t on . 125
The kingDhatusena,who reigned 459 to 477 A .D .,made a jewelledcasket for it.
Parfikrama Bahu the Great,between the y ears 1190and 1195 A .D .,built for it a beautiful little temple at Palastipura,still extant,the ex
quisite workmanship ofwhich,according to Mr. Rhys Davids,hasastonished all who have seen it.
About the year 1240 A .D . Vijayabfihu enshrined it at Dambadeneyfi,whence Bhuvanekabfihu I. took it to Yapahu,which in the opinion
of Rogers is the same Yapaba the ruins ofwhich capital may still be
in the Seven Korles,and is also the Yapana of Ribeiro.
Between the years 1303 and 1314 A .D in.
the reign of Bhuvaneka
blhu,or about ten centuries since its reaching Ceylon under the com
mand of a man whose name is given as Aviyachchakkarvati,Kulisekera,the king ofPandi,sent an army to invadeCeylon,and got possession of the tooth and carried it fromYa
‘
ipahu in the SevenKorles,which
was then the capital of the island,to their country in South India,supposed to be Madura,where,however,it did not remain long,forParikrama III to retrieve the loss sustained by hispredecessor,went in
person to Pandi to treat for it,and was successful in procuring its
restitution and conveying it back safely toCeylon. His son established
it in 1319 A .D . at Hastiselapura. It is said that it continued to be for
some time close to the sacred Bo-tree (Fi cus religioaa) at Anuradhapura,themost venerated object in Ceylon,which tree is said to have been a
bough of the parent tree at Uruwela,sent by King Asoka to Ceylon,under which Buddha himself,secluded from the world in his sublime
musings andmeditations,had sat for six uninterruptedyears—planted byKing Tissa in 288 s .e.,and is consequently2163 years old“ -until
A ntiquary,vol . iii. p . 25 ; Mr . Fergusson’
s Serpent and Tree Worship,Lond.
1373 Cunningham’s Ancient Geography of India,Lond. 1871,pp. 530 et seq.
Stirling'
s History of Oriana also throw s some light on the subject,especially thev at that took place among ltakta,Biliar,and Sirbhum,&c. about 318 A .n.
—avery near approximation to the capture and fall ofDantapura.
0 Ages varying from one to five thousand years have been assigned to
the Bach-be of Senegal,tho Eucalyptus of Tasmania,the Dragon-tree of
Orob va,and the Chesnut ofMount Etna ; but all these estimates are purelyinferential,whereas the age of the B o-tree is a matter of record,its conu rvntion being an object of solicitude to successive dynasties. Comparedwith it the Oak of Ellerslie is but a sapling ; and the Conqueror
’s Oak in
Windsor Forest barely numbers half its years ; the Yew -trees of Fountains
Abbey are believed to be twelve hundred years old ; the Olives in the Garden
ofGethsemane were full-grown when the Saracenswere expelled from J erusalem;and the Cypress of Some,in Lombardy,is said to have been a tree in the
time of J ulius Caesar ; yet the B o-treo at Annrsdhapurs is older than the
126 mes ons on r ue ursroar or
in the year 1560Ad ) . the Buddhist world was startled by hearing that
it had been captured and destroyed by the Portuguese. A relic the
fame ofwhose prodigies had filled the air,regarded by Buddhists as
a sacred treasure of inestimable value,a national palladium of the
Ceylonese,to fall into the hands of infidels,was truly as frightful
a catastrophe as might well be imagined ; no wonder then that the
native authorities strongly afi rm that during the fray.with the Portu
guess in 1560 the relic was safely hidden in difl'
ereutparts of the island,at Delgamoa in Safl
'
ragam,at Kandy,and at Kotmalya,&c. The
Portuguese historians,on the contrary,assert that a tooth mounted
in gold which had been carried to J aifna during the commotion. in
the Buddhist states,believed by all the Buddhists of J afi'
napatam and
elsewhere to belong to Buddha,was really brought out of the spoils
of a Buddhist temple to D. Constantino da Braganca,the Viceroy of
Goa,who submitted it to the Inquisition there,which tribunal orderedthat it should be crushed to pieces,cast into a braz ier,and the ashes
thrown into a running stream,in spite of the unlimited offers in ex
change for the relic,made by the wealthymonarch who ruled in fur
ther India,andwho was in the habitof despatching annual embassies to
pay homage to the shrine.‘l But I cannot do better than reproduce
oldest of these by at least a century,and would almost seem to verify the
prophecy pronounced at the time it was planted by Tisn,that it would “ flou
r ish and be green for ever.”—Sir Emerson Tennent’s Ceylon,vol. iii.,pp 818-15,
quoted almost verbatim De Candolle'
s Bibi. Unison . do 0m tome xxi.
p. 89a. To this tree the Ceylonese attach the deepest interest. Hr. Childu '
s
says that the Bo-tree occupies inmodern Buddhism the same position as the
cross in Chr istianity. The Mahdmnia gives in too great detail the manner inwhich themiraculous self-severance of the parent tree took place. Chapunn
tells us that in 1829 the tree consisted of five pr incipal branches,noneof whichappeared to exceed the body of aman in thickness and there were,besides.smaller branches grown out of the ter races at difl
'
erent points”(Roma -ts
on the City of Anw ddhap um,J aw .8. As. Soc. vol. xiii.,p. Fa-Hian speak:
of itas“ letting down roots from its branches," which ismore like the FicusIndies ;
but this appears to be a mistake. We arenold,again,that Buddha himselfmade&equent allusions to the growth of the Bo-tree as an emblem of the rapid
propagation of his faith,just as the architectural form of the slaps a rt iadabroad another of the symbols by which Buddha an d to illustrate his
doctrines. About the superstitious reverencewith which the tree is regarded in
Ceylon the reader may see Butts’s Rambler in Ceylon,Lond. 1841,pp .
On the right to appoint the chief priest of the sacred B o-tree,and the claimthat arose from the last incumbent dying suddenly from cholera without
lu ving any male issue,which gave r ise to a trial and a historiml romancesimilar to the Tichborne case see the Ind. Ant. vol. i.,p. 196.a 'mp (act of the capture of the teeth by the Portuguese is confirmed
by the author ity ot‘
Biboim and by that of Bodrigues de St 0 Hou ses,whoin 1678wrote his M an da Ceylon to commemorate the exploits and du th
ot his h thar.00astatino de 86 0 Nomnha,who perishad at Badulla in lm
128 Manors es r un a ta'rear or
Ceylon as the greatest of relics. So highly was it venerated bythe Sinhalese and byall the people of Pegu that they esteemed it above
all other treasures.
‘
Martin Alfonso de Mello happening to be in Pegu with his ship on
business when the Viceroy,D. Constantine,returned (to Goa) fromJ afi
'
napatam,theKing,hearing that the tooth which was so profoundlyrevered by all Buddhists had been carried off,summoned Martin
Alfonso to his presence and requested him,as he was returning to
India,to entreat theViceroy to surrender it,offering togive in exchange
whatever might be demanded for it . Those who knew the Peguans.
and the devotion w ith which they regarded this relic of the devil,affirmed that the King would willingly give three or even four hundred
thousand cruz ados'l' to obtain possession ofit. By the advice ofMartin
Alfonso,the King despatched ambassadors to go in his company to
the Viceroy on this sfl'
air,and empowered them to signify his readiness
to ratify any agreement to which theymight assent on hisbehalf.
Martin Alfonso,on reaching Goa in last April apprised the
Viceroy of the arrival of the envoys. The Viceroy,1after receiving
0 Decada VIL,liv . ix.,cap. ii.,pp . 316 et seq. of the edition of 1783.
1‘ Crusade,so called from its bear ing a cro ss,being coined at the per iod
of the Crusades,is worth two shillings and nine pence.
I TheViceroy,D. Constantinode Braganca,was the fourth son of D. J aime,fourth Duke of Braganca and a pr ince of the reigning dynasty of Portugal.He left Lisbon for India,when only 31years old,on the 7 th Apr il 1558,andarrived at Goa on the 3rd September of the same year,and on landing took theusual oath as Viceroy of India. His name has remained dear to the Indo-Pos'tu.
geese,as hewas firm,wise,and benevolent. He has incur red,nodoubt,the cen'
sure of the historian on account of the famous tr ibunal of the Inquisition beingestablished in Goa during his government,but he had no hand in that aflair,which was settled long before in Por tugal. His piety is shown in his buildingthe church of St. Thomas,in the Campo de 8. Lazaro,in the old city ofGoa,where it was hi s intention to enshrine the relics of the apostle St. Thomas,discovered by one Manocl de Paris,descr ibed in ancient documents as the Captain of
the Commandel Coast,in 1523,in the town ofMeliapur but the inhabitants ofthat place objected to their removal. The church,however,could not be finishedduring his stay in India,and is new in ruins,although in1827 it allured the AbbiOottineau to say mass at its altar on the day of the Apostle,15th December .(See his J ournal in the Institute Vasco da Gama,187 4,p. He admittedinto intimate friendship the unfortunate poet Camoens,and through his politeness and good sense silenced those who were trying to procure the banishmentof the satirist,whose Dispara te: na Ind ia had severely handled certain persons
of influence in Goa. The Viceroy took an ac tive part in those expeditions whichwere periodically sent to Ceylon and elsewhere for the propagation of Christianity,especially that of J afl
‘
napatam,w hich had been some years beforefervently preached as a sacred vow by St . Francis Xavier,and for which he
had to travel from Cochin to Bassein (see my Notes on the History and Antiquities ofBassein,J ew . Bomb. Br. B . As. 80s.187 4,p. D. Constantinogoverned
r ats r eor n-ns t rc or car t on. 129
them hospitably,opened the business for which they were sent by
their king. They began the conversation by making a request for
the tooth on behalf of their sovereign ; ofi'
ering in return any terms
that might be required,with a proposal for a perpetual alliance with
Portugal,and an undertaking to provision the fortress of Malacca at
all times when called upon to do so,together with many other condi
tions and premises. The Viceroy promised an early reply,and in the
meantime communicated with his veteran captains and fidalgos,all of
whom were of opinion that so great an ofi'
er should be accepted,whichwould replenish the exhausted treasury ; and so eager were they,thatthe question seemed to be decided.
But the matter having reached the ear of the Archbishop,DonGaspar,* he repaired instantly to the Viceroy,and warned him that
he was not to permit the teeth to be ransomed for all the trea
sures of the universe,since it would be dishonouring to the Lord,and would afi
'
ord an opportunity to these idolaters to pay to that
bone the homage that belonged to God alone. The Archbishop re
minded him often of the subject,and even preached against it from
the pulpit in the presence of the Viceroy and all his court,so.that
Don Constantino. who as a good Catholic feared God and was obe
dient to the prelates,hesitated to proceed with the afi'
air,or to .take
any step that was not unanimously approved of.
India unti l the 7 th September 1561,and in J anuary 1568 embarked on heardhis ship,the Constantine,built in Goa,w hich had doubled the Cape ofGood Hopeseventeen times,brought four Viceroys to India,andlasted altogether 25years- a
rare feat ofnavigation in those days Or iente Conquistado,Dec. XL,cap. i.,p.
193. His government was altogether prosperous,and the King,D. Sebastiao,whose ofi
'
sr to D. Constantino of the Viceroyalty of India for his lifetime hadbeen politely declined,said to the Viceroy D. Luis de Ata
'
ide on his second
nominat ion to that post,Allez,”as Lafitau expresses it, gouvcrnez comms
a fait Don Constantine A very good por trait of the Viceroy D. Constan
tine is in the Governor’s palace at Pangim or New-Goa,one at Damaun,one
in Far ia y Souz a’s,and another in Lafitau’s works.
° D. Gaspar ds Lea6 Psreira was a canon of the see of Evora who cameto Goa as Archbishop in 1560a n. It was he who held the first consecration of
hiaheps in the church of St. Paul,assisted by the Patriarch ofEthiopia and the
Bishop of Malacca. The pr iest consecrated was a J esuit by name MelchiorM aire,Bishep of Nin a,and a coadjutor of the abovenamsd Patr iarch. In the
evening of the day of consecration he baptised in the church of Santa Ft 409
per'sons of the province of Selects of Goa,in the presence of the four prelates.
At that time Ball ets contained only one church and a mission-house at Rachel,but at the end of fifty years it could boast of twenty-sight. The Patr iarch
could never reach Abyssinia,which circumstance induced him to resign his
fifls fi lm m e that of Biahop ef Chim and J apan. He died in Macao about
two years'
after his nomination—Borg,Hist. dc Goo,pp. 77 st scq .
17 r a s
130 transom on m e ms'
roav or
He thereforeconvened an assembly of the Archbishop,the prelata p
divines,and heads of the religious orders,together with the captains,senior fidslgos,and other ofiicers of the government,and laid the
matter before them,saying that by the large ofi'
ers ofmoney that had
beenmade for the tooth the pressing want of the state would be pro
vided for } After mature deliberation among all those theologians,who had it well studied beforehand,a resolution was come to,that itwas not proper to part with the tooth,since its surrender would be anincitement to idolatry,and an insult to the Almighty—d im that should
not be committed though the state,or even the world itself,might beimperilled . Of this opinionwere the divines
—the Archbishop ; the Inquisitors,Fr . Antonio Pegado,Vicar-General of the Dominicans,Fr.Manuel da Serra of the same order,the Prior ofGoa,Rev. Custodio ds
San Francisco,and another theologian of the sameorder Rev. Antonio
de Q uadros,of the Company of Jesus,the Provincial of India ; Rev .
FranciscoRodrigues oManguinho ofthe sameorder,and several others.
Having resolved thus,and committed it to writing,to which all
attached their signatures,and a copy of which is now in our posses
sion in the Record Office (or in the Torre do Pombo),1' the Viceroycalled on the treasurer to produce the tooth. He handed it to the
Archbishop,who,in their presence placed it in a mortar,and with hisown hand reducing it to powder,cast the powder into a braz ier which
stood ready for the purpose,after which the ashes and the charcoal
together were scattered into the river,in sight of all who were crowd
ing the verandahs and windows which looked upon the water .
Manyprotested againstthis measure of the Viceroy,since there wasnothing to prevent theBuddhists (gentiosn from making other idols r.and out of any piece ofbone they would shape another tooth in resemblance of the one they had lost,and extend to it the same worship
° Some of these fidalgos wished to m y the relic themselves hack toPegu,and collectmoney on theway by exhibiting it to the Buddhist worshippers.
Fans y Sousa recounts this story,and Lafltau repeats it . Ninguno dudava
ya de que ella se hat-i; y muchos deacubr ieron la codicia do aer cada qmlembiado a Pegh con el diente vendido,para ir mostrandole a los Gentiles
g:todas las Poblsoicaes ne ay de cos a otra parts,y juntar on Tesoro deofertas con que era crci le avian de acudir todos a adorarle.
”—h r ia y SousaAsio fortuguesa,cap. xvi. on “ Halafia heroics y augnsta del Vi
-Bey D.
stantmo,” p. 858; Iafitan,Hist. dos Blaese. ct Coaq.,tome iv.,p. 282.
f lt dmamt efi n at fl —Bold imdo aow ds Goo,1858,p. 660.
I.
The Portuguu a apply the termGsats’
o (a Gentile) indiscriminately to anati ve of India,unless he is converted to Christianity or l ahomedanism.
132 u n ion on T HE “m any or
a tooth (which some afli rm to have been that of a monkey),butwhich had been revered as that of Buddha in a temple of J afl
'
napattam
in Ceylon,although that prince ofi'
ered for it cruzados ; in
this business Constantine acted as a conscientious and religious man ;be consulted the Archbishop and clergy on this occasion,as he wasafraid on the one hand of participating in an act of idolatry and
superstition,and on the other of defrauding the King his master of
a considerable treasure and when it was made clear to him that,according to conscience and natural reason,it was unlawful to parti
cipate in an act of idolatry for any reason whatsoever,much less for a
sum ofmoney,whichwould beadding to theformer guilt that ofavarice,he immediately consented that the infamous relic should be thrown into
the sea. If he had taken the money,he would certainly have been
represented by prejudiced authors as a covetous man w ithout law or
conscience ; but as he acted otherwise they call him a fool. It is very
diriicult,or rather impossible,to please those who are bent on blamingtheir fellow
But those were not really far from truth who thought that the End
dhists would shape another tooth out of any piece of bone. Long
before the Peguan embassy’
s return home the Sifihalese had found out
the tooth. Some said,as writes Padre Francisco de Sousa in his
Or ienteConquistado,1' that themoment theArchbishopplaced the tooth
in the mortar and was about to pulveriz e it,it made its way through
the bottom and went straight to alight on a lotus-dower inKandy,wherethey have built for it a temple calledDalidagis,or temple of the sacredtooth. Others revived a facsimile not only in a duplicate,but in a tri
plicate form of the desecrated relic.
The story of the resuscitated tooth is of some importance,and is alsominutely related by Couto,who writes At the birth ofBrahma,king of Pegu,the astrologers who cast his nativity predicted that he
Hi stor ica l Sketch of 000,pp. 33,34.1 Fingem os chine
-alas que o dents de Budu sahira pelo fundo do almo
fariz,quando D. Constantino (nod ; o arcebispo) 0 quiz desfaser,e se fora porem Candie sobro uma for-moss recs,0 assim lhe de dicaram urn famoso templechamado Dalidagis,quosignifies easa do dents sagrarlo.
”Or ients (
”onquhtado
O inquista l .,Divisai'
» I.,No. 82. The same author narrates the whole ad'
air as
minutely as Couto. His work,however,is very rare,and scarcely known,Ibelieve te l-Inglis]; scholars. The Work of Texeira Pinto on the causes of the
decadence of the Portuguese ions in Asia has also a reeriminatory articleon the subject,as he thinks i s Portuguese Viceroy should have accepted theransom-money profi
'
ered by the Buddhist king,which would have replenishedtheir (in those times) empty cofi
‘
ers. But the priests reply to this with theirwarped and threadbare argument that he was a fi'
ecmsson.
"
r ue r oor u -anu c o r cnvnorv. 133
would marry a daughter of the king of Ceylon,who was to have suchand such marks and features,and certain proportions of limbs and
figure. Brahma,willing to fulfil the prediction,sent ambassadors toDon Juan (the king of Cotta),whom he addressed as the sole inheritorof the royal blood and the only legitimate sovereign of the island,andrequested his daughter in marriage,accompanying the demand by a
shipload of rich presents,consisting of things unknown in Ceylon,besides woven cloths and gems. The envoys arrived about the time that
the king had abandoned Cotta to take up his residence within the Fort
of Colombo (am. He received the ambassadors with much
distinction,and,apprised of their mission,concealed from them the
fact that the astrologers were in error,as he was childless. He had,however,brought up in his palace a daughter of his great chamberlain,a prince of the royal blood who had embraced Christianity through
the instrumentality of the governor,FranciscoBarreto,who had stood his
godfather and given him his name ; and such was the influence of this
man,in addition to the claim of relationship,that in all things the kingwas directedbyhisadvice. This girl the king treatedwith every honour
as his own child ; on the arrival of the envoys she had a place assigned
to her at the royal table,and was addressed ashis daughter,and under
that designation he sought to make her wife to the king of Pegu. The
opposition which he apprehended was from the Captain-General of
Colombo and the Franciscans,who,although the girl was a Buddhist,might nevertheless regard her as a lamb within their fold,whom theycould any day induce to become a Christian,and they were,therefore,likely to interfere to prevent her leaving the island. Discussing these
considerations with the great chamberlain,who was aman of resources
and tact,the latter pointed out to the king,who relied onhis judgmentin all things,that although forced to abandon Cotta,and reduced to
poverty,he might,through this alliance,Open up a rich commercewith
Pegu ; and he accordingly assented that the girl should be despatched
to the king,provided she was conveyed away secretly and without the
knowledge of the Portuguese at Colombo.
But the chamberlain did more in concert with theking be caused
tobemade out of a stag’
s horn a facsimile of the ape’s tooth carried off
by Don Constantine,andmounting it in gold he enclosed it in a costlycasket,richly decoratedwith precious stones. Conversing one daywith
the Peguan ambassador and the Buddhist priests (talapoens) in his
suite,who were about to set out to worship and make ofl‘
erings at
[36 mi ssi ons O N T HE ms'
roar or
the news spread quickly ; the priesthood (talapoens) assembled,andthe people crowded devoutly to offer adoration to the tooth . For its
landing they collected vast numbers of rafts elaborately and r ichlyornamented,and when they came to carry the accursed tooth on
shore it rested on gold and silver and other costly rarities. Intelligence
was instantly sent to Brahma at Pegu,who despatched all his nobles
to assist at its reception,and he superintended in person the prepara
tion of a place in which the relic was to be deposited . In the
arrangements for this he displayed to the utmost all the resources
and wealth at his command. In this state the tooth made the ascent
of the r iver,which was covered w ith rich boats,encircling the structure,under which rested the shrine,so illuminated that it vied with the
brightness of the sun.
The king,when all was prepared,seated himselfin a boat decoratedwith gilding and brocaded silks ; he set out two days in advance to
meet the procession,and on coming in sight of it he retired into the
cabin of his galley,bathed,spr inkled himselfwith perfumes,assumedhis most costly dress,and on touching the raft which bore the tooth he
prostrated himself before it with all the gestures of profoundadoration,and on his knees approaching the altar on which rested the shrine,hereceived the tooth from those who had charge of it,and raising it alofl;
placed it on his head many times with adjurations of solemnity and
awe then restoring it to its place,be accompanied it on its way to thecity. As it passed along,the river was perfumed with the odours
which ascended from the barges,and as it reached the shore the tala
poens and nobles of the king,and all the (griefmen,advancing into thewater,took the shrine upon their shoulders and bore it to the palace,accompanied by an inpenetrable multitude of spectators. The grandees
taking off their costly robes spread them on the way,inorder that thosewho carried that
‘
abominable relic might walk upon them.
The Portuguese who happened to be present were astonished on
witnessing this barbarous pomp ; and Antonio Toscano,who I havestated elsewhere was ofthe party,has related to me such extraordinary
particulars of the majesty and grandeur with which the tooth was
received,that I confess I cannot command suitable language to describethem. In fact,everything that all the emperors and kings of the
universe combined could contribute to such a solemnity,each eager to
display his power to the utmost,all this was realized by the acts of this
barbarian king.
rm: r oor n-aeme or cavaos . 137
The tooth was at last deposited in the centre of the courtyard of
the palace,under a costly tabernacle,upon which the monarch and all
his grandees presented their offerings,declaring their lineage,allwhich was recorded by scribes nominated for that duty. Here it t e
mained two months till the vihara which they set about erecting could
be constructed,and on which such expenditure was lav ished as to
cause an insurrection in the kingdom.
To end the story,I shall here tell of what occurred in the follow
ing year,between the king ofKandy and Brahma,king ofPegu,respecting these proceedings of Don Juan,king of Ceylon. These matters
which Don Juan had transacted so secretly,touching the marriage ofhis pretended daughter w ith the king of Pegu,as well as the affair of
the tooth,soon reached the ear of the king ofKandy,who,learning the
immense amount of treasure which Brahma had given for it,was iafluenced with envv (for he was a connection of Don Juan,havingmarried his sister or,as some said,his daughter),and immediately des
patched an envoy to Pegu,whom the king received with distinction.
IIe Opened the object ofhis mission,and disclosed,on the part of hismaster,that the lady whomDon Juan had passed off as his own child
was in reality the daughter ofthe great chamberlain,and that the tooth,which had been received with so much pomp and adoration,had beenfabricated out of the horn ofa deer ; but he added that the king of
Kandy,anxious to ally himself with the sovereign ofPegu,had commis
sioned him to offer in marriage a pr incess who was in reality his own
offspring,and not supposititious ; besides which he gave him to under
stand that the Kandyan monarch was the possessor and depository of
the genui ne tooth ofBuddha,neither the one which Don Constantine
had seized at J affnapatam,nor y et that which was held by the king of
Pegu,being the true one,—a factwhich he was prepared to substantiate
by documents and ancient alas .
B rahma listened to his statement,and pondered it in hismind ; butseeing that the princess had already received the oaths of fidelity as
queen,and that the tooth had been welcomed w ith so much solemnityand deposited in a vihz
‘
ira Specially built for it,he resolved to hush
up the affair,to avoid confessing himself a dupe (for kings must no
more admit themselves to be in error in their dealings with us than
we in our dealings with them) . Accordingly he gave as his reply that
he was sensible of the honour designed for himby the proffered alliance
w ith the roval familv at Kaudv. and likewise hv the offer ofthe tooth ;
lS r a s
138 sl asrora ox THE nus-roar or
that he returned his thanks to the king,and as a mark of consideration
would send back by his ambassadors a ship laden with presents. He
caused two vessels to be prepared for sea,with cargoes of rice and rich.
cloths,one for Don Juan,and the other for the king of Kandy and
in that for Don Juan he embarked all the Portuguese subjects w hom
he had held in captivity,and amongst them Antonio Toscano,who has
told me these things many times.
'
1hesc ships having arrived at Ceylon,the one which was for the Kandyan port had her cables cut and was
stranded before she could discharge her cargo,so that all was lost andthe ambassador drowned some said that this was done byorder of the
Sinhalese king,Don Juan,and if so it was probably a stratagem of the
great chamberlain,for the king himself had no genius for plots. Thus
thi ngs remained as they were,nothing further having been attempted
or
The next curious episode in the history of the tooth-relic and the reli
gious annals ofCeylon is the apostasy,or reversion to his former faith,of Dom and his seiz ure of the (Ialada as crown property. The
Portuguese having roused the to revolt against their king,Raja Sii ba,Kanapfi Bandar of l’azadencia,a political intriguer and
Sinhalese of royal blood,who had been educated at Goa by the Jesuitsand had embraced Christianity under the name ofDom J osh,was des
patched with eu armed force to enthrone Dona Catherina,the daughterof the fugitive king Jayaweira. The expedition was successful,andthe Portuguese made arrangements for confer ring the sovereignty on
Dom Felipe,on whom they desired to bestow the hand of Q ueen
Catherina,which arrangements,however,Dom Jonedid not agree to.
The consequence was that he turned his army against his allies,drivingthem away from Kandy,and removed his rival by poison. Thus left
undisputed master of Kandy,D . J oat) then seiz ed on the supreme
power,defeated the army of his native opponent,Raija Sifiha,who hadthreatened to inflict on D JoaB the same torture as that under which hisfather had expired
—that of being buried underground up to the neck
and then the sufferings terminated by rolling huge stones on the head
above the surface—and assumed the Kandyan crown under the fantas
tic name of VimalaDharma.
’Then he gave the last finish to his policy
by abjuring Christianity,which secured to the usurper the support of
the Buddhist priesthood,and raised the superstructure of his fortunes
Decada VIII .,cap. xiii.,pp . 83 ct seq. Al though Sir Emerson Tennenthas given these extracts from Couto in his work on t
‘eylon,I have drawn mine
from the original and hm e eoxnpared them w ith h is.
140 n ewton ; on rm: n ls'
roav or
a curved piece of discoloured ivory,as Sir E . Tennent rightly observes,about two inches in length and more than one in diameter,which
unexampled dimensions are by Buddhists accounted for by a strange
argument,that in the davs of Buddha human beings were giants,and
their teeth kept pace,so to speak,with their larger stature.
*
Dr . Davy,who,it appears,was one of the first Christians to see the
modern dalada,in 1817 descr ibes it thus It was of a dirty yellow
colour,excepting towards its truncated base,where it was brownish .
J udging from its appearance at the distance of two or three feet (for none
but the chief priests were privileged to touch it),it was artificial,and
of ivory,discoloured by age.
”
1 Major Forbes saw it again on the 28th
May 1828,during the great Kendvan festival,in company w ith S ir
Robert and Lady Horton and party,amo ngst whom was Baron von
Hugel. He w rites It is a piece of discoloured ivory,slightlycurved,nearly two inches in length,and one in diameter at the base
from thence to the other extremity,which is rounded and blunt,itconsiderably decreases in size.
”
1 Elsewhere he continues —2‘Notthe least curious fact connected with this antique is,that the original
promoter of the imposition (which passed it as a tooth of Gautama)did not procure some old man
’
s tooth,and thus deprive sceptics of at
least one strong argument against its
A s regards the stains now observed in the relic,w e are told that th e
Buddhists claim them as a proof of identity,from the fact of their having been
made the subject of remark centur ies ago by the king Pamin,as recorded in theDhatura ii éa . But its yellow ish
-brown colour,if it then existed,could not possiblyhave inspired the follow ing allusion in the same epic The tooth -relic,of acolour like a part of the moon,white as the kanda flower (a species of
jasmine) and new sandalwood,caus ed w i th its radiance palace-gates,mountains,
trees,and the like to appear for a moment as i f ofpolished si lver .
"—Canto v .,vcr . 63. O nly the faith of a Buddhist can explain away these discrepancies.
1‘ Davy
’
s Account of Ceylon,Lond. 1821,p. 368.
I Forbes’
s Eleven Year s m Ceylon,Lond. 1820,vol . i p. 293. The same
author hhs publ ished in the Ceylon Almanack,1835,an ar ticle on this subjectentitled The Dangistra Dalada,or Right Canine Tooth of Gautama Buddha,”but this is er roneous. A ll other author ities concur in calling it the left canine,w hich is moreover qualified as belonging to the upper set by naming it the left.eye
-tooth . In refer ence to other canine teeth Col . Yule wr ites Of the
four eye-teeth of éfikya,one,it is related,passed to the heaven of Indra,thesecond to the capital ofGandhara,the third to Kal lnga,the fourth to the
snake-gods. The Gandhara tooth was perhaps,like the alms-bow l,carr iedoff by a Sassanide invasion,and may be identical w ith that tooth of F0 whi ch
the Chinese annals state to have been brought to China. in 530 by a Persian
embassy. A tooth of Buddha is now shown in the monastery of Fuchan,butwhether this be either the Sassanian pr esent,or that got from Ceylon by Kublai,is unknown. Other teeth of Buddha w ere show n in Hwen Thsang
'
s time atBalkh and at Kanauj . —Y ulc
’
s MarcoPolo,vol . ii .,p. 266.
l‘orbes
’
s Eleven Yea rs in Ce
ylon,vol . i i. . p. 220.
rm: r oor u -nsu c or can on . 141
Both Dr . Davy and Major Forbes have given a drawing of it ; that
of the latter,slightly reduced in siz e,appears to have been reproduced
by Sir E. Tennent in his charming H istory of Ceylon,and by Col.
Yule in his excellent edition of llIar co Polo’
s Tra'
velr . The following
diagrams,copied from the above-mentioned works,along with a faithful
representation of the permanent human upper canine tooth,show at once
the palpable difference there is between the tooth of a man and the
counterfeit one now exhibited in Kandy.
After Dr . Davy. After Major Forbe s . Human canine tooth.
The human canine teeth,or cuspids as anatomists call them,areabout three-quarters to one inch in length,and consist of three parts,viz . the crown,the neck,and the fang or root. The crown is thick,conical,convex in front and hollowed behind. The point or cusp is
generally blunted or becomes worn down by use. The neck is con
tracted,and as such only slightly marking the separation between the
crown and the root. The fang is single,conical in form,compressed
laterally,and lined by a slight groove on each side. It is evident that
both in size and form the human tooth bears a striking contrast to the
one at Kandy.
Now a few words about the temple and sanctuary where the tooth
relic is deposited. If the Buddhists persist in saying that it is the
teeth ofBuddha,as they always will,then they have every reason to
be proud of their Maliga‘
iva temple,where it rests after having had
its wanderings and returns,captivities and exiles,degradation and
triumphs,during two thousand years of travel. No relic,as BishopHeber truly remarks, was ever more sumptuously enshrined or more
devoutly worshipped.
”
Narrative of a J ourney,&c . vol . ii.,p. 254 . The venerable Bishop also
mentions that although he did not see the tooth,he was shown a facsimile,which is more like a w ild beast
'
s tusk than a human tooth .
142 Man ors ox r un ms'
roav or
Dr . Davy,who was in Kandy in 1817,describes the temple where
the tooth-relic is now preserved,thus The daladaMalagawa was the
domestic temple of the king. and is the most venerated ofany in the
country,as it contains the relic,the teeth of Buddha,to which the
whole island was dedicated,and which is considered by good B uddhists
as themost precious thing in the world. The temple is small,of twostories,built in the Chinese style of architecture. The sanctum is an
inner room,about twelve feet square,011 the upper story,without windows,and to which a ray of natural light never penetrates. You enter
it by folding doors,with polished brass panels,before and behind whichis a curtain. The splendour of the place is very striking ; the roof and
walls are lined with gold brocade and nothing scarcely is to be seen
but gold,gems,and sweet-smelling flowers. On a platform or stage
about three feet and a half high,and which occupies about half the
room,there is a profusion of flowers tastefully arranged before the
objects of worship to which they are offered,viz . two or three small
figures ofBuddha,-one ofcrystal,and the other ofsilver gilt—and four
or five domes or caskets,called karanduas,containing relics,and similar
in form to the connnon Dagobah . All but one of
the karanduas are small,not exceeding a foot in height,and wrappedin many folds ofmuslin. One is of much greater size,and uncovered.and w ith its decorations makes a most brilliant appearance. It is five
feet four and a half inches b igli,and nine feet ten inches in circum
ference at its base. It 18 ofsilver,from three-tenths to four-tenths of
an inch thick,and gilt externally. It consists of three different pieces,capable ofbeing separated from each other. Its workmanship is neat
but plain,and it is studded w ith very few gems,the finest ofwhich is
a valuable cat’
s-eve on the top,which is rarely seen. The ornaments
attachc to it are extremely rich,and consist of gold chains,and a
great variety of gems suspended from it. The most remarkable of
these is a bird hanging by a gold chain,and formed entirely ofdiamonds,rubies,blue sapphires,emeralds,and cat
’
s-eyes,set in gold,which is
bid by the profusion of stones. Viewed at a little distance,by candlelight,the gems about the karandua seem to be of immense value,butwhen closely inspected they prove in general to be of bad quality,andsome of the largest merely crystal coloured by a foil. This great
karandua is the receptacle of the dalada,the tooth,’as it is eonsidered,
ofBuddha. Never was relicmore preciously enshrined ; wrapped
in pure sheet-
gold,it was placed in a case. just large enough to receive
14 1 ru mo rs. ox Tm: ms'
ronv or
During the rebellion against the English in 1818,in which again
the relic played an important part,it was clandestinely removed by
certain priests appointed to ofiiciatc at its sanctuary,but towards the
conclusion of the rebellion it was again restored. having been found
with a pr iest who was seized in the Matale district. by the care of
the B ritish Government,who then empowered its Resident at Kandy
to act as the custodian of the relic,and a soldier to keep guard
every night at the door of the temple.
* It was at last entirely
surrendered to the B ritish,toge ther with the Kandyan kingdom,i n1825. The next occasion on which the dalada attracted attention was
at itspublic exhibition in Kandy on the‘Z 7 th ofMay 1828,the first time
after fiftv- three vears since the king Kriti Sri had openly displayed it,on which occasion a considerable sum of money was collected from the
assembled multitude of devotees,who flocked thither from all parts of
the country to worship the relic. O f this splendidfestival and proces
sion we have numerous records. On that day all three larger cases
having previously been removed,the relic contained in the three inner
caskets was placed on the back of a r ichly capar isoned elephant,overit a small octagonal cupola or canopy supported by silver pillars,andall thisgrand apparatus carried round in solemn and gorgeous procession.
In 1831a secret plan was concerted by some disaffected Sinhalese to
remove again the (lulu/la,and renew the scenes the Kandyau country
had once witnessed so grievously in 1818 ; but these proceedings were
carefully watched hv the Government,the delinquents arrested,and
thus the scheme was frustrated. For a long time afterwards the relic
was in the olficialcustodyoftheCeylonese Government,and Tumour wasthe first European,it appears,who,for more than nine years,had thekeys of the sanctuary constantly in his library,save during the per
formanceofthe dailyofferings. I t is only within a few years,cir ca 1839,that,owing to the remonstrances of theChristian societiesinEngland,theconnection of the existing Government with the shrine has ceased.
In 1858 two Burmese homes from Rangoon were sent to Ceylon bythe king of Burma on a mission almost similar to that of his remote
predecessor the king Anavantha,who in the eleventh century had
sent an embassy to endeavour to procure the relic,but could obtainonlv “
the miraculous emanation of it,to contain which a tower in the
palace-court ofAmarapura was built. This time the priests went there
It’r rw rips rlr fl r J IM /inc,185 1,p. 143.
rm: r oo'
ru -asu c or can on. 145
to get a facsimile ofthe tooth,which they obtained,on the 9th Octoberof that year,and the whole transaction is but a repetition mutatis
a ntandic under the British ofwhat,about three hundred years ago,tookplace under thePortuguese. The latter,swayed by the Inquisitionalinfluence and perhaps scruples of conscience,not only refused to give
up but burnt the relic ; the former,more tolerant,if not more enlight
ened,allowed the model to be taken,which has since been deposited
within the walls of the palace at Mandalay,the new capital of Burma.
*
Thepresent condition of the sanctuary and its precious contents re
quire a few words ofdescription. We are told that “ nothing can bemore
picturesque than the situation and aspect ofKandy,on the banks of theminiature lake overhung on all sides by hills which command charm
ing views of the city with its temples and monuments below .
”But
the sanctuary of the great relic,notwithstanding the beauty of the
scenery around,and its richness in gems and precious metals,is a small
chamber without a ray of light,in which the air is stifling hot and
heavy with the perfume of flowers,situated in the inmost recess of them
'
fia'
ra attached to the palace of the Kandyan kings. The frames of
the doors are inlaid with carved ivory,and on a massive silver table
hung round with rich brocades stands the bell-shaped karandaa,theshrine or dilgobii,consisting of six cases,the largest or external cover,five feet in height,formed of gilt silver inlaid w ith rubies and other
gems,and ornamented with jewelled chains ; other caskets,similarlywrought,but diminishing in size gradually ; until on removing the
innermost one,about one foot in height,a golden lotus is disclosed,inwhich reposes the mystic tooth . In front of the silver altar a plain
table is placed for people to deposit their giftsupon . These karanduas
are said to have been made for the relic by successive sovereigns be
tween 1267 and 1464 A .D .
The last event in the history of the dalada is the solemn visit paid
but a few months ago by the Burmese envoys to the Maligava temple
at Kandy on their return fromEurope,in fulfilment of the special com
mands of their king . The pomp and circumstance of that splendid
pilgrimage evoked a fresh enthusiasm in the Sinhalese for their revered
tooth-relic,and numerous were the tokens of obeisance and devotion
ofiered to the shrine.
Madras Examiner,26th August 1858. Conf. also Co l. Yale’
s Marco I'u ln
’s
M eals,vol. ii.,p. 265,and Revue ( les (1q H onda,1860,p. 129, ll t' l t ' a g r aph ic
description of the ceremony is given,and the relic is descr ibed thus C’
c st
nu fragment d'
ivoire de la dimens ion da pet it doigt,jaunc fauve,nu peu coutheVera lo milieu,ct plus gros aone extrémité qu
'
al’
autro.”
19 r d :
146 m sr oav or r un mor n-name or can es .
What stirring times has not the dalada gone through during the
twenty-five centuries which have elapsed since it was first picked up
from the Kusmagara funeral pile of the great sage,while monarchswere fighting for itspossession,until its present comfortable lodging in
the richest shrine raised by man to a mistaken devotion and what
a part has it not played in the religious history of India,from the
epoch in which Buddhism became the dominant faith of the coun
try,subsequently persecuted and tyrannized over by a powerful enemy,ruined by the degeneracy of its own adherents,and enfeebled byschism and heresy,until at last all disasters culminated in its being
banished from its birthplace to find a refuge in distant foreign lands !
Then,its place usurped by the stern dominion ofEl Islam,spreadingits faith throughout the fair plains of Hindustan by themerciless edge
ofthe sword,to befollowedbya still sterner race,that nationofheroes,”
as the AbbeRayual called the Portuguese,coming from the far West
to supplant the nation of philosophers,”as Professor Max Milller
designates the Hindus and who by the discordant use of the torch,thesymbol of barbarism,on the one hand,which marked its passage bythe lurid flames of burning cities,and of the cross,the emblem of
peace,on the other,which by the persuasive voice of themissionarythey succeeded in planting all along the coast ofour peninsula,named,as if to add insult to injury,the very sacred tree ofBuddha Arbor
diaboli or Devil’
s-tree.* In bringing this incomplete Memoir to a
close,I cannot more fittingly conclude than in the words of the learned
Rodier,who says Les reglements orgueilleusement immuables,pour le corps et pour l
’
iime,que les théocrates de l’
Inde out en la
émérité d’
imposer ala société,ont fini par y détruire tons les elementsdu progrés. Le génic indou,autrefois si brillant,si fécond,si vivace,meurt étoulfé dans une camisole de force.
Le dur contact de notre civilisation lo réveillera pent-étre. Espe
rons que les descendants des Arias trouveront,hit on tard,une com
pcnsatiou aux douleurs et aux humiliations que leur inflige la prepon
derance des Européens ; qu’
ils nous emprunteront la foi en la puis
sancc et en la légitimité dcs efforts individuels,ct qu’
ils apprendront
dc nous ase mouvoir en dehors des limites conventionelles de leur vieille
organisation . Puissent les pines des nations modemes reprendre nu
jour une place honorable dans l’
édifice dont ils ont,avec taut de pa
tience,établi les fondements l”
1'
.
o Rheedo’s Hortus Malabar-teas,vol. ii.,pp. 46-7,fig . 27 .
1G. Rodiex’s Antiq'zilt dcs R
'
u‘
ts l l ammms,pp. 372-373.
148 MOSLEM co Uss'
r or PERSIA .
Cnar '
rnn I.— COMMENCEMENT or TH E WA R .
Abu Bekr,the immediate successor of the prophet,was the first
Khalifwho began to contemplate the extension of Islam beyond the
limits of Arabia proper . The little kingdom ofHirah,tributary to
Persia,although it contained an entirely Arabpopulation,he determinedto subjugate,apparently without entertaining any scheme of further or
larger conquests,merely because he had been informed that the empireof Persia,having after Shiruyeh
* fallen into the hands of women and
children,was nmch enfeebled also by internal disscnsions,and that nogreat resistance might be apprehended from that quarter . The Kings
ofPersia had conferred the government of H irah and of Kufahf on
Iyais,and all the Arab possessions of the Persians were under his
For the purpose of better fixing in the memory of the r eader the events
about to be nar rated,it W i ll be proper in this p lace to inser t a chronological
table of the sovereigns of Per sia fr om Mr . K . R. Cama’
s“ J amshedi Noam ,”
containing Dr . Mordtmann’s Chronology of the Sasanians,” and to add also the
corresponding l lcg ir a. years . This list of dates is well dete rmined,althoughsome w r iters ditfer in a few details,and Mr. E. Thomas entirely omits K esra L,Cbahinendah,and Ferakhu
'
id ; he also places Ar z emidukht after Kesra.
Khearu,and calls the last Yazdegird the 3rd,and not the 4th ; he does not,however,stand alone ia his opinion,as the confusion of reigns was very considerabledur ing that per iod also the Shahuémah omits Kesra IL,and even Hormnxdv .,and has after l’ur zindukht only A r z emidukht,who reigned 4 months,Far rukhzad 1month,and Yaz degird 20year s ; whereas the list of E. Thomas,F.R.S &c .,terminates as follows
Accession of No. 26 Purandakht (dr . of Khosru Parviz )“
A. D. 680 of
N08. 27,28,and 29,i f . Khusru,Az armidukht (dr . of Khosru),and Hormnzd,all 631—2; lastly No. 30. Yaz degird III.,son of Shahryar,whose reign
lasted from the 16 th J une 632 to 650 ; whereas according to Dr . Mordtmann’a
list,the latter por t ion of w lneh is here inserted from the J amshedi Naoroz,”the total number of reigns amounts to 38,counting that ofKobad for two,as hereigned tw ice.
Accession to the throne accord ing to
Mordtmann. Richter . g .
Kohad II. 25 Feb.
A r desh tr I l l Nov .
barbar aa (Shahryé r ) 629
K es ra I. 630
Purandukht,danehter K hosru l ’arvtz 630
Chahmeudah J an . Feb . 631
Ar zemldukht,also d r . of K hearu Parvu Mar . Apr . 681
Kesra 11. May,J une 631Ferakh z id . J uly,Aug . 681
llorntur tl V.l Sept. 631
Ynl degtrd IV: suno
of Fhahrv firm
16 J une
(K i lled 031 in the i nterval between
21“ March and 23rd August.)
'
1he two tuwas were calv three miles distant fromeach other.
nosu m coxeussr or rsasm. 149
authority. A man named Hosanna Ben lIa’
tresah Al Shaybani. unwill
ing to obey Iyxis,went from Kufah to Medinah,embraced Islam,and
presenting himself to the Khalif said, Give me the government
of the territory ot'
Kufah and Sawz'
al,that ] mmr be the master of
all the parts of the provinces vshich I shall conquer ; because the
Persian empire is weak.
”Abu Bekr granted him these countries,and
promised to aid him w ith tr00ps. Mosanna then returned but did
nothing except alternately sojourning at Kufah and in the Sawad.
When Abu Bekr saw that he could undertake nothing,he recalled
Khi led Ben‘Walid by a letter from c u
’
nna and said March to
Hirah and Kufah,unite thy forces with those of Hosanna,then pro
ceed in the direction of Madavn,* taking the advice of Mesouna,and march to Obella.
'
Ihc town ofUholla is ~itnated between llocrah
and Kufah ; it is called I'M
mj -ul-Ilmrl (the limit of India),because
there O’
mila is entered from India.
”Ahu Bekr n rote also a lt l lt‘l’ to
Hosanna and ordered him to obcv Kha’
dedd‘
In the month Muharram 12 (March—Apr il 633) Khaled BenWalid departed from Yemama at the head of men,consisting of
various tribes,and was soon joined bv Mosanna,“he brought
men,so that the whole army now consisted of H osanna had
already made predatory incursions before into the Persian dominions,and had several times penetrated into the district of Kaslsar,“here he
plundered v illages. “h en Khaled arrived near I'
l irah. Ivas the king
of it came out to meet him,and K lniled said,“ 0 Iyais,select one of
these three proposals—Accept our religion,or pay tribute,or be pre
pared for war ; because the men who are w ith me love war and death
as then lovest pleasure and life.
”h i s replied, We do neither
wish to resist thee nor to abandon our ancient religion but we
consent to pay trilmte.
”Subsequently the inhabitants ofH irah made
l coIlection of dirhems,which thev paid to Khaled.
Hermitz,the Persian governor of the lower or coast portion ofR'
rzik,being informed of the approach of the Musalnnins,sent word to that
(Cor nelii Tac iti Annalee VI. 42. In a footnote Selencens es et Sclcncii d Tigr im,Mesop otamian tu bs,nuno A l Madam —(Li mpr ier e
's C las s ica l Diva.
tionary : V1“.u. o ut A s s t rm. now L 'mod: til l,on the banksof the T igr is,at -
'
Ihe do.l l M'
:ul l y n des ig n.ited bo th the t“ilmi S. lo.m in and
Ctesiphon on t he b a:di s ol the Eunhrate.,but was alternards the capital of thelater Sasanians .
f Tabar i,“L,p. 321.
152 mosnsm CONQ UEST or rsnsu .
Khz'
ded to single combat,whereto the latter agreed,taking Karen for
his own antagonist,and assigning A’
di B. Hatim Tai and A’
aisem B.
Khattaib to Anushején and Kobzid. Both the latter were slain,butnothing is said ofKaren. The Persian army was put to flight,and oncounting the dead on the next day Persians were found to have
fallen ; and the Musahmins obtained considerable booty (Apr il—May
633,A J I. 12,in the month Cafar) .
A few days after this battle Khz'
ded heard that after the defeat at
Mazar the king of Persia had despatched men under the com
mand of Anderzaiz,who had encamped at Vialajah. On receipt of
this information Khéled reviewed his army,and picking out
men left the rest in the place where they were. On ar riving in the
presence of the enemy he detached a body of men,whom he
placed in ambush on the two sides of the enemy'
s camp,w ith orders
to rush upon him as soon as they perceived that the battle had com
menced. This was done and the Persians fled,but the slaughter of
them was more terrible still than at Mayfair .
From Walajah Khziled marched to O llays,* where a battle took
place ; but before describing it some account of the Arabs who fought
on the Persian side is to be given. In the army of Kdrep there were
many Christians who had come w ith him from Alt iZ . They were
Arabs of the Beni Belgr and of the Beni I’
jl . They had taken part
in the fight at Magir and many of them had been slain. Then all the
A rabs of the Beni Bclsr and the Beni I’
jl from Almiz,Hi rah,andfrom Mogul made common cause and addressed a letter to the king of
Persia in which they said,“ \Ve bind ourselves to aid thee ; send
anoth armv and we shall join it .
”In the army of Khtiled there
were,however,also many of the Beni Belsr and of the Beni I’
jl whohad become .
‘J usalmains.
The king ofPersia,having learnt that theArabs ofMoeul,of J ez irah,and ofAhvziz wished to aid him,was very glad. He had sent after
Anderz ziz another body of troops of men under the command
ofBahman J aduyeh,and the former,having engaged in battle before
the arrival of the latter,was beaten. When Bahmau saw the fugitives
he halted in his march and wrote a letter to the king of Persia to ask
for instr uctions. The king deliberated. When he received the letters
Li" “CM MMS to Tabar i,bl“ the place is evidently the same which Ibn
Khaldt’
mmeans.
nost su CUNQ UEST or rensm. 153
of the Arab Christians of the tribes Beni Bekr and I’
jl who proposed
to aid him and demanded an army,he wrote to Bahman to march
forward to join the Arabs of the Beni Bekr and the Beni I’
jl and to
attack Khaled. Bahman Jaduyeh gave the commandof the armytoan
ofi cer named Jthan,who was a Dehkzin or large proprietor in the
Sawad district. Heordered J{than to j oin the Beni Bekr and the Beni
I’
jl,and enjoined him not to begin the struggle before he had himself
returned. Jaban marched,and established his camp at Lis (Ollays),a village which was under his personal jurisdiction.
Khaled had been informed of these circumstances. When the
Christians of the Beni Bekr and the Beni I‘
jl became aware that a
Persian armyhad been put inmotion without a commander-in-chief,not
one of them left his country to join Jabain. At this news Khaled
considered that it would be proper to fall on the Persian troops before
the arrival of Bahman,and before their junction with the Arabs
therefore he immediately departed with men.
J abt'
m kept himself on his guard w ithin his camp,expecting thereturn of Bahman. One day his soldiers were just eating their
dinner when the vanguard of Khéled came in sight ; they said,“ The
Arabs will pitch their camp to-day and w ill attack us only to-morrow,”
and continued to eat. “fheu Khé led arrived,the soldiers of the
vanguard said that the Persianswere engaged in dining. Khaled asked
whether on seeing them arrive the enemies had got up to attack them.
The soldiers gave a negative reply. Khailed said,“Do not alight,but attack them at once,
”and swore that if God granted him victory,
he would slay as many of the enemies as would dye the river with
their blood,because thev had despised the Musalmans.
The Musalnn'
marmy,having been drawn up in battle array,beganthe attack. The Persians rose,saying to J zibzin, We shall not
lose thy repast,”
and,beginning to fight,fought a battle which was
the hottest that ever took place between Khz'
ded and the Persians.
After a verv obstinate str uggle the Persians took flight in the interval
between the morning and the afternoon prayers. Klniled had it
proclaimed that none of the prisoners should he killed,and the nextmorning he had them led to the bank of the r iver,near which their
beads were cut off,so that the blood flowed into it,and his oath wasfulfilled.
‘ It appears that Tabari in all his descriptions of battles
Tabari,vol. “L,p. 33"
20 r a s
154 nosu zn conquesr or u sers.
invariably attributes the victory to the Musalmdns,and never even
hints that it was dubious. Gaussia de Pereeval. however,who herefollowed both Tabari and Ibn Khaldtin,states that although Bahman,who had gone to Madayn in order to consult Ardeshir who was sick,could not be present at the battle. Jabdu had been so bravely seconded
by Abjar and A’bd-al-aswa
'
d,the Christian Bekrite chiefs,that thevictory was for a long time dubious. The butchery on the river
Euphrates,or rather a canal of it,lasted one day and one night ; the
water of it became red from the blood ofso many victims. and obtained
after that time the name Nahr-al-dam,”i .e. river of blood.
Not far fromOllays there was Amghishiyah,a city almost rivallingHirah in importance,and situated on the lower extremity of the
branch of the Euphrates called Furét Bédakla," “
the Euphrates of
Bridakla,” which begins in the vicinity of Hirah. Khdled appeared all
of a sudden before Amghishiyah,the inhabitants whereof fled without
having time to carry 03 their valuables. The Muselméns plundered
the houses and demolished them utterly. Already enriched by their
former successes,they collected on this occasion such a quantity of
booty that the share of each trooper amounted to silver dir
heme.
After Khaled had embarked his infantry and baggage in boats,hemarched with his cavalry to Hi rah,following the banks of the
Furdt Bridakla,which his flotilla was ascending . At the news of his
approach El-Azaduba,the Mam bau or satrap of Hirah,established
near the twomausoleums called Gharyt'
mi” a camp to protect the
town,and despatched his son with a body of troops to guard the head
of the Fur‘t Baidakla,which body closed,according to the instructionsof the satrap,the upper extremity of the Fru i t Badakla by a dam,in such amanner as to turn the mass of water into the other arm of
the river,and opened the sluices of all the canals of irrigation issuing
from the arm of the Bridakla. By this means the waters of this
latter arm were speedily withdrawn,so that the boats of the Masai
mtins stuck all of a sudden fast,high and dry. Khaled,however,undaunted by this stratagem,left his flotilla,and,hastening forwardwith his cavalry,met at the spot called “ Famni-al-a
’
tyk”
or“old
mouth,”the first post of troops,the others being stationed farther up
at the “ Femm-Furi t-Badakla,” or“ mouth of the Fur-at d akla.
”
This first post Khfled attacked suddenly,and cut it up,together with its
young chief,the son of the Marzcbtin ; then he pierced the dam,and
156 mosmm t owmasr or PERSIA.
which,in case thou hadst refused to grant us peace,I intended to
swallow,in order not to return to my countrymen .
”Khdled tool: this
poison away from him,spread it on his own hand and pronounced the
words In the name ofGod,by whose power nothing from heaven nor
from the earth can hurt,and swallowed it. He felt uneasy for a mo
ment and perspiration flowed from his forehead ; then he said,“ There
is neither power nor force except with God the MostHigh,the Greatthen turning towards A
’
bd-al-Masih he said to him, I took this
poison to let thee know that nothing can hurt anyone except by the
will of God. He also asked A’
bd-al-Masih, Dost thou recollect
how this land looked formerly? A’
bd-al-Masih replied,“ I recollect
that.the country between Ii rah,Damascus,and Syria,which is now a
desert,was cultivated and planted with fruit
After this conference the deputies returned to Hirah,and A’bd-al
Masih said to the people, This fellow is not a man but a devil. -he
has swallowed a handful of poison which would kill an elephant,but ithas not hurt him. N0 one can resist him consent toall his demands."
Khaled granted them peace on condition of paying an annual tribute of
(or,according to others,of dirhems,and a capitation
tax of four dirhems per head,which they had also before paid to the
K ing of Persia,and which was called Haraz at Kesra.
”Several histo
rians agree that the capitulation of Hirah was signed in the month
Rabi’anterior 12 (May
—June 1" Then the chiefl
brought rich presents to Khaled,who sent them to the Khalif Abu
Bekr ; the latter wrote back that he accepted them as an instalment of
the tribute,and their value having been estimated it was deducted as
such for the current year.
Following the precedent of Hirah,the Dehkans,i . e. large pro
prietorsand owners of villages in the surrounding country,treated withthe Musalméns,and bound themselves to pay for the estates to he
cultivated a tax of one million dirhems besides the Harazat Kesra”
or capitation-tax of four dirhems for every individual on their property.
When Khéled had thus subjugated Persian B’rak as he had been in
Tabar i,III. 333.
1“ This is one year after the accession of Yaz degird,the last king,to the
throne whereas from w hat follows 1t appears that no king had been yet elected by the magnates who afterwards found Yazdegir d and put him on thethrone.
nosmmcosqr asr or rsasm. 157
structed,he established Musalmirn tax-gatherers in various places,and
placed ofi cers,such as Mosanna Ben Haresah,Z irar B . Al-Azwar
the Asdite,Z irar B . Mukarrim the Mozanite,and Al-Ka’
ka’
in charge
of the newly acquired frontiers beyond the Euphrates along the river
Sib,with orders to defend its approaches and to pillage the country
east of that line. They were not slow in z ealously obeying his instruc
tions,by making raids as far as the banks of the Tigris,devastatingandplundering everything that came in their way.
During this time Bahman J aduveh had remained quiet with his
army at Nahr-shir near Sdbat,opposite to Madayn,where Al-Azadubahad joined him,whilst other Persian troops occupied Anbar,A
’
yn
Tamr,and Firag. All these tr00ps remained immoveable,withoutdaring toundertake anything,and without obtaining anydirections from
the capital. Since thedeath ofArdeshir 111. great confusion and un
cestainty prevailed at Madayn. The barbarous jealousy of Shiruyeh
the son of Khosru Parwiz,who exterminated his brothers and his
cousins the descendants of Nushirvan,as well as the fury of the
contending factions which had massacred the chief members of the
families collateral to that of Nushirvain issuing from Bchram Gur,appeared to have extinguished the male posterity of the ancient kings.
Themagnates of Persia,divided by ambition,were unable to agree on
the choice of a monarch . Khaled heard that the king was dead,thatawoman had beenplaced on the throne.and that Azaduba,the generalwho had abandoned Hirah,was now at Madayn arousing the Persians
to wage war . Consequently Khdled despatched two messengers,oneofwhom carried a letter for the sovereig n,and the other for the people.
The contents of both letters were these God takes away the power
from you,and causes the true religion to appear in your country.
Believe now in GOD and in His prophet,or consent to pay tribute,or
prepare for war,because I have men with me who love death better
than life.
”
This threatening message imposed on the rival pretenders silence for
amoment and the princesses of the blood of Kesra Nushirvain caused
the government of the state to be transferred to Farrukhzad son of
Bendowan,until an individual could be found whomboth themagnatesand the people might acknowledge as king. But Farrukhz zid,eitherfromwant of capacity or of authority,took no means suitable to arrest
the progress of the Musalmz’
ms. Within the space of two months
Khi led had succeeded in collecting through his agents all the contribu
158 mosnsn conqussr or psasra.
tions the people had engaged themselves to pay,and the greater portionof his army,concentrated aroundHirah,had recovered itself from its
fatigue. Impatient to extend Musalman dominion to the regions as
signed to the operations of Iyéz B . Ghanam,and having received no
news of this general,he believed that obstacles had impeded him,andintended to march to meet him in order to aid him in the fulfilment of
his task. He recalled Al-Ka’
ka’
from the banks of the river Sib,and,having left this officer in command of Hirah,departed and progressed
through the cultivated districts adjoining the Euphrates,and called
Al-Felahj (sing . Fallujah) as far as Kerbella,where he took a few days’
rest,in order to assure himself of the obedience of the surrounding
population. Then,preceded by Al-AkraBenHabis at the head of thevanguard,he continued his route towards the north-west,and arrived
before Anbdr,a town situated on the Euphrates,defended by a deepfosse and good fortifications,under the governor,i .s. Marzbtin Shirl dd,and defended by its Arab inhabitants,as well as Persian soldiers ; therewere also theChr istian Arabs of Ii rah,ofMogul and J ezirah,with thetribes Beni Bekr and I
’
jlwho had been put to flight by Khaled and hadtaken refuge in the fort of Anbar . When Khaled approached themhe beheld men covered with men from head to foot,of whose bodiesno part was bare except the eyes. Accordingly he made his archers
advance and said to them, This day the action is yours : you mustaim correctly,the sword can effect nothing against them.
”The archers
then poured a shower of arrows against the Persians,aiming only at
their eyes,and blinding one or two thousand of them. Shirsdd pro
posed a capitulation to Khaled,and he consented on condition that the
former should retire toMesopotamia with his tr00ps,carrying only theclothes they wore,and provisions for a march of three days. Shirzi d
departed and marched to Madayn,where he was blamed by Bahmanfor having capitulated,but he replied, By a single discharge of
arrows 2000 ofmymen have been blinded ; and when the Arabs who
served in my army saw this,they shouted that we ought to surrender
ourselves.
”
This battle is called Z zit-al-O’
ydu,or the day of eyes,which isbriefly narrated by Tabari,and who says nothing about Anbdr,to takewhich Khéled ordered all the camels of his army which were exhausted
by fatigue to be killed on the next day,and their bodies thrown intothe fosse,so that they served as a bridge for the Musalmdns to makean assault on the walls,in which they gained the advantage.
160 nosssn coxouss'r or esasm.
When K lnlled received this letter,he wrote to the governor of Hirah,Ka
’
ka’
B . Amru,and called him to himself,whilst he sent Iyi z B.
Ghanum to take his place at H irah . Then be despatched Ka’
ka’to
Hasid,which was themost considerable of the three just-mentionedfortresses,whilst he himselfmarched to Anbhr. Hasid was occupied
by Ruzbeh,who had been sent there by Z ermihr,whilst the latter
had established his camp on the frontier of the Sawad. On the ap
proach of Ka’
ka’,Ruzbeh informed Z ermihr and demanded reinforce
ments. Z ermihr thereupon entrusted Mahbudan with the command
of the principal army,and marched himselfwith a considerable body of
tr00ps to the assistance of Bazheh,and thus united the two generals
attacked Ka’
ka’B. A
’
mru both,however,per ished in the battle,andtheir troops were put to flight,but again assembled and halted at
Khanafis.
Mahbudan,apprised of the death ofa beh and of Z ermihr,left hiscamp and marched with his whole army to Musayya
'
k. As soon as
Khziled heard of this,he sent a letter to call Ka’
ka’,and thenmade
arrangements to surprise the army of Muaayya'
k. The garrison,thinking itself secure,had fallen asleep,and the gates of the fort werenot shut. Klniled,who arrived at daybreak,1
' immediately threw him
self into the town and massacred the enemies. When the sun had
r isen,there were so many corpses within and without the fortress that
blood flowed like a river .
Without losing time,Khaled now passed through the localities namedB aurain,Alrank,Al-Handt (crossed the Euphrates),and ran to
Z omayl,where the Taghlibite hordes of Rabia’
h B . Bojayr hadencamped these he crushed by a nocturnal surprise like the one
he had just accomplished at Muz ayya’
k . Thence he turned towards
Roasb,where a gathering of the Beni Namir and the Beni Taghlib had
taken place under Hiltl B. A’
kka,but which dispersed at the sight of
the Musalman banners. Khaled proceeded as far as Finis,and a bodyof Persians which had occupied that position evacuated it immediately.
This was a beautiful place on the banks of theEuphrates,where Kh‘ledrested his army a whole month,and kept the Ramagzin fast,a.n . 12.
Hilél B . A’
kka,who had escaped from the fort of Bogah to the territoryof the Romans,spoke to them as follows Khaled has conquered
E m“; andwill now turn towards Rum. Co-operatewithme to reassemble
the Persians and the Arabs. I shall attackhim,and destroy him in this
a Midnight—c. dc P.
nost sn conquest or pensu . 161
very place,onRoman soil. The Romans accepted these propositions,and the Emperor of Rum sent f’m Constantinople an army of
men. Hibil despatched messengers towards the Sawad and E’
rak to
induce the Arabs who had escaped from various battles to fight under
his banner . About joined him. A letter to the same import
was addressed to the Persian army,and its assistance sought.
Khi led was informed of thesemachinations,but kept himself quietand waited for the end of the month Ramazan. Then,the Romanarmy having arrived,the enemies,to the number of men,putthemselves in motion against Khaled. They halted on the banks of
the Euphrates and sent word to Khaled to cross the river himself,or they would cross it. Khz
’
ded replied, You come to attack me,agd you ought to cross it .
”Accordingly they passed over the river .
The next morning Khaled drew up his army in battle array and
waited. At the time of noon-
prayers the enemies had not yet formed
their lines. Klnile d shouted, How long shall we wait ?”
Then
he rushed at them,and they were routed at the first shock. The
Musalméns made great carnage,and those w ho were not killed per ished in the waves. In this battle dead,Romans,Persians,andArabs,were counted. Hihil B. A
’
kka escaped and was seen no more.
The booty was immense. This battle was fought on the 12th Z ul
ka’
dah 12 (22nd January Khaled remained yet ten
days more at Firiis,and began 011 the 25th Z ulka’
dah (l st Februarya.o. 63-1) his retreat to Hirah,where he arrived in due time with histroops,although whilst these were on the march he had paid an incog.
nito visit to Mecca,where he was present on the day of sacrifices in
the valley ofMina on the l0th Z ulhijjah ( l6th FebruaryTabari was so simple
-minded,and so ignorant of the vast extent
of the Persian empire,as to believe that the conquest of it would be
completed if the city ofMadayn,which was merely on the outskirts
of it,were taken.* Hitherto the Arabs had not penetrated further
than the Persian E’
rxik,the bulk of whose population consisted not
ofPersians,but of Arabs tributary to them. Khaled remained for
some time in Hirah with the intention of concentrating all his forces
and then marching on Madayn,but was disappointed,inasmuch as
be was in the beginning of 13 recalled by A‘m Bekr and des
Tabar i,“L,p. 847 . Not less than four years more elapsed,how ever,beforeI adayn was taken,A 11. 10 ( 1b1d .,p. and m four years more, 20,Nehawend was taken ( 1b1d.,p.
‘2l r a s
162 MOSLEM CONQ UEST or PERSIA.
patched to Syria against the Romans,leaving Mosanna B . 11t to
be the commander. in-chief of the Musalman troops inB’rak.
Now great confusion arose about the succession to the throne of
Persia. It is a well-ascertained fact that in the beginning of ms . 13
the first of the month Muharram ofwhich fell on the 7th March 634,Yazdegird,the last king of Persia,must have been on the throne
already 1 year 7 months and 21 days,and therefore the very brief
reigns of Shahrirziz or Shahriran,ofDakht Z emiin,ofShapur the son of
the former,and ofArzemidukht,which are so insignificant that theyhave been omitted by the majority of historians,must all have taken
place before that time. It will be seen from the chronological table
given in the beginning of this paper that,according to the best authorities,the reign of Purandukht preceded that ofArz emidukht,and can
not have been later than 9 ; we nevertheless find and
Caussin de Perceval who followed both him and lbnKhaldtin,assigningtoher a reign after 13 and after the recall of Khéled.
When Shahriraz died,Dakht Z ean,a daughter of Khosta Parviz,issaid to have occupied the throne of Persia for a moment,and wassucceeded by Shaptir the son of Shahriraz,who granted to his ministerFarrukhz zid B . Bendowan the hand of another daughter of Khosru
Parviz,namely,Arzemidukht. This princess,indignant at the idea of a
marriage which she considered ignominious,entered into a conspiracywith an officer named Syawuksh,who slew Farrukhzad,besieged the
king in his palace,took possession of his person,deprived him of life,and placed Arzemidukht on the throne.
These sudden and violent changes,together with the disorder theyentailed,hindered the Persians frommaking new efforts to wrest fromthe Musalmans their new conquests. All this,however,made theposition of Mosanna—who was with a feeble army compelled to holda vast extent of territory incessantly threatened by an enemy whose
resources were immense—not the less dangerous and precarious. Un
easy about the state of Abu Bekr,from whom he had for some timenot received any letters,and profiting by the respitewhich the Persiansallowed him,this general determined to go himself to Medinah inorder to solicit reinforcements,and to ask for permission to enrol underhis banners those fractions of the Bekrites and other Arab tribeswhich,although they were formerly guilty of apostacy and revolt,had
Ibid. III .,p. 369.
164 MOSLEM concuss'r or PERSIA.
encourage the people to war,but unsuccessfully,then Mecanna rose
and said, Musalmdns,hasten to the sacred war ! Fear not any very
great dangers on the side of Persia or E'
rék,as these countries are
more easy to conquer than any others. The greatest portion of E rikis already conquered,Hirah and the Sawad are in our hands ; the
Persians are in a precarious position and the Musalmans have the
advantage over them I have already a strong army there,but I desireto go with reinforcements in order to revive the courage of the Muse]
mine.
”
The first man who rose in consequence of this appeal was Abu O’
h
aydah B . Masu’
d. This man,who had not been a companion of the
prophet,stood up and said, Commander of the Faithful I consent
to depart with all those of my people who shall be w illing to follow
me.
”Another,Sa
’
d B . O’
baydah,a man of considerable importance,then spoke,but O
’mar,afflicted by the hesitation he perceived,said,Musulmans,you cannot [always]remain in the territory ofMekka andMedinah,and you cannot betake yourselves to other countries. Since
Hejaz exists,commerce with Syria,the E’
tak,Abyssinia,and Yemenhas been carr ied on at Mekka and Medinah,and m the just-mentionedcountriesfruits,corn,and other goods have been sought,sothat a livinghas been made. Now,however,the whole world is your enemy. If
you do notmean towage war against your enemies youmustmake peace
with them,else you cannot remain here any longer,you would be destitute and miserable.
”The people present considered this reasoning
just,and unanimously declared their readiness to depart in this manner one thousand men presented themselves. O
’
mar Speaking to Mo
sanna said,“ Thou hast in the B uilt men whom Khfled has
left thee here are yet one thousand more,who will suffice to reinforcethy army.
Then he designated Abu G’
haydah as commander-in-chief. But
the people said, Give us another general,some one of the com
panions of the prophet—one who has fought at Bedr .
”O’mar re
plied, You hesitated when I exhorted you to depart . For three
days not a man responded to my appeal ! Now preference is due
to him who offered himself first.”Accordingly he gave to Abu O
’bay
dah not only the command of the tr00ps who.
were to enter on
the campaign,but also of those who were already in the E’
rzik. He
ordered Mossana to start in advance to carry this news to the troops,and to surrender to Abu O
’
bavdah the command of his own soldiers
nost sn conquns'r or psasu . 165
immediately on his arrival,and to march under the orders of the new
general. Mocanna then departed and arrived in H irah .*
Cnam a III.—Tns MU SALMA
'NS AGAIN LO SE T HE E
’
as'
x .
It has been mentioned above that Syawukhsh bad,after killingShdptir the son of Shahriréz,and his minister Farrukhzad,placedArzemidukht,the daughter of Khosru Parviz,on the throne of
Persia. Puran,another daughter of Khosru Parviz,who enjoyed muchrespect,and had often been selected as an umpire among the various
factions which divided the Persians,hastened to inform Rustum the
governor of Khorasan of the murder of his father,Farmkhzad. O11
receiving this news,Rustum,impelled by a desire for vengeance,immediately left K horziszin and hastened to Madayn,where he put toflight the troops opposed to him by Arzemidukht and Syawukhsh,putout the eyes of the former,killed the latter,and placed Puraindukht
on the throne. This princess accordingly became the queen,whilstRustum was to be the generalissimo of all the military forces of Persia,and co-regent with her for ten years,on the condition that if at the
expiration of this term some male descendant of Khesra Parviz should
he discovered,the supreme power would devolve on him as king,butthat in the contrary case it would continue to abide in the female line
of the royal dynasty.
As soon as Rustum had been invested w ith authority,he despatchedemissaries to various quarters of Arabian E
’
rzik in order to rouse the
population against the Musahnans,whilst he sent a body of troops
commanded by J iilinus1' from Madayn towards Hirah in order to
expel the Musalmans. This was the position of affairs when the
general Mosanna returned,after an absence of more than a month,from Medinah to H irah . On his arrival Hosanna learnt that alreadyseveral of the Dehkan class,or large landholders,were beginning to
revolt ; and that the Persian officers Narsi and J tlbtil l had collected
imposing forces,the former being stationed in the district of Kaskar,and the latter in that of Furzit-B zidakla. This news made Hosanna
apprehensive of a simultaneous attack in front and rear,and therefore he first of all concentrated all his detachments scattered along
Tabari,III. 309.
f This ma have been a Roman,as the name is merely a transliteration ofGalenus,or llie11us.
166 mosssn coxoussr or PERSIA.
the river Sib and in other localities at Hirah,which he then evacuated
with all his troops,and retired towards the southern extremity ofWaitto Khafl
‘
in,on the fringe of the desert,where he waited for his chief,Abu O
’
baydah,who soon made his appearance at the head of the
reinforcements he brought. The Musalmtins thus strengthened at
tacked J{than and defeated him at Namiirik ; he was made prisoner
by a man named Aktal,who meant to kill him,but allowed himto escape on receiving some precious stones. J dbén,however,beingunable to run,wandered about,and being brought into the presence
of Abu O’
baydah,the general said, He cannot be killed,as a
Musalman had given him quarter . He was consequently set at
liberty.
* This is no doubt the same Jaban whom the author of the
Raugat-al-cafa converts all of a sudden to Islamby stating that when
he was unhorsed he immediately shouted the words,“ There is no
God but Allah,”&c.,whereby he saved his life,and paid in addition a
considerable ransom.
When Abu O’
baydah was encamped at Namarik and was justabout to distribute the plunder,he heard that Narsi had collected
a numerous army and that Rustum was sending troops to aid him.
He immediately left his camp to attack Narsi before the arrival of
the just-mentioned reinforcements. Narsi,on the other hand,beinginformed of themarch ofAbu O
’
baydah,came out from the fortress,and a battle took place in which he was defeated and the fortress of
Al-Sakitiyyah taken. The booty taken there was a large quantity
of provisions,and among them a number of things totally unknown
toMusalmains and never before seen by them.
The inhabitants of Kaskar feared that Abu O’
baydah might devas
tate the whole district,and therefore the Dchktins,owners,and other
inhabitants came from every v illage to Abu O’
baydah to treat with
him. He granted them peace and imposed tribute on them. Whenthe Dehkans arrived to pay tribute they brought at the same time a
large quantity of cakes of all kinds such as the Arabs had never seen,as well as great birds of Kaskar . The Arabs thought they were
ostriches. whose flesh they never eat. As to the cakes,they all asked
what these things were and how they were called. When Abu
O’
baydah asked about the birds he was told that they were domestic
fowls. Then he exclaimed, Glory be to God who has created such
a bird for his servants !”
Then he asked the Dehkzins,“Why have
Tabar i,111. 371.
l68 mosssn cosoussr or rsnsm.
man had ranged his elephants in a line with orders to allow them to
fight this day freely : their trunks were protected and their bodies cover
ed. When all was ready thekeepers impelled the elephants with yells.
and the Musalmains,who had never before seen them,were confusedtheir horses,terrifiedat thesight oftheseanimals and by thenoiseoftheirbells,retreated. Some trooperswere successful in stopping their horses
after alighting and in leading them back,but none were able to keepthem quiet. The elephants rushed into the midst of the Musalmiin
army and broke its lines. Then the Arabs abandoned their horses and
threw themselves on the elephants,whose trunks theyattackedwith theirsabres but were unable to inflict anywounds on them. Nevertheless the
elephants,frightened by the glare of the swords as well as the blows,concentrated themselves on a single point,and theMusalmains,abandoning them,likewise massed themselves on one spot,opposite to the Persian army,and engaged in the fight. The Persians sustained the shock
for a while,but soonbegan to flee,andmany of themwere cut to pieces,so that by the t ime of evening prayers 0000 of them had been killed
and a certain number made prisoners.
Bahman J aduyeh,who resisted the assaults of theMusalméns,neverleft his post,and encouraged his soldiers to fight. A portion ofhis
troops had remained with him,and he endeavoured to recall those who
had fled. Then Abu O'
baydah shouted, After all,the elephants decide the affair . As
'
long as these are not repelled the enemies will not
yield. The soldiers answered, What is tobe done ? Our arms take
noeffect on the elephants,who are covered with iron from head to foot.”
AbuO’
baydah called for a Persian prisoner,whomhe asked how an ele
phant is to be dealt with,and he replied, If his trunk is out he can no
more draw breath,and dies.
”Hereupon Abu O
’baydah himself alight
ed,took his shield and sword,went to the white elephant and struck histrunk,which,however,the animal stretched out,and seiz ing therewith
AbuO’
baydah crushedhim under foot. Thekeepers jingled their little
bells as a signal ofjoy and victory,shouting, We have slain thekirig
of the Arabs.
”Hereupon those of thePersians who had fled returned.
The Musalmains surrounded the corpse of Abu O’
baydah,and the Persianshad the advantage. Then an Arab named Jabr B. Nofayr tookup
the standard and the Musalmtins recommenced the fight,but the Persians soon killed him also ; hereupon another general snatched up the
banner,who likewise fell,and the same was the case with the seven
chiefs Abu G'
haydah had designated. At last Mosanna B. Ha’resah
took the standard ofcommand,and the Musalmains ranged themselves
170 mean s or Paasu .
port Rustum in Madayn instead of pursuing the Arabs,as was justmentioned above,because Firuz iin wished to oust him from power,which he appears after all to have taken away from him,as weafterwards find Firuzan sent by Purdndukht and fighting against
the Arabs 3“according to others,however,these two rivals came to a
compromise among themselves,and henceforth acted as colleagues in
concert with each other,so that the dissensions which agitated Ma
dayn were for a short time calmed.
Mecanna,although for themoment nomore threatenedby thePersianarmy,which had departed to Madayn with Bahman,did not considerit prudent to remain in a position as advanced as Marwaha,but wentand established his camp on the brink of the desert betweenKadesyahand Khafl
'
an,where he was gradually reinforced by hordes of nomadicArabswhomarched andjoined himbyorder of the Khalif. Rustumand
Firuzan,the two rivals who had now become colleagues,being informed of the concentration of troops taking place around Mosanna,despatched Mihrzin the llamdani at the head of men to disperse it.
Mihrain advanced along the banks of the Euphrates and detached someoflicers toHirah,whowere receivedwithout resistanceby theinhabitants ;but a Musalman,who had remained in the town,secretly conveyed in
formation to Mossana about the march of the foe. Accordingly Mo
sanna immediately put himselfinmotion to encounterMihrdn,and entering the district of Furi t Baidakla he formed his camp on the right bank
of the Euphrates,and Mihran soon made his appearance on the lefi .
The two armies remainedfor some days opposite to each other,andwhilstthe people anxiously waited for the issue of the struggle about tobreakout,two hordes of Arab Christians belonging to the Mesopotamian
tribes Taghleb and Namar,which had come to these localities for thepurpose of selling horses,ofl
'
ered their services to Mosanns,preferringtomake common cause with the nation from which they had sprungthan with the Persians. Mosanna accepted the useful auxiliaries ; and
Mihri n having crossed the Euphrates without opposition on the part
of the Musalméns,a combat took place in the month Bamgin a. n .
13 (Nov . in which Mihran was slain,a moiety ofhisarmy annihilated,and the rest put to flight. Themost acute loss with which the
Musalmzins obtained this dearly-bought victory was that ofMasu'
d B.
Hi resah,the brother oftheir commander-in-chief.
0 Tabari,p. 881.
172 mosses conqu er or mean .
princes their wives had been shut up in a palace,where Shiruyeh hadcaused their male infants to be slain. But the ingenious tenderness of
a mother might have robbed the executioner of a victim. Indeed,oneof these women confessed that she had succeeded in saving the life ofa
son of Shehryar Ben Khosru Parviz,whomshe let down froma window
in a basket tied to a rope,and entrusted to a relative,to be brought upsecretly. This young scion of the royal house,named Yazdegird,atthat timeabout twenty years old,was found,and,after being recognized,was acknowledged sovereign by acclamation,whereupon all the fac
tions that had hitherto separated the Persians forget their divisions,andunited in one common feeling of devotion to the person of the new
monarch,and in zeal for the public interest.
Yazdegird,being intelligentlyadvised,and profiting by the enthusiasmof the people,immediately took measures to drive out the Musalmins
from Arabian E’
rak . Numerous troops were raised,and generals
appointed to march with them simultaneously to Anbiir,Hirah,andObolla. These threatening preparations,with the
‘
activity and vigour
they presaged with reference to the forthcoming military operations,produced a deep impression upon the rural as well as upon the town
population which had submitted to the MusalmAns,their minds wereexcited,and symptoms of insurrection began to appear on all sides.
Mosanna,awareofhis inability to resist the impending storm,prudentlyyielded to the signs of the times,and retired in the month Z ulka
’
dah
a .n . 13 (end ofDecember 634) towards the desert,allowing the Persians to occupy without any resistance all the points of the E
’
rdkwhere the Mnsalmans had been masters.
Whilst Mosanna was taking this defensive position,and Western
E’r‘k again obeyed Persia,he wrote to O
’
mar, The situation of the
Persians is strengthened,they are killing Mnsalmans. A new king has
ascended the throne,and a general is marching against The
Khalif O’
mar was determined at any cost to reconquer E’
rfik,anddespatched messengers demanding new soldiers from every Arab tribe.
According to the position of their territories,some of these tribes wereenjoined to send their levies direct to E
’
rails,whilst others had to takethe route to theEejaz in order to concentrate themselves at Z erfir near
Medinah,where some of the contingents actually arrived about the
month Z ulhejjah a . a . 13 (J am—Feb. and where also O’mar
Tabari,III. 885.
nosnsn couenssr or prasrs . 173
himself,leaving A’li as his representative at Medinah,made his appear
ance in the company of the principal men among theMohajer and the
Ancfir,on New Year’
s Day A .rr . 14 (26Feb. In a council there,O
’mar intimated his desire of himself leading the army to E rik,butwas dissuaded by his chief councillors ; and at last Sa
’
dBenAbu Vokac,one of the warriors who had most bravely fought at the battle ofOhod
to defend the life ofMuhammad,was appointed commander-in-chief of
the expedition.
O’mar had also informed the Arabs who wished to shake off the
Musalmanyoke after the death ofMuhammad,and had revolted against
Abu Bekr,but afterwards again made profession of Islam,thathe would accept their services. This declaration attracted multitudes
ofArabs who were ready to take part in the war against the infidels,and thus to show the sincerity of their return to the religion of the
prophet. When Sa’
d arrived in the country of the Beni Tamym he
added to his troops men of this tribe and of the Reba’
b,whowere expecting him on the frontier of their territory. Then he went to
Z onid,where he encamped and halted,thinking that Mecanna would
come there ; the latter,however,never arrived,but died at Z ulg ir in
consequence of the wound he had received in his side at the Battle of
the Bridge ; but his wife,being very beautiful,was married by Sa’
d.
As soon as Yazdegird had become aware of thefirst movements of
Sa’d,he ordered a considerable army to be levied,which was destined to
march against him under the command ofRustum,who enjoyed at that
time among the Persians the highestmilitary reputation. soldiers
were assembled at sabat for this expedition,but Rustum,who did notapprove of it,was dilatory,because according to his opinion it would
have been best to divide this army into several corps,to be sent one
afier the other against the MusalmAns,who would,even in case of
defeating each of these separate corps,become fatigued and diminishedin numbers by successive attacks,when he would afterwards himself
come forth with a numerous reserve force to inflict more sure blows
upon the enfeebled enemy ; whereas in case he were all at once to
engage against the Musalmdns all the disposable forces of Persia and
were tobe defeated,there was reason to fear that the Persians would
never recover their courageafter such a catastrophe,and that the fate ofthe empire would be seriously compromised. As all these reasons did
not appear convincing toYazdegird,Rustumwent to Sebait to take command ofthe army,but still delayed his departureunder variouspretexts.
174 I OBLEII concern or u sers.
Yazdegird had also induced Kfibus B . K‘bds B . Munz ir IV.,oneof the last scions of the royal race of Hirah,who was there livingin obscurity,to debauch the Beni Shaybdn and other Bakrites cu rati
tuting the Musalman detachments stationed at Kotkotana and Z uki r,on the promise to reinstall him as king of IIirah in case of succeu .
Accordingly,1mmtook up his quarters at Kidesyah,on the limitsof the desert,whence he wrote to the Bakrites seeking to awaken the
ancient bonds of attachment which united them to his family,andendeavouring to attract them ; but thesestratagems took no efi
'
ecQ—onthe contrary,Mua
’nnah B . Him ah,brother of the general who had
recently died,left the camp of Z ukfir,marched towardsKlbds,surprised him iaKAdesyah,and killed him,with all those who had accom
Caam a VL—Paocaass or r un Mum ma'as.
At Shirdf all the troops who had obeyedMoaanna gradually con
centrated themselves around the new commander-ia-chief. except
Mua’nnah,who,having been delayed in the just-mentioned expedition
againstKribiis,was the last to arrive. He brought to Sa’
dB. Void ; the
letter dictated by his brother Mosanna at the moment when his end
drew near. This general offered to his successor the advice which an
experience of several years of fighting against the Persians had en
abledhim togive—He entreated Sa’d to harass the enemy by invasions,
but never to endanger the bulk of his army bymarching into the heart
of E’rAkas long as union prevailed in the government of Yazdegird,
and not to accept a battle except on the confines of the desert,wherethe Musalminsmight find a retreat in case of a check be terminated
his letter by recommending Selma his wife to the benevolent proteo
tion of Sa’
d,who,as has been seen above,immediately married her,and,acknowledging the wisdom of Mosanna’s advice,eulogised him
publicly.
The number of warriors who had been commanded byMosanmamounted to about men : namely, of the posterity of
Babya’
h,among whom were Bakrites Bajilahs. and
oftheKoaéaand Tay. Other new levies were still arriving,among whomwere Kindians led byAl
-Asha’
s Ben Kays,heir of the princes
of Kindah,who had remained inactive since Abu Bekr had pardoned
his revolt. These troops together with those brought by Sa’
d formeda total ofabout men.
p
nosnrn consumer or rassu . 17 4
The dissensiop s which have for some years troubled Persia have
greatly emboldened you,”said Yazdegird, but we are now in aposition
to make you feel our power as you experienced it formerly,when the
garrisons of our frontiers sufliced to stop you or to chastise you. Mice
and serpents are your food,and you have nothing to dress with except
the wool of camels and sheep. Who are you to tackle yourselves on
to our empire ? Of all the nations of the world you are the poorest,themost disunited,the most ignorant,the most estranged from the arts
which constitute the sources of wealth and power . If a foolish pre
sumption has taken hold of you,open your eyes,and cease to indulge
in deceitful illusions. If misery and want have driven you out from
your deserts,we shall grant you food and raiment,we shall deal liber
ally with your chiefs,and we shall give you a king who will govern you
withgentleness and wisdom.
”
The deputies kept silence for a while,but one of them soon broke it
My companions, said he, aremen ofdistinction among Arabs. If,in consequence of a demeanour which their sense of delicacy impels
them to use towards an august personage,they hesitate to reply and
frankly to express their thoughts,I shall do it for them and speakwith
the liberty of a Bedawi . What thou hast said about our poverty,ourdivisions,and our state of barbarism was nevertheless true. Yes,wewere so wretched that persons could be seen among us appeasing their
hunger by feeding on insects and serpents,whilst some killed their
daughters to avoid sharing their food with them. Plunged in the dark
nessofsuperstition and idolatry,without laws or restraint,always foes toeach other,we were occupied only in robbing and killing each other .
This 19 what we have been. At present we are a new people. God has
raised in our midst a man,the most distinguished of Arabs by the
nobility of his birth,by his virtues,by his genius andGod has selected
him to be his apostle and his prophet. Through the organ of this
man God has said to us,‘I am the only God,eternal,the creator of
the universe. My goodness sends you a guide to direct you . The way
which he shows you will deliver you from the pain I reserve in the life
to come for the impious and the criminal,and will lead you near me,to the sojourn of felicity.
’
Persuasion gradually insinuated itself into
our hearts ; we have believed in the mission of the prophet ; we hai e
recogniz ed that his words are the words ofGod,and his commands the
commands ofGod,and that the religion he announced to us,which he
called Ishim,is the only true religion. He has enlightened our minds,
23 r a a
178 MOSLEM CONQ UEST or PERSIA.
he has extinguished our hatreds,he has united us to a society of
brothers under laws dictated by divine wisdom. Then he said to us,Complete my work,spread everywhere the dominion of Islam. The
earth belongs to God,he gives it to you. The nations which shall
embrace vour faith will be assimilated to yourselves ; they shall enjoythe same advantages and will be subject to the same laws . On those
who will be desirous to retain their beliefs you are to impose the emgatien of declaring themselves subject to you and of paying you tri
bute,in consideration whereof you are to cover them with your protec
tion. But those who shall refuse to accept Ishim on the conditions of
tributaries,you are to fight them until you have exterminated them.
Some of you will per ish in this struggle ; those who fall therein will
obtain paradise,and those who survive,victory.
’These are the des
tinies of power and glory towards which we confidently march. At
present then knowest us it is for thee to choose either Islamor tribute,or else war unto death .
”
If I entertained no regard for your quality as deputies, replimiYazdegird, I would instantly deprive you of life. Uttering these
words,he ordered a bag full of earth to be brought,and ironically
alluding to the tribute the envoys had ventured to demand he said
to them,“ This is all you will get from me. Return to your
general . Inform h im that Rustum will in a few days go to bury
him with his whole army in the trench of K ridesyah.
”Then he
added, Let this bag be placed on the shoulders of the chief of
the deputation,and let these men he pushed out from the gates of
Madayn.
”Asim Ben A
’
mru hastened forward to receive this lead,and,far from feeling humbled thereby,be lifted it on his head with
an air of satisfaction,which appeared to Yazdegird to be a mark of
stupidity.
The Arabs had scarcely departed,when Rustum,having been iaformed of the details of the conference and of the manner in which
it terminated,immediately understood the presage which had excited
the joy of Asim. He sent persons to run after the deputies in order
to take away from them the earth which they were carrying
away as a pledge that heaven had granted them success in their
war against the Persians ; they had however progressed so far that
all pursuit was vain,and when they reached Kodays,Asim,depositing the bag before his general,exclaimed, The soil of Persia is
O ll l'
S
180 MOSLEM conqussr or Pnasm.
refusal,Rustum got a portion of the A’tyk filled with rubbish and
fascines,so as to form a road,over which his whole army marched on
the day agreed upon for the battle. He took his position on a golden
seat covered by a canopy,whilst the generals serving under his orders,such as Firuzan,Mihran,Bahman,Z ulhéjeb,Hormuzan,and Jalenus,placed the tr00ps in battle array,and distributed thirty-three elephantsbearing towers filled with soldiers,and resembling moveable castles,among the various corps,on the flanks and the centre of the army.
’
On the other hand the Musalmans also took their measures,in which
however Sa’d,who suffered from the sciatic gout,and wasmoreover at
that time afflicted with amalady which covered his body with ulcers,not being able to take part,remained shut up
'
in the fort of Kodays
on being however informed that with reference to this strange rumours
were afloat,he came out,showed his wounds and was excused ; he
appointed Khaled B . A’
rfata to command in his stead,and exhorted
the army in a lively allocation,addressed to those who were near
enough to hear him,to deserve by their bravery the fulfilment of
the promises of heaven ; whilst at the same time the officers most
distinguished for their ability to Speak,as well as poets such as
Shemmakh,Hotayah O’
bdah B. Tabib and others,kept passingthrough the lines and inflamed the ardour of the soldiers by their
speeches or by their verses. Then Sa’
d ordered also the Surah of the
Koran bearing the title The spoils to be recited,as was the custom
of the Musalmans before fighting; which excited their seal and con
fidence to the highest pitch .
The battle of Kadesyah lasted several days before the victory was
decided and the fighting ceased,and the Arabs assigned to each day a
separate name. The action commenced with single combats,but asthe names given of the duellists by various authors do not agree,itwill be best to omit themaltogether . It is however certain that,as inseveral of the battles already described,also on this occasion,the hostilearmies rushed at each other en masse when the number of duellists
had grown very large,and the excitement became general. Accordingto the Rauzat-al-eafa the Persian champions made many prisoners bythrowing the kamand
‘
l'
over the heads of their antagonists,and so
According to Tabar i,III. 388,about men appear to have foughtin this battle on the Persian,and on the Musalman side.
1' The kamand was a long rope w ith a noose—the lasso still in use in SouthAmerica to catch wild horses in the prairies.
nosw n conqussr or psasu . 181’
exasperated the Arabs that theymade a general rush at them,but werereceived with a deluge of arrows,whereupon they attacked thePersianswith still greater impetuosity,throwing away their lances,and using onlytheir sabres. Nothing is said about the elephants,whereas according toTabari“ they also played a conspicuous part by frightening the horses
of the Musalman cavalry,but were turned away by one thousand men
who alighted and attacked themon foot. The contest lasted till night ;
the carnage was great on both sides,but the contending parties appear
to have been so equally balanced that neither of them gained an advan
tage over the other. This was called the day of Armét.”
When the next morn dawned,theMusalmans,.who had buried theirdead,entrusted their wounded to the care of the women in their rear at
Ogayb,and prepared to renew the struggle ; the Persians also put
themselves in motion and took position in a locality called Agbwé s.
The hostile armies were drawn up in battle array and the fight com
menced : Persian and Arab warriors issued from the ranks,and thecombat again lasted till night set in. Great numbers of Musalmans
were slain. Sa’
d B . Abu Vokac,sitting with his wife on the terrace
of the castle,contemplated the fight. His wife,beholding the great
number ofMusalman corpses,exclaimed, Alas ! where art then,0Moranns,son of HArecah l
” Whereupon Sa’
d gave her a slap on the
facesf His wife,who was intelligent,continued, Why this jealousy ?ought you not rather to regret the deaths of so many Musalmans ?
Sa’
d said to himself, This woman is aware that the position
of the Musalmans is bad,therefore she speaks thus. To-morrow I
shall mount my horse,and I shall do what I can.
” Many more
MusalmAns were yet slain on that day,I but according to others the
Persians lost their best oflicers as well as men. This was
miled the day ofAghwas. On this day Rustum was deprived of the
aid of his elephants,whose wooden towers had been overturned and
broken on the eve. The Musalmans had moreover contrived to drive
against the Persian cavalry a number of camels covered with long
pieces of loose cloth,and the strange aspect of the animals thus decked
out frightened the Persian horses yet more than the sight of the
elephants had terrified the Arab coursers.
Tabar i,III . 390.
{ This little incident is also mentioned in the“ Banz at-al-cafa
”in nearly
the same words.
I Tabari,III. 390.
182 nosw n conquasr or PERSIA.
The third day of this great battle proved to be still more sanguinarythan the two preceding ones. Here however again a difficulty occurs :
Gaussia dc Perceval states,no doubt on good grounds,that on the
second day of the battle reinforcements from Syria,where Khaled B .
Volid had been very successful,andwhich were therefore detached fromhis army,had arrived whereas according toTabari thesewere not actual
reinforcements,or had at any rate not arrived on this occasion ; for
he says Ka’
ka’
had taken the command of the army,and,knowingthat Rustum would obtain reinforcements,he detached five thousand
Musalmans,sent them away on the route to Syria and said, March
to thedistance of oneparasang and remain there till to-morrow. WhentheMusalman army engages in the battle,you are to make your ap
pearance on the horiz on,to induce the infidels to believe that the
Musalmans have received help.
”Ka
’
ka’took this measure because he
feared theMusalmansmight the nextmorning,on beholding the arrivalofnew Persian troops,become frightened,and take to their heels.
Thenext morning [the third day]when the battle commenced,Ka’
ka
passed in front'
of the Musalmans and said,“ Be not dismayed,helpwill come toyou this day.
”That moment the detachment appeared in
sight. Ka’
ka’
ran to meet these troops and assigned to them a post
distant from the soldiers,so as not to be recogniz ed. The Musalmans
raised their shouts ofwar for j oy. The men sent by Yazdegird
had arrived,and without this stratagem ofKa’
ka’theMusalman army
would have been annihilated.* The elephants,whose towers had been
repaired,at first caused disorder among a portion of the Musalman
tr00ps. At last one of them was slain,and a second,whose eye hadbeen put out and the extremity of his trunk cut off,issuing from the
thickest ofthe fight began to run about from right to left on the battle
field,whilst the other elephants,wounded by the arrows of the Arabs,.
and impelled bya similar rage,followed suit ; and this formidable hand,after rushing about for some time at random between thetwo armies,atlast turned to the Persians,broke through their lines,jumped into theA
’tyk,crossed it,and fled in the direction of Madayn. The battle,
interrupted for a while by this strange spectacle,recommenced withsuch obstinacy that even night itself could not mitigate it. Thebattle
of the past day had obtained the name of the day ofAmas”f
Tabar i,III. 391.
1Read Imas” by Z otenberg. Tabar i,III. 390,but I do not take it upon
myself to decide which pronunciation is themore correct.
184 nosum CONQ UEST or PERSIA.
nun perceived aman endeavouring to flee,and smelt the odour of
musk and perfumes ; lastly,he took notice also'
of the golden seat
with the Kaianian standard,and recognized the seat of Rustum. As
he beheld no one near the seat,he was sure that the man who had
just thrown himself into the water must be Rustum himself. The
latter not being able to move,because he had,when leaping,brokenhis leg,Hilal ran,seized it,cut Rustum
’
s head off and tied it to the
top of his lance. Then he mounted on the seat shouting,“Musal
mans,I have killed Rustum l”The Musalmans replied by a about of
triumph . When the Persians saw the head of their commander,theygave way ; both the r ight and the left wing began also to flee.
*
The celebratedbattle ofKadesyah was fought in themonth Muhar ram
A . H . 15 (Feb.-March 036) according to Gaussia de Perceval,and
Rasmussensf Ibn Khaldun places it in Muharram A .H . 14,but statesthat there are also authors who place it A.H . 16 ; Tabar i also places
it A.H .
CHAPT ER IX.—Tnn MU SALMA
’NS ans
'
r THEMSELVES AND
ST R ENGT H EN T HEIR PO SIT ION .
No pitched battle appears to have taken place between that of
Kadesyah in the first month of 15 and the occupation ofMadl yn.which happened during the latter part of the same year .§ The armyindeed is represented to have asked orders from O
’
mar to advance fur
ther,as the whole conquest had hitherto not been extended to anydistrict of Persia,but was still limited to the B
’
rak,containing an Arab
population but tributary to the Persian empire. It was the desire of
O mar that the army should for a while remain in its present advanced
position near Kadesyah,but as the soldiers were falling sick he wrote
to Sa’
d as follows The Arabs must have a country in which there
are camels,sheep,and pastures ; this is the air suitable for them.
Ascertain from the inhabitants of the Sowzid where meadows and
sheep are found,and establish thy camp there. Sa’
d examined the
whole country,and found the climate of Kufah most convenient,
Tabar i,III. 397.1Annales Islamici,p . I but the month is not given there.
I Tabar i,III . 400.
If we adhere to the data of Tabar i,according to whom the battle of
KAdcsyah took place A. n. 14,and Madaya was taken A . n. 16,the uttem oat
interval allowable w ill be about 35 months,dur ing which the Musalmflnsr eceived new accessions to their army,rested from fatigue,and strengthened
their hold of E’rtk.
nosnsn conqussr or r sasrs. 185
because the air is there as healthy as in the desert,and the country isbut partially cultivated. Accordingly Sa
’
d established his camp there,and began founding the town.
The whole province of the Sowxid,as far as Madayn,which hadformerly been conquered by Khéled B . Walid and had been lost,wasnow again under Musalmzin power . During the time of Khaled a
portion of the inhabitants had been converted to Islam,and another,persevering in its own religion,had received from him charters of
security and had paid tribute. When Sa’
d had again taken possession
of the Sowad the population wished to renew these treaties. Then Sa’
d
addressed the following letter to O’mar Those inhabitants of the
Sowad who are Musalmains are entirely devoted tome,but those whohad conserved their ancient religion and had treated with Khaled again
fell away on the arrival of Rustum,and havemade common cause with
him. Now they allege that,having been forced by Rustum to submit,they were not in a condition to offer resistance,and they desire to renew
the treaties we had formerly granted them. Moreover,the Persianswere in the habit of levying a tribute in the Sowzid in favour of certain
courtiers of the king who received it. Some of these men are to this
day in the country,whilst others are elsewhere,and some have gone
to Madayn . What is to be done in these circumstancesT”O
’
mar
replied to Sa’
d, As to those who have remained faithful,and whohave come to submit,observe towards them the conditions granted,and keep the engagements. But as for those who have not made
their appearance to ask for peace,and who have committed acts
of hostility,thou wilt know how to deal with them.
”This order
of O’
mar was expedited after deliberation with the companions of
the prophet,who had judged thus ; and Sa’
d obeyed their instruo
tions.
After the battle of Kaitlesyah and the destruction of the Persian
army,O’
mar,fearing that the king of Persia might ask aid from the
king of O’
man and from the king of Hindustan,and that they wouldgrant it,considered it proper to send a body of troops to the mouth
of the Tigris. and to build there a town inhabited by Arabs,in order
to hinder the Persians from introducing auxiliaries. Therefore he
called for O'
tbah B . Ghazwaiu,who had been a companion of the
prophet,and spoke to him thus God has caused Islam to
triumph by my hand,and has broken the Persians. Now I want
to have the route between IIindostziu and (Tw in guarded,that the24 r d :
186 mosu m concuss'r or Pusan .
Persians may receive no aid from that side. Thou must go there
with thy body of troops,and build a town where you will be
comfortable,thou and the Musalman soldiers.
”This place,which was
at first only considered a strategic point,soon attracted multitudes of
Arabs from all quarters,and became in a few years a flourishing city,called Boqrah.1
‘
Hirah,formerly the capital of the Lakhmite kings,and afterwards
the residence of Persian satraps,had hitherto lost nothing of its
prosperity,but gradually decayed when Kufah,which soon became an
important town,was built at a distance of three miles to the south
east of it. After Sa’
d had ensured the submission of the neigh
bourhood of H irah,he marched to Babel,where the fragments of thePersian army had assembled under the generals Firuzan,Hormuslin.and Mihran ; these he attacked and dispersed. Mihran retired to
Medayu,destroying the bridge in his res; Hormuzan reached the
district of Ahvaz,and Firuzan went to shut himself up at Nehdvend,where the treasures of the king of Persia were.
On the right bank of the Tigris,near Sabat,was another town,named Nahr Shir,and situated Opposite to Madayn,of which it wasconsidered a dependency. As it was defended by a numerous garrison,Sa
’d was obliged to besiege it. He employed engines ofwar and often
assaulted the place,but the siege was protracted in spite of all his
efforts. In order therefore to utilize the time and to employ the
cavalry,the services ofwhich were useless against enemies entrenched
within walls,Sa’d despatched it to subjugate various districts of E rik
west of the Tigris,where he had himself not yet penetrated with his
tr00ps. According to instructions received from O’
mar,he ordered hislieutenants who commanded these raids,to treat kindly the indigenousArab population if it accepted the conditions to become tributary,but to be severe against all who should attempt to elude them by
flight. After a defence of several months the garrison ofNahr Shir,enfeebled and discouraged,evacuated the place,and escaped in boats toMadayn.
Now everywhere the law of the Khalif was received without resist
ance,and all the parts of E’
rak comprised between the T igris and the
Euphrates were definitively conquered by theMusalman power .
1According to Rasmussen,Bocrah was founded a.n. 14 (a n. 035) Annalee
Islamici,p. l .
188 nossnn conouasr or PERSIA.
After having despatched Ka’
ka’
,Sa’dput himself at the head of his
army and marched into Madayn,which he found deserted. On per
ceiving the splendid palaces and gardens he recited the following verse
from the Koran —“ Ilow many gardens and fountains,and fields ofcorn,and fair dwellings,and advantages which they enjoyed,did theyleave behind them ! Thus [we dispossessed them thereof]and we gave
the same for an inheritance unto another people. Neither heaven
nor earth wept for them.
”
(Surah XLIV. 24 et On proceedingto theAyovz
’
m,or royal palace,Sa’
d beheld a magnificent structure 120
cubits broad,300 long,and 100 high ; it had been built not of bricksbut of polished marble,and twelve columns of the samematerial,each100 cubits high,formed the portico. This palace had been constructed
by Kob-id the son ofFiriiz,and in it the king,seated on a throne of
gold,held his audiences of justice.
Sa’
d encamped with his army near the palace,on entering which he
prostrated himself eight times to the ground,uttered theSalim,recitingat each prostration the Fateha with another Sarah,and pronouncingafter every two prostrations the confession of faith . Then Sa
’d charged
A’mru B . Mokarrin with the keeping and distribution of the booty,all
ofwhich when found was to be entrusted to A’mru,who collected the
whole of it and distributed it afterwards among all. Then hemountedhis horse and returned to the city,where he alighted in the castle of
Kesra,and saw apartments,the number ofwhich is known toGod alone,filled w ith gold,silver,garments,precious stones,arms and tapestry.
The soldiers dispersed everywhere collecting everything and carrying it
to A’mru B . Mokarrin. Ka
’
ka’
B . A’
mru,who had gone as far as thebridge ofNahrwan,brought back fromhis expedition enormous plunder,which being united to the above formed an immense quantity of riches.
After having deducted one-fifth therefrom,the remainder was distri
buted among the cavalry and infantry which constituted the
army,every man receiving dirhems for his share ; there were
moreover many objects sent as homage to O’mar,and a multitude of
inestimable value,and several ofwhich no use whatever couldbemade.
According to theR augat-al-gafa,cart-loads of camphor alsowere found,
which the Arabs at first mistook for salt.
Ka’
ka’
had found at the bridge ofNahrwzin,attached to the back ofa camel,a box containing a tunic of K esra embroidered with pearls,among which werealso red rubies. It contained likewise other garments
of gold tissue,the crown of Kesra,his ring,and six pieces ofgold
nosnsn cosqussr or psasrs. 189
brocade. All this was sent to O’mar . In the collection of arms a
cupboard containing the arms of Kesra garnished with pearls was
discovered,as well as his cuirass of gold,his helmet,with leg and
arm pieces,all of gold ; further six Solomonian coats of mail,withnine costly sabres. In the treasury a horse made entirely of gold,covered with a silver saddle set with precious stones,was found ;also a camel of silver with a foal of gold. All these objects were
sent to O’
mar,as well as a carpet of white brocade,which had like
wise been found ih the treasury,300 cubits long by 60 broad,andnamed the winter carpet. The kings of Persia made use of it in the
winter season,when there were no longer anyflowers or verdure. The
whole border was fringed with green emeralds,so that any one sitting
on this carpet believed himself to be in a meadow or green field. Pre
cious stones of various colours represented all kinds of odorous herbs
and flowers. In themagaz ine of perfumes were vases of glass contain
ing camphor,ambergris,musk,and other perfumes,which were likewisesent to O
’
mar over and above the fifth part of the spoils,with a large
number of other objects. When all these riches arrived at Medinah,the Khalifhad them deposited in the mosque,and the people looked atthem with amaz ement. Then O
’mar caused them to be distributed
among the Musalmzins in conformity with the regulations fixed by the
administration of gifts. A’li received a piece of the great carpet,which
he sold for the sumof dirhems. People came from all directions,from the east and west,fromEgypt and fromYemen,to Medinah,tobuy precious stones,gold and silver . The occupation of Medayu
took place in themonth ofCafar a n . 16 (March
Cu r ran XL—Tnn Tarmac or JALU’LA’ AND or HOLWA'N .
Afier his flight from Madayn Y azdegird had retired to Holwan,and Sa
’d B . Abu Volcae asked O
’
mar for permission to follow him
there. The Khalif replied, Do not go there thyself,but send [theson of]thy brother Hashem w ith men,and give the commandof the vanguard toKa
’
ka’
B. A’
mru. As for thyself,remain atMadayn,to send them reinforcements in case ofneed.
”Sa
’
d acted in conformitywith these orders,and when Hashem arrived at J ah
’
ihi he found the
Persians concentrated in one army under the orders of a general
namedMihran. Hashem spent there sixmonths in fighting,till he sueceeded in routing themst The reason of this delay must 110 doubt have
Tabari,p. 418.
190 MOSLEM concussr or Pr ssra.
been the precautions taken for the protection of J ahilaby the Persian
general Mihran B . Behrzim. He surrounded his camp with a large
trench and thorny bushes,and these impediments must have been
quite sufficient to baflle an opponent in an age in which artilleryand gunpowder were unknown,and the war engines which the
Musulmans could use must have been extremely imperfect ; theyhad however one great resource,to which they always resorted in
similar cases,-they hemmed their opponents in closely and starved
them,until they were either forced to capitulate,or to come out and
fight. The latter appears to have been the case in this instance,and,according to the Raugat-al-eafa,the battle commenced as usual with
single combats,which brought on a general fight resulting in the
defeat of the Persian army. Tabari states that Mihra’
m with
men fell in the plain of Jelulzi ; it is however not only very improbable
that he had so large an army,but impossible that such a number could
perish in a single battle,as such a thing has never happened in anymodern engagements,even with the terrible powers used in our times,incomparison with which the arrowsandswordsofthe seventh centurymust
be considered asmere toys. It is also hard to believe that theMusalmans
could have been so bloodthirstv as to murder in cold blood the unfor
tunatepeople,tomake up that largenumber . Thebootyobtained in this
town was immense,so that,after deducting one-fifth part of it to send
to Medinah,every soldier received dirhems for his share. This
victory was gained in Z ulka’
dah A .H . 16 (Now e-Dec.
At the news of the defeat of his army and the death of Mihrain,Yaz degird left Holwz
’
mandproceeded in the direction ofRey,leaving inthe former place a body of troops under general Khorz aid,* ordering himto give theArabs asmuch occupation ashe couldabout Holwan in order
to keep them off from himself. Sa’
d being informed of the departure of
Yazdegird by Hashem ordered the latter to remain in the place whwe
he was,and to despatch Ka’
ka’
with a moiety of his troops against
Holwzin. Khorzad marched against Ka’
ka’
as far as the place named
Kaer Shirin, the castle of Shirin,”situated oneparasang fromHolwdn,
on the banks of a river near which there were large trees,whereKhorzad pitched his camp. There the two armies met ; the Persians
were defeated,but Khorz éd escaped and joined Yaz degird. Ka’
ka’
entered Holwan and wrote the following letter to Hashem z—“ Ask
Sa’
d to authorize me to pursue Yazdegird beyond Kolwan before he
Always Khosurusum in Tabari,with a sign of inter rogation by Z otenberg.
192 MOSLEM CONQ UEST or rsasu .
CHAPTE R XII.—Tn s MUSALMA
'NS BU ILD Koran,AND
Hos'
rmrr rss csass son ONE FULL Y EAR .
We have seen in the beginning of Chapter IX. that Sa’d B . Abu
Vokachad already begun to lay the foundations of the town ofKufah
A .H . 15,after the victory at Kadesyah . Then he had merely erected
reed huts and traced the outline of the town,and was soon called
away.* Now however,two years after that event,he again returned to
the place,in order to rest his troops,by order of the Khalif. He left
Madayn and brought from the Sawzid all persons,whether Musulmansor not,who possessed some knowledge of architecture. He likewise
summoned the governors of various towns,who appointed lieutenants
to take their places,to Kufah,and assigned to them plots of ground
to build upon. O’
mar addressed to Sa'
d a letter in which he
said, Build according to just proportions,that your fortunemay hedurable. By expressing himself in this manner O
’
mar meant to saythat they were to erect houseswhich should be neither too small nor too
large. Accordingly everybody commenced to build ; but Sa’
d caused
a Splendid palace to be built for himself,on the model of the white
palace he had seen at Madaya,the gate of which he had from the
latter place caused to be brought to Kufah and to be placed in his own
palace. The other people imitated him,carried off the doors from thehouses at Madaya,and used them in their houses at Kufah.
When O’
mar learnt that Sa’d B . Abu VOlStiQ had caused such a
palace to be built for himself,he was highly displeased,and callingfor Muhammad B . Maslama,Spoke to him as follows “ Betake thyself to Kufah,procure wood,get it carried to the palace of Sa
’d,and
burn the whole palace. After having done this,place this letter on mypart into the hands of Sa
’
d without telling himone word,and return.
”
It was announced to Sa’
d that a messenger from O’
mar had arrived,but that hismission was unknown . Muhammad B . Maslama,havingarrived near the palace,ordered a large quantity of wood to be brought
and to be set on fire. Sa’
d sent a person to summon Muhammad
into his presence,in order to ascertain the object of his mission.
Muhammad appeared before Sa’
d and said to him Come and see
thyself the object ofmymission. Sa’
d arose and went out. After
having set the palace in flames Muhammad handed to Sa’
d the letter
of O’
mar without saying one word more,and departed. Sa’d opened
the letter,the contents ofwhich were as follows I have learnt that
See beginning ofOh. X.
nosssn cosouesr or PERSIA . 193
thou hast built for thyself a palace like the palace of Kesra,the gateof which thou hast taken away and fixed to thy own. It is probablythy intention to place doorkeepers and guards at this gate,to keepoff or to refuse to listen to those who may have a request to make.
Thou meanest then to follow the aberrations of Kesra by abandoningthe injunctions of the prophet ? Kesra was however carried from his
palace to the tomb,whilst the prophet was conveyed from the tomb to
a palace. Now I have sent some one to burn thy palace he will not
fear thee. One single modest house is to sutfice thee in this world in
which to live,and another in which to deposit and to guard the public
treasure. Then thou wilt go from thy house to a palace,like the
prophet,and not from a palace into the tomb,like Kesra.
”Sa
'
d then
intended to give provisions for his journey to Muhammad B . Maslama,but he refused them. Afterwards Sa
’
d occupied a habitation com
posed of two buildings,in one ofwhich he dwelt,and the other he used
as a treasury. The palace was in ruins till the reign of Moa’
vyah
B. Abu Sofytin it was however repaired bv Z va'
d,whom Moa’vyah had
appointed governor of this province,and became after him the royal
residence.
During the whole of A .n . 17 (A . D . 638) the building of Kufah was
carried on,aml there was no campaign in the E’
rdk.
’
Cuar rsa XIII.-:sr or sou r: Towxs or r u n Auwa’z,Ex
Psm'
r rox r un .“ Ba rnu m,ax n ( h ar em-z o r IIomw z s’m FROM
18 (639 -640) T ILL mu . 21(DEC . 610 T ILL OCT . 31,Hormuz iin being of roval blood and enjoying great authority was
king of the Ahwi z the government of this province,which contained
seventy towns,was hereditary in his family,and he as well as his an
cestors had the right of wearing a crown. This right was enjoyed bvseven families in Persia,who were by their origin the equals of the
king of Persia,only their crowns were somewhat smaller than those
of the sovereign. Hormuz aiu,who had at the demand of Yazdegird
taken part w ith a numerous army in the battle of Kaidesyah under
the orders of Rustum,returned after the defeat to the Ahwziz,andcontinued to govern that province,the limits whereof were contiguous
to the territory of Bocrah,into which IItDTll l lt lll made incursions and
slew many Musalmzins. O'
tbah ll . Ghaz vzin,the governor of Bograh,informedO
’
mar of this fact,and the latter wrote to Sa'
d B. Abu Yolss'
u;
to send reinforcements to O'
tbah . Accordingly Sa'
d despatched
Tabar i . Il l . 125.
25 r a s
194 aost su conquest or reasm.
men under the command ofNoa’imB . Mokarrin and ofA
’bdullah B.
Masu’
d ; O’
tbah on his part likewise detached a body of troops from the
army ofBoerah commanded by Salania B . Al-Kaim,and another byHarmalah B . Martabah. After these two armies had joined each other,they established their camp at DostMayszin,whence theymarched intothe Ahwaz,IIormuzau being at that time in a town called Tera.
The province of Ahw iiz was surrounded by the Arab tribe Kulayb
B . Wiiil,with whom l iormuz z’
m had some disputes about certain terr i
tories’
and villages ; on this occasion,however,he was very anxious
that they should co-Operate with him against theMusalmzins,but theyrefused,and promised their aid to the latter,whom they invited
to ofl'
er battle on a certain day,when they would fight on their side.
Hormuz zin being informed of the approach of the Arabs rev iewed his
army,and made arrangements for a battle. On the day fixed,the‘
Musalmzin army divided itself into two bodies,and the troops ofKufahattacked the flanks of the enemy,who was already beginning to get
weakened,when the army ofBocrah arrived,and after still resisting for
a while took to flight,when also the Kulayb B . Wdil made their
appearance on the battle-field. Then Hormuz z’
m retreated to Stilt -al
Ahwziz,the capital of his province,situated on the two banks of the
little Tigris,Dujayl,and well fortified ; but Hormuz zin fortified also
the bridge which connected the two banks.
Afterwards O’
tbah despatchedHorkue w ith reinforcements against
Hormuz zin,who coming out from Sdk-al-Ahw ziz challenged the Nu
salmans to fight,but they sent him the follow ing message,“ Cross
the river and come to us,or we shall cross it and go to thee.
”Hor
muz zin replied, It is for vou to cross the river .
”Accordingly
Horkuc,whom O’
tbah had appointed commander-ia-chief of all the
Musalmtin troops,crossed the Dujay l,and a battle took place,whichwas the most sanguinary that had been fought at Bograh and in the
Ahwaiz . Hormuz zin was put to flight,and many of his soldiers were
killed by the Musalmzins ; and he retreated to another town of the
Ahwaz called Brim-Hormuz,where he fortified himself. Horkucthen
took possession of Sdk-al-Ahwziz,and sent immediately an ofiicer who
had come from Medinah named Hurr B . Moa’
vyah,in pursuit of
Hormuzan. O’
mar on his part also despatched orders to Sa'
d to
expedite new forces from Kufah towards the same destination. Seeing
that Musalmzin armies were arriving from all sides to attack him,IIormuz zinmade proposals of peace to Run and to l lorkuq,demanding
nosu m coxoussr or rsusm. 19 7
After perusing the letter of the K halif,O’
tbah B . Ghazwain sent
5000men of the army of Bocrah by the route of the Ahwziz into the
prOVince of Fairs. When these troops arrived near the camp of 8114111
rokh,at Triwaz,‘a place situated on the confines of the Ahwaz and of
the province of Fara,they attacked the enemy and compelled him to
retire. Then A’hi,whohad left the sea-shore,joined theMusalmans,and
Abu-Sabra B . Abu Ruhm,who commanded the expedition,handed himthe letter of the Khalif. Thereupon both corps returned to Bocrah,where O
’
tbah dissolved the army of the Bahrain,which was composed ofvarious Arab tribes from the Eejr,ordering everyman to rejoin his owntribe,and sent A
’
lato Sa’
d. O'
tbah remained at Bocrah,and Hormusin in the Ahwéz .
The news of the events that had taken place in the Ahwiiz,and inthe province of Fairs which had been invaded by the armv from the
Bahrain and again abandoned by it,hav ing reached the ears of Yazde
gird,he addressed fromRey a letter to the people of Fairs to the follow
ing purport You have cared so little for your religion,and you haveallowed the Arabs to gain so many advantages,that they have,after
conquering the E’
riik,the Sawaid,Madayn our country and our capital,also attacked the Ahwaiz ; neither have you given assistance to IIormu
za'
n,so that he has been compelled to abandon to them one-half of that
province. They have after that invaded the province ofFairs,your owncountry,and you were not moved ; they were enabled to effect their
retreat sound and safe. Unite now your efforts to those of IIormuz fin,that he may defend Ahwziz . Send him tr00ps,that he may begin the
war again,and regain the portion of his country which he has lost.”
Yaz degird wrote also to Ilormuz ain,and announced to him that he had
recommended to Shaihrokh and to the inhabitants of Fairs to render
him assistance. The latter indeed informed IIormuzain that they would
come to his aid,and thus encouraged him for the coming struggle.
O’
mar,having been informed that Hormuz ain had obtained the con
currence of the army of the province of Fairs,and that he had brokenthe peace,sent orders to Abu Mdsa Al-Asha
’
ri to despatch a bodyof troops from Bocrah against IIormuzain,under the command of
Abu Sabra,in order to conquer the whole Ahwaz,and to expel IIor
muri n from it,so as to deprive the army of the province of Fare
for ever of an opportunity to attack the Musalmans on the score of
To be mentioned again in the beginning ofOh. XVIII.
198 mosmm cosoussr or rsasm.
aiding Hormuz a’
m. Abu Miisa sent a detachment of troops fromBocrah.
The Khalif addressed a letter to Sa’
d B. Abu Vokaic and ordered
him to send from the B'
rails into the Ahwaiz troops which were to jointhe army of Boqrah in order to wage war against Hormuz iin . Sa
’
d
despatched a body of troops from Kufah,in command of No’
mtn B.
Mokarrin. Lastly,in a letter addressed to Abu Sabra,O'
mar appointed
that ofiiccr to be the commander- in-chief of the united armies of Kufah
and Bocrah,and confided to him the direction ofthe war in the Ahwxiz .
Abu Sabra,hav ing penetrated into the Ahwaz,encamped under thewalls of Ram-Hormuz . Hormuz zin asked for reinforcements from
Shzihrokh,who sent him a body of fl ows,and who went himself to
occupy the town of Tuster,which was better fortified than Rim
Hormuz . Nevertheless when IIormuz ziu perceived that the Musalnuin
army was very numerous,he left the fortress of Ram-Hormuz,and
likewise betook himself to Taster,thus effecting his junction with thearmy of the province of Fairs. [Icrcupon Abu Sabra took possession
of Ram-Hormuz,left a small gar rison there,and proceeded towards
Tustcr. He wrote to O'
mar that the enemy had obtained reinforce
ments,and likewise demanded fresh troops. O’
mar instructed Abu
Mtisa Al-Asha’
ri to march in person with the whole army of Boqrah
to the assistance of Abu Sabra ; accordingly Abu Mdsa joined the
army of Abu Sabra again (the latter retaining the supreme command),and took up his position under the walls of Tuster . TheMusalmans be
sieged this town for six months in vain,but at last entered it by an
underground canal through which water was conveyed into the town,w ithin which,however,there was also a citadel,where Hormuz tin shut
himself up,but was at last forced to capitulate,a nd was taken toMedinah,where he became a Musalmzin.
CHAPT ER XIV—Tm: TAK ING or NEHA'VEND .
Yazdegird,who had been at Rey for some time,but was aware that
the Musalmz’
ms would again renew hostilities,did l is best to collect anumerous army,and to concentrate it at Nehzivend under the commandofFiruz zin,who is likewise nicknamed by Tabari
‘Z ulhajeb,’ ‘
endued
w ith eyebrows,’
just like Bahman,who was also a Persian gene
ral,and had seven years before fought at the Battle of the Bridge. In
formation concerning the preparations of the Persians was immediatelysent to O
'
mar by A’
bdnllah Ebn I’
tbzin (the successor of Sa’d B.
Abu Vokac after his recall from Kufah),who wrote to him that theyhad concentrated at Nehaiveud larger forces than they had ever raised
200 mosses: CONQ UEST or PERSIA.
After the arrival of A’
bdullah the son of O’
mar with his men
fromMedinah,No’
mtin put his army,which now consisted of
men,in motion,and marched through the Sawad towards flolwrin,where he was joined by other soldiers,either Arabs or tributaries,tothe amount of who flocked tohis banners. Finding no enemies
at Holwa'
m,No’
main crossed themountains and arrived at Merj,whencehe went to Tdr .
The Persians at Nehzivcud had strengthened their position by ditches
and ramparts,and in those days,when fortifications played an immensely higher part in the art ofwar than at present,they proved a consider
able obstacle to the Musalmtins,who had ascertained that the Persians
would not attack them. and had therefore crossed the distance of 25
parasangs intervening between T iit and Nehzivend,and had encamped
before it. They were unable to cross the palisades,and remained
inactive in front of the town for twomonths. AsNo’
mfin B . Mokarrin
continued in his position before the gates of Nchtivend,Firuz tin sent
him the message, Send us a man that we may come to an under
standing with him. No’
main selected Moghirah B . Sho’
beh,whocrossed the palisades and entered the town.
.
A tent of gold brocade
had been prepared for the meeting . Firuza'
m was seated on the throne
w ith a golden crown on his head,whilst soldiers armed w ith lances
and sabres stood by,and formed two lines,between which Moghirah
advanced with his eyes fixed to the ground. When he arri ved before
the throne of Firuz zin he stopped without lifting them. Then the
soldiers touched him with the hilts of their swords and said,“ At
least lift up thy eyes towards the prince,who is looking at thee !"
Moghirah,who had lost an eye in the war,replied,“ I have not
come as an enemy ; I am an envoy,who is not to be treated as you
treat me at this moment,and I enjoy higher consideration amongmy people than this prince among yourselves.
”Vt n the interpreter
translated these words to Firuz zin,he said, He is r ight,do not acttowards him unsuitably.
”Then he told Moghirah to sit down,and
the latter obeyed. Firuz z'
m said, You Arabsare themost wretched
and famishing people of the world. It would be easy for me to
annihilate you all at once,because I have in my army a number of
archers equal to the whole number of your warriors. But I do not
want your corpses to pollute the gates of my town. If you depart. so
much the better for you but ifyou desire to lose your lives you have
only to remain.
" Moghirah replied in the following terms We have
nosasn conqcssr or r sasu . 201
indeed been such as thou sayest. w retched and poor ; but God has sent
us a prophet,has led us to the religion,has taken away from us ill luck,and has imposed it on vou. Now we have come to throw our poverty
on you and to take away vour possessions. After uttering thesewords
Moghirah rose and went away. Firuz ain said to the Persians,“ This
Arab 13 right ; they acted as he has said.
”These kinds of stereo
typed dialogues between Persian princes and Arab envoys Tabari gives
in several places ; the former alwavs reproach the latter with their
wretched condition,which they acknowledge,and plead for their
religion. The best occurred in Chapter VII. between Yazdegird and
the Arab deputation,but to give them all in er tenso would be a mere
waste of time.
The Arabs were,in Spite of their large numbers,unwilling to attack
the fortifications,and constantly challenged the Persians to come out
and have a free fight in the open plain ; it is not certain whether these
taunts or the want of provisions induced the Persians to leave their
fortified camp to attack them,but it is certain that they did so.
Tabari relates that the Musalnnins spread false rumours that the
KhalifO'
mar had died,that they intended to return to their country,and they actually marched away. IIereupon the Persians issued from
their retrenchmcnts and pursued them. When'
o'
n1 had departed,and purposely left in his camp all kinds of articles which were not
indispensable,such as garments,utensils,and animals,the Persiansentertained no doubts that the .\Insal1n had fled,and marched after
him. The battle took place between Nelnivend and Ilamadzin,but wassoon decided bv the flight of thePersians and the death of their general,Firuz rin.
*
This battle was called “the victory of victories according to the
Raugat-al-cafa and according to Tabari Persians lost
their lives in it,and it is said that after this time the Persians never
mustered in such large numbers. Hogaifah B .
-\l-Yam:
'
1n had all the
booty collected near Savb B . Al—Akra’
,who had been delegated by the
Khalif to preside over its distribution. After having put aside the
fifth part,Sayb divided the rest among the troops. The share of each
man in the cavalry amounted to and in the infantry to
dirhems. Next dav a l’ersian,one of those who gnanlcd the fire
temples,and who was an aged man,came to l logaif1h and said.
Grant me mv life,and the lives of those whom I shall point out and
Tabari,III. 473.26 r a a
202 MOSLEM CONQ UEST or Pans“ .
I shall deliver to thee the treasure ofKesra. Having received fromHoz aifah a promise of protection,he went away,and bringing with hima casket sealed with the seal of Kesra he said, When Yaz degird,inhis journey to Rey,passed through this place,his treasurer Nakhirjdnconfided this casket to me with the information that Kesra intended
to reserve it in case misfortunes should befall him.
” When Hogaifah
opened the casket,he found it full of rubies and other precious stones,red,white,green,of all colours and of inestimable value. It was
sent to O'
mar to be deposited in the public treasury.
Hogaifah had been informed that the fugitive Persian troops had again
rallied at Hamadain. He sent Ka’
lsa’
B . A’
mru to disperse them. At
IIa1nad.in there was a Dehkan named Dinzir,who governed the provinces of IIamadzin and of Rey. This Dehkan came to Ka
’
ka’and
said, Take me to thychief,I wish to negotiatewith him.
” When hearrived in the presence ofHoz aifah he concluded peace for Hamadrin,and a treaty was written,so that the latter place was occupied bymutual agreement,whilst Nehaivend was taken by force of arms.
The Musalmzin army was partly composed of troops of Kufah,and
partlv of troops of Bocrah . Hoz a1fah,waiting for orders from O’
mar
to march or to return,dwelt after his victory at Nehzivend,which beingtoo small a town to contain the whole Musalmdn army,Bogaifah div ided it into two corps,the troops ofBocrah being
'
quartered in Nehi
vend. and those ofKufah in a town called B iawer,situated in the
vicinity ofNehzivend. These two towns were afterwards called MihBocrah
”and “ Nah-Kufah,
”both together being designated by the
word Mahayn. In the Pehlevi language the word and/c signifies a
province and kingdo1n.
*
At the news of these events Yazdegird lost all hope of reconqueringhis realm. He left Rev and went into the Kohesttin.
Cnar rau XV.—Occum'
r101v or Espaua’s AND or sm as h o
'rn l n
TOWNS .
O’
mar had,with his usual cautiousness. issued orders to the armyof the E
‘
rék not to pass beyond the heights of Holwan,and to that
of Bocrab not to march beyond the Ahwi z,tor fear that the Mnsal
mans might not be able to keep in subjection any more countries,inasmuch as Yazde r ird was not resting in peace,but levying new
1»Tabari, p. 480.
uosnan concessr or raasm. 205
the peace they had concluded with the Musalmzins and had fortified the
town. When Noa'
im arrived,the Persian general Khsharashntimhad received assistance from the people of the Aderb1j 1in,and the
inhabitants of that province had arrived in great numbers. O'
mar he
came so uneasy at this news that he immediately wrote a letter to
Hozaifah B . Al-Yaman,who was at Nehavend,and ordered him to send
all his troops to Hamadan,1a order to succour Noa’
1m. I{hsharashn1im
came out from the fortress and marched against Noa’
im,who was encamped in a district of the plain named Waj-i-rtid. A sanguinary
battle ensued which lasted three days. The Persian general was killed
and his routed troops were cut to pieces by the Musalmzins. Noa’
im
occupied the town of Ilamadzin,and sent troops in pursuit of the
Persians,who fled in the direction of Rey,where a prince named
Sidwukhsh,grandson of Bchram Chubin,wasgoverning in the name of
Yazdegird,andwas in connnand of a large army given him by the latter
when departing from Rey. A distance of six days’ march separates
Hamadtin from Rey,but the pursuing Musalmzin troops proceeded
only three and then retraced their steps and Noa'
im,who despatchedthe booty gained at Ilamadzin to O
'
mar,informed him in a letter that a
great concentration of troops had taken place at Rey under the com
mand of Behnim Chtibin’
s grandson. When O'
mar gave to the
messengers leave to depart,he handed them a letter for Kon’
im contain
ing the following instructions—“ Establish a governor at IIamadain,
selecting any one thou choosest . Despatch Sinnils B . Kharasha with
a small detachment toAderbijzin to aid Bokayr B. A'
bdullah. andmarch
thyself to Rey . l l inder the Persians from rallying in any place.
”The
taking ofHamadan and of Rey,which will now be narrated,took placeA .n. 22 (between Dec. 042and Oct .
Now theMusalmdns had obtained so strong a footing that some
Persian magnates considered it good policy to ensure the safety of their
own possessions bv abetting them Openly,and cases of treachery to
their country and sovereign become more frequent than hitherto. Sizi
wukhsh,the governor of Rey,made the best preparations he could to
resist the further progress of the Musalmz’
tns. bv sending messages to
the provinces adjoining Rey,and wherever troops existed,to Gorg.in,toT iberisttin,to Demévcnd,to Kaum,and into the Karen mountain,andall the princes responded to his appeal by sending him forces,so that
Tabar i,l l l .,p . 489.
208 mosmm coseuss'
r or Psasm.
When the Sephabuds ofTaberistzin were informed of these facts,theywent to their chief,the Sephabud ofSephabuds,Ferrukhan,a Giltinianand a very powerful man,to consult him on what was to be done.
Ferrukhz’
m replied, It is all over with Persia,whereas from the Arab
root a tree has grown which bears fruit. The religion of Muham
mad is a new religion,and every new religion is victorious . Therefore
I think that wemust make peace and pay tribute. We must however
not receive the Musalmén army and pay the capitation-tax individually,
but we shall pay it in a lump sum,and levy contributions for it amongourselves as we like.
”This advice having been approved by all,
Fer rukhzin despatched a messenger to Sowayd asking for peace,andstipulating that he would pay for the whole of Taberistzin the annual
sum of five hundred thousand dirhems,but that he should not be
compelled to furnish troops to the Musalrm’
ms in time of war . Sowayd
accepted the conditions,peace was concluded,and Ferrukh iin at once
sent one hundred thousand dirhems. All these events took place
22 (between November 30th,612,and O ctober 2lst,Sowayd informed O
'
mar of the conquest ofKaum,of Gorgan,and ofT riberistain ; whereon the Khalif ordered Noa
’
im B . Mokarrin to send
also Simzik B . Kharasha to Aderbijan,where hehadalreadybefore sentA
’
etna B . Farkad and Bolgayr B . A'
bdullah. The first man who
opposed Bokay r was Esfendyzir,one of the princes of the country,buthe was defeated and captured by the Musulmans. He said to Bokayr,Intendest thou to takepossession of the towns ofAderbijén bywar or
by treaty? ” “ By treaty,
”replied Bokayr . He continued, Then
keep me a prisoner ; because if thou killest me,the whole ofAderbijanw ill arise to avenge my death,and w ill fight against thee ; but if thoukeepest me,they w ill make peacew ith thee,for fear of exposingmylife.
”
Accordingly Bokayr retained him in captivity,and SimakB . Kharasha
brought him reinforcements when he had already obtained possession
of the person of Esfendyzir and of all the towns within his reach .
Ilereupon Bokayr w rote to O'
mar that,having no longer any hostilitiesto fear as long as he retained Esfendyair in his hands,he considered it
necessary to march to Derbend.
Meanwhile Behrrim B . Ferrulchz zid,one of the Dehkzins of Aderbi
J an,assembled a considerable army,but being attacked by the united
forces of Bokayr,of S innils',and of A
’
cma he was put to flight,then
Tabar i, p. 494.
210 most sn cosqursr or st asis.
After the termination of this affair,Sorakah,Bokayr,and Habib B .
Maslama united their forces,and the inhabitants of all the other
mountain-
passes made peace with them. They engaged themselves to
protect the Musalman territory against the invasions of enemies through
these defilcs,that the Musalmans might have no need of posting troopsin them. Soralsah sent his ofi cers into the defiles or into the towns
which were among themountains. He also strengthened all the pas
sages towards the Alains and the Khazars,so that the Musalmans were
protected in their towns against enemies. Then he wrote a letter to
O’mar giving an account of what he had done. The Khalif was
delighted,as he had entertained grave apprehensions with reference to
these mountain passages. He apprehended that if the foes were to
cross these passages and to invade theMusalman territory,the Persians might join them and again repel the Musalmans. He had never
thought that this afi'
air could so rapidly be brought to a prosperous
termination. Therefore he experienced a lively joy on the receipt of
the just-mentioned letter,and wrote to Sorékah a reply full ofpraise ;
the latter however died shortly afterwards at Derbend,and A’
bd-al
rahman took his place as commander.
A’bd-al-rahman asked Shehryair in what direction he might attempt
to penetrate with an expedition through themountain-passes,in order
to convert the people of the country to Islam. Shehryé r replied,Let us be content to exact from them that they should not allow the
enemies to penetrate to A’
bd-al-rahman however ,would not
take his advice,but desired to penetrate as far as the rampart ofGogand Magog,1
'
and marched through the mountains into a territorycalled Balanjar to a distance of twenty parasangs. A man who had
been in the just-mentioned expedition with A’
bd-al-rahman afterwards
came to 0’mar,who asked him how they had marched through the
mountain-
pass,how they had penetrated into those countries,andhow they had fought ? The man replied, All those countries were
inhabited by pagans,Khazars,and Alains intermixed with Turks.
When we arrived,they said to each other,No army of men has ever
penetrated to this place. This is a host of the angels of heaven,tohave dared to come so far . Then they askedus whether we were angels
or men. We replied,We are men ; but we have angels to accom
pany us wherever we go,to assist us when we are attacked. Then
Tabari, p. 498. 1' Korén,XVIII. 96.
212 mosw n cosoussr or mean .
to have been very slow,because thedanger ceased after hegot out of the
way of the Musahmins because he travelled with a retinue of several
thousand persons,even when he possessed no troops,as he had withhim the slaves ofhis palace,cooks,servants of the body,horsekeepers,secretaries,wives,concubines,the aged and the children of the royal
family ; and lastly because he never left a town of any importance before
he had issued proclamations in all directions,collected tr00ps,andappointed generals to fight the Musalmzins,who would,unless thesearrangements had been carried out,have made very short work of the
conquest of the Persian monarchy,instead of protracting it through a
quarter of a century. He progressed slowly in a chariot drawn by
mules,and first took up his position at Rey,as already stated above,andthen at Espahfm,but travelled afterwards in Kirma
’
m and in Khortistin,always carrying w ith him the sacred fire he had brought from the first
mentioned place,which contained the most ancient fire-temple. From
Nishaipli r he went to Merw,where he felt more secure,and whence hesent a proclamation to all the districts to which the Arabs had not yet
penetrated. He built a fire-temple at a distance of two parasangs
from Mcrw,depositing in it the fire he had brought with him fromRey,surrounded the fire-temple with gardens,erected mills,and thus
produced a delicious landscape,in which he continued to dwell for sometime.
Mahwy Sury,the governor of KhOl't'
tStln and vassal of Yazdegird,resided at Merw ; his jurisdiction extended as far as the river Oxus
(J but,being apprehensiveof the signs of the times,he hadenteredinto an alliance of mutual defence with a Trausoxian chief accordingto Tabari ; according to the Rauzat-ai-eafa he had also married his
daughter . Both books call him the Khakan of the Turks,in other
respects their accounts differ . That much is certain,that men of
the troops of this Khaikz'
mhad been received byMahwy Sury,to imposeon Yaz degird,who desired the governor to settle his accounts of several
years with him,and to produce funds. The unfortunate sovereign had
been politely decoyed into the fort ofMerw,where he was to have
been murdered during the night ; the plot was however discovered in
time,and he walked out alone. After a while he felt tired,and arrivu‘near a mill intended to sleep there,but the king
’s embroidered robe
excited the cupidity of the miller,who chopped off his head with a
hatchet whilst he was asleep,then took his clothes and threw the
corpse into the water . Search was made for the lost king by Mahwy,
nosum concussr os rsasm. 213
and Yazdegird’
s robe having been found with the miller he was killed .
After that Mahwy governed peaceably in Merw till O’
mar sent AlmafB . Kaye to Khortistin with the army of Beerah and Kufah,but he metwith no resistance,and when he arrived in Merw,Mahwy escaped to
Transoxiana.
The above succinct account of the death of Yaz degird is probably the
most correct,and the various details and embellishments added to it bysome authors must be taken for what they are worth . Tabari also
gives it,but does not consider it authentic my respect however for so
painstaking and valuable a chronicler compels me to insert his own
account“B in this place,omitting only the unimportant portions of it
When Yaz degird came to Merw,O’mar despatched Almaf B . Kays
with men of the armies of Kufah and Bocrah,and ordered him
to pursue Yazdegird to every place,and to make him disappear from
the face of the earth . \t n Almaf arrived in Merw,Yazdegird fled toMerv-al-rtid,whence he sent ambassadors to the Khzikdnof the Turks,to the king of Soghd,to the emperor of China,and asked aid from
them. Then Yazdegird went to Balkh,where he fortified himself,butwhen Ahnaf took Balkh,Yazdegird escaped again and crossed theOxus,whence he proceeded to Soghd,the king of which countrv famished
himwith a numerousarmy,aswell as theKhakala,who,after assemblingall the war riors of Ferglninah,recrossed w ith Yazdegird the Oxus and
marched to Balkh. Ribi’ B . Amir retired w ith the troops of Kufah
which he had with him towards Merv-al-nid and joined Ahnaf. Yazde
gird and the Klniktin,at the head of an army composed ofmen from
Soghd,from Turkestain,from Balkh,and from Tokharestén,to the
number of cavalry,arrived at Merv-al-r t‘
id. Ahnaf had
men at his disposal ; they were troops from Kufah and Bocrah, The
armies remained during two months in presence of each other at the
place now calledDair-ai-Ahnaf,and fought every day frommorning tillevening . Yazdegird resided at the town Mcrv-al-nid.
During a certain night,one of the chief men among the Turks,arelative of the Klnilsain,went out of the camp with his suite to inspect
the outposts. Ahnaf,being informed of this circumstance,came in
t son to the outposts,attacked the Turkandkilled him. Thisman had
two brothers,who,on hearing of his death,came out,the one after the
other,to fight with Ahuaf,who killed them likewise. At break of day,
Tabar i,l l l .,p. 500.
214 uosarn cosenssr or PERSIA.
and when the Khakan was informed of what had occurred he went
to the spot where the combat had taken place. On beholding these
three corpses he was much afflicted and said, This war is very un
fortunate l We are here for so long a time and have lost somanymen,”
&c. Consequently he struck his camp,returned to Balkh,immediately crossed the river and returned to Turkestan.
After the departure of the Khaktin,Yazdegird left Merv-al-rad
and went to Merw,where he had secretly deposited a great quantity oftreasures and jewels. When he approached the town,Hare-rah B.
No’
man put it in a state of defence. Yazdegird took his riches (whichhe had succeeded in taking out from the town) and proceeded to
Balkh to join the Khékan. The Persian officers who were with him
asked him his intention.
”He told them that hemeant to placehim
self under the protection of the Khaktin,and to remain with him in
Turkestain. The Persians said, Do not go there,because we shall notfollow thee. The Turks are people without religion and without
faith,”&c. After the refusal of Yaz degird to return with his ofi cers
and to put himself rather under the protection of the Arabs than the
Turks,they took away his treasures fromhimand separated. Yaz degird
being new alone with his suite departed to the Khflcfin,whilst his of
ficers carried the treasures they had deprived him ofto Ahnaf,and sub
mitted to him. Ahnaf sent themback to their homes,to Madayn,intothe province ofFairs,to Rey and elsewhere he distributed the treasures
among the Musalmans,each ofwhom received a sum equal to his share
in the booty ofNehavend.
According to the narrative of Tabari just given,the manner of
Yazdegird’
s fate is totally unknown after he took refuge in Transoxiana
with the Khakz'
mof that country. However,since I have endeavoured tomake this paper as exhaustive as the sources at my disposal would per
mit,I am bound to give two short accounts more,according to which
Yazdegird perished by a violent death,and therefore they so far tallywith the one which I gave first and consider themost probable but
neither of themmentions the precise local ity where he was slain.
The first tradition is that Yazdegird fled after the revolt of the
Persians ; that they pursued,found,and killed him in a mill after
wards they carr ied the treasure to Ahnaf and submitted to him. The
second is that Yazdegird fled from Merw and went to Balkh,crossedthe Oxus and betook himself to Turkestan. Having arrived at Soghd
216 nosnan cosqussr or PERSIA.
town to defend it. Mujashi’
B . Masn’
d thenmarched on Tawna,whereShahrukh,who had returned to Shiraz to defend it,had left but a small
garrison,which he massacred,and where he gained immense booty.
A part of this province had been conquered already but had
again thrown off its allegiance to the Musalmzins as soon as a chance to
revolt had presented itself ; and now O’
smziu B . Ab-al-A’
s again sahja
gated the people of Ectakhar,who had come out to fight him,-but weredefeated,whilst his brother Al-HakamB . Ab ul-A
'
smarched on Shinia,where (as has already been mentioned) Shahrukh had gone,whom he
killedwith his own hand after a fierce contest between the two armies.
The success of the Musalmains was not so rapid at Darabgerd,whichtheywere compelled to besiege for twomonths,after the expiration whereof the Persians made a sortie,and a terrible battle ensued,in which theMusalmans had well nigh taken to flight,but saved themselves bytaking up their position near a mountain,which so efi
'
ectually protected
their rear that they eventually gained the victory.
The Kirmzin had been entered by the Mnsalmains already a.n . 22,but hostilities took place only a year afterwards,when the inhabitantsassembled an armv and called to their aid the inhabitants of the
Kuj mountains,who came down into the towns. Then a battle took
place,and afterwards A’
bdullah B . I’
tbzin despatched Sohayl B . A’
di,by the direct route passing through the towns,to a place called J ireflz,situated in the centre of the Kirunin,whither he also himselfmarched
by way of the desert and took possession of all the cattle he met with,and which amounted to a countless number of camels and sheep. On
that occasion also the Kohesta’
m was invaded.
During this same year ms . 23 O’mar despatched A
’simB. A
’
mr
from Boerab to the Seistzin. The governor of that province had
collected a numerous army and come as far as the frontiers to attack
the Musalmzins,but was defeated after a battle,and shut himself up in
his capital,Z erenj,which,being a well-fortified town,was not attackedby the Musalmzins,who contented themselyes with occupying the sur
rounding places,but when the governor saw that he could not hold
out for ever,be capitulated.
The Mekran,which is bounded on the north by Kirmtin,and on the
south by India,was then invaded by A’
bdullah B . A’
bdullah ; inhabit
ants of Mekran who were neighbours to the king of Sind asked his
aid against the Arabs,and he arrived at the head of a numerous army
See on. xnr.
uosnsu conquas'
r or PERSIA 217
with many elephants,but was defeated and the latter taken. A’bdullah
immediately despatched a messenger w ith news of the victory to O’mar,
who questioned him about the country and elicited the following
reply—“ Commander of the Faithful. it is a country of which the
mountains are mountains indeed,and the plains ofwhich are realmoun
tains ; it is a country with so little water that its dates are the worst of
dates,and the inhabitants the most warlike of men. If thou hadst a
more numerous army there,it would be annihilated and could do no
thing ; and if thy army is considerable it will perish of hunger,becausethere are no victuals. The country beyond it is still worse.
”Conse
quently O’
mar sent the following instructions to his ofiicers Do not
cross the boundaries ofMekran. You have nothing to do with Sind
do not lead the Musulmans to their destruction. Send letters to Sind,that the princes of that country who wish to have their elephants back
may ransom them and send you money,which you will distribute
among the soldiers.
”
Expeditions were also undertaken against the more unsettled popu
lation,and the Kurds,to subjugate whomwas much more difficult thanthe inhabitants who possessed fixed habitations and landed estates,whilst nomads wandered from pasture to pasture,and large hordescould elude all persecution for a time by simply going to the deserts
and mountains. Sometimes the Persians averted persecution by bribingthe Arab officers who governed in their districts,and at others bv
outwardly conforming w ith the formalities of the Musalmans under
intimidation,and it required some time before theFaith tookactual root
and became hereditary. There is no doubt that there were also a few
wisemen among the conquering race perfectly aware that it would be
bad policy to insist on the immediate conversion of the whole people,and to exasperate it. The complete subjugation of the vast extent of
the Persian monarchy took place only by degrees,and revolts now
and then still took place,but were suppressed without very great
difficulty,as no extensive organizations or ramifications of them amongthe various districts were possible. These insurrections were frequent
enough up to the death of the Khalif Sulaimain B . A’
bd-al-Melek,which took place a. n . 99 (7 17 The last great effort of the
Persians to recover their ancient independence occurred also in the 8th
century of our era,but the Rangat-al-eafa,from which I take the ac
count,does not give the date. Sinbad the Z oroastrian,an influential
inhabitant of Nishépti r. raised the standard of revolt,by first proclaim
28 r a s
218 nosnsn conquest or rsnsu .
ing his intention to liberate the Persians from the Musalmfin yoke in
his native city,and inviting the population of the district of Rey,aswell as the whole of Tziberistain,to make common cause with him.
Sinbaid first marched to Kaz vin,with the intention of taking possession
of it,but was disappointed. In Rey he was more successful he not
only took it,but slew its governor,and obtained an enormous booty of
arms and other articles. t en he had collected an army of
men,he declared that the end of Islam was at hand,that a scion of the
Sasanian dynasty would make his appearance,under whose commandhe would march to Mckkah and would destroy the Ka
’
bah . WhenAbu Ja’fer Manqur heard ofwhat was taking place,he marched withhis army to Saiwa Sinbaid,too,hastened to encounter him,carry
ing also numerous Musalnn’
m women whom he had placed on camels.
The battlewhich took placewas decisive : Sinbaid was put to flight and
afterwards killed in Tdbcristzin his army was partly destroyed,butmany of the fugitives perished of thirst in the desert. The total num
ber of those who lost their lives is stated to have amounted to
It is probable that the ancestors of the Z oroastrian community of
India,who arrived in a ship at Sainjt’
m,on the coast of Gujartit,werefugitives from Persia who escaped after the just described last revolution of the Z oroastrians in that country. That party consisted of a fewwealthymen,who had bought a ship,wherein they embarked with their
servants,and who were the nucleus of which all the Parsees of India
are the descendants. As there are absolutely no historical data extant
about this little emigration,a short account of which,named “ The
Story of Sdnjzin,was written by a Mobed of Surat,centuries after it
had taken place,A .D . 1590,the above conjecture may be considered
just as valid as any other that could be made.
2 0 OLD CANARESE AND SANSKRIT INSCBIP‘HOS S
RELATING TO THE sm mvuitéu cmsr rums. 221
No. I refers to the time of Pé rmadidéva I who,as the subordinate
of the Chalukya king Vikramfiditya II*,was governing the Kisukadu
Seventy,the Ké lavfidi Three-hundred,the Bagadage or Bfigadigc
Seventy,and the Narayaiigal or Nareyai1gal Twelve. But the inscrip
tion commemorates grants made much earlier,viz . in Saka 872 (mn950 the Saumya san
’
watsara. Pérmiididéva’
s capital was Rumba
ruge or Rambirage,which I have not been able to trace on the
map .
No. II,again belongs to the time of Pérmfididéva I,now also
called J agadékamalla-Pérmadidéva,being at this time the subor
dinate of the Chalukya king Jagadékamalladéva. 1" This inscr iption,
also,commemorates a grant made long before,viz . in the Sitdhiirana
W atson ,to which the same year of the Saka era is allotted as is
allotted in the preceding inscription to the Saumya smiwatsara . The
Sanmyo and Sitdhiirana san‘
walsaras are respectively the forty-third
and the forty-fourth years of the cycle ; and calculating back from the
present time—Saks 1797 Yuva sazi watsora,—Saka 872 was the
Si dharuna san'
watrara. In respect of the laxity of the Hindus in
frequently allotting the same year of the Saka to different smiwatsaras
of the cycle,Mr. Brown,at page 26 of his Carnatic Chronology,temurks, These discrepancies never trouble the Hindus,who care
little for the numeral as long as the title is known. They certainly
have a vulgar prejudice against specifying their exact age,the numberof their children,the sum of their cattle,or how many trees there are
in an orchard. And the same feeling seems to rule in chronology.
They punctiliously state themonth,day,hour,and moment,of thedeed recorded. and the title of the year ; but its numeral is often
omitted,andmore often wrongly stated. It is,however,observablethat the variation is seldom more than three,plus or minus. If it
is lurger,we may suspect forgery,—of which the instances rarely
occur .
’
No. III,earlier m point of date than the preceding two,belongs tothe time of Achugideva II,who was the subordinate of the Chalukya
king Vikramaditya II. His government included,when this inscriptionwas engraved,only theKisukitdu Seventy and theNareyaiigal Twelve
the Ké lavfidi Three hundred and the Bitgadage Seventy,which we findin the possession of his son Permitdidéva towards the close of the reign
o éalmass to 1049,—8ir W. Elliot.
1Sub 1000 to 1072,-Sir W. Elliot.
[0
OLD CANARESE AND SANSKRIT INSCRIPI'IONS
232 OLD CANARESE AND SANSKRIT l cmr-rrons
After that king,his younger brother,T ribhuvanamalla,—of great
prowess,equal to the Kauntéyas‘ in his might of aml,of unequalled
beauty,-became the husband of the lovely woman the ear th. KingPérmildi
"was resplendent in the world,so that,in the light of his
commanding power,his splendour,and his majesty,there are no kings
whether of earlier or of later times,who may be said to resemble him.
Hail ! While the victorious reign of the prosperous Tribhuvanamullu
déva°,—the asylum of the universe,the favourite of the world,thesupreme king of great kings,the supreme lord,themost venerable,the
glory of the Satyasrayakula’,the ornament of the Chillukyug—m
flourishing with perpetual increase so as to endure as long as the moon
and sun and stars might last
The three elder Pandava pr inces,Y udhishthira,Bhima,and Arjuna,whow ere the sons of Prithfi or Kunti,the w ife ofPandu,by the gods Dharma,Vlyu,and Indra respectively.
5 I am somewhat in doubt whether the vow el of the first syllable of thisname is by nature long or short. In the Old Canarese alphabet the forms ofo’and é,’ as also of o and 6 and frequently of ‘t
’
and are preciselyalike ; and in the case of Canar ese proper names and old words and forms it isoften difficult to decide whether the part icular vowel used is short or long,unless the word occurs in a metrical passage and in such a manner that themetre itself decides the quantity of the doubtful vowel. The name Permldi isevidently connected w ith ‘
p é rme,’ afiection,fame,pr ide,the vowel of the first
syllable ofwhich is,on the author ity of Sanderson’s dictionary,long by nature,
é’
,not e’: in line 22ofNo. III wemeet w ith the name ina cor rupted form,
Hommadi,just as we have hemme’as the more modern form of ‘pdrms
’
; we
also have,as intermediate for ms,Farms in line 22 of No. II and line 9 of
No. IV—Pemma in line 27 and line 29 ofNo. V,—and Pemmddi in line 48 ofthe same. The name may also be wr itten Paramardi,e. g. in the Halsi stoneinscr iption (see page 279,line 5,of Vol. IX,No. XXVII,of the Societ ’
B
J ournal) and probably in line 14 ofNo. IV of the present inscr iptions. 0
forms given in Prof. MonierWilliams’Sanskrit Dictionary are Farmddi and Par
mfindi in this case the a must stand for an or iginal short e.
’But wherever
I have met w ith the name Pé rmsdi in inscriptions in the Kllyastha or Grantha
characters,the é is retained and is ofcourse long . With regard to theM luroof the Old Canar ese alphabet to distinguish between the forms of
‘e and ‘J ’
and of o and I may mention that the same occurs fr e
quently in Canarese
MSS. of any age,even though the oldest characters are not moth—and especiallyin metrical passages,where the indication aff ordedby a. know ledge of the metrois supposed to be snilicient to save the w r iter the t rouble of adding the distin
gniebing mark of the long vow el ; it is probably the laxity on this point that
leads many nat ive scholar s to miqpronounce one of the endings of the Old
Canarese locative,in r eading,for instance,karnwyt‘
l l’instead of kai-mayo!
)
a.
r efer ence to any metr ical passage,not to mention any author itative grammar,would teach them that this cnding, ol
’,is short,and it is of course a remnantof Ola. or of ofage,
’w ithin.
0 The eht lulcya king Vikmmhditya 11,Saks.ass—1049 ; S ir w. Elliot.
7 Satyfléraya.
’he i n whom tr uth i s inherent,was the name acquired by the
Chlllnkya king Pnliké éi I or Pulikési 11,and the Chfilukya family is hencecalled the Satyft
'
sraya-kula.
236 OLD CANARESE AND SANSKRIT mscmr'rions
them to perfection ; he who is possessed of characteristic marks that
are completely auspicious ; he who is praised by poets,by wits,and by craters ; he who is the receptacle of a number of good
qualities ; he who has for the ornament of his ears the listening
to the Saiva traditions ; he who is the support of all learned men ;
he who is the preceptor of inexhaustible benefits to others ; he who
is brave even without any one to help him ; he who is as conver
sant as Chanakya“with the many expedients of the art of govern
ment ; he who never breaks his word ; he who is well versed in the
science of arms and other excellent accomplishments ; he who is the
leader in the battle-field ; he who is a very Samkrandana 1° in
enjoying all objects of enjoyment ; he who is a very Ravinandana
in respect of his complete liberality he who is a very T rinétra”to
(destroy) numbers of forts of many kinds ; he whose achievements arelike those of the first of kings
“; he who is a very cage of thunderbolts
to (protect) those who take refuge with him ; who is as one of the
elephants of the quarters among chieftains‘ he who delights in
enjoying the sentiments of poetry and singing ; he who has acquired
the excellent favour of the deity of the original shrine’
,—impartiallypunishing the wicked and protecting the good was ruling,at his capitalofRambarage
”,with thediversionof joyful conversations,the KisukfiduSeventy,the Kelavadi Three-hundred,the Bfigadige
“ Seventy,andtheNarayaiigal
" Twelve,—and,preserving the ancient faiths,wasmanifesting his tenderness in saying,whenever any religious occasion present
ed itself,that every religion should have its deed of gift
The minister of Chandragupta and reputed author of a work on moralsand the principles of administration.
15 Indra.
1° Karna,the son of Kunti by the Sun,before her marriage w ith Panda,and so the elder half-brother of the Pandava princes. He was renowned forhis generosity.
‘7 The three-eyed é iva who destroyed the three strong cities of gold,silver,and iron,in the sky,air,and ear th,of a celebrated demon.
18.fidirdja,’ thefirst king —Manu,or Prithu.
ti e. who is a most excellent and brave chieftain.
’
9 ° In No. II,line 34,the name is spelt Rambirage.1“ In No. II,line 33,and in No. V,line 54,the name is spelt Bagadage ; in
No. IV,line 11 it occurs again as Bflgadige.
”2 Other forms of the name in the present inscriptions are Nareyangal,Narayagal,Nareyagal,and Nurigal. Possibly the etymology is auriya-kal
the stone of the jackal.
RELATING ro rm: smnavausa CHIEFTAINS . 237
The radiant country ofKuntalh is esteemed the chief ornament ofthe land of Bharata in the world which is encircled by the ocean ; and
in it Narayagal,laden with fruits,is very charming. Very lovely is it
w ith its flower-gardens which diffuse many divine odours,with its cooltanks which confer the most exquisite pleasures,w ith its numberless
groves,and with its rice and other juicy grains,the fragrance ofwhichpervades the regions charming is it to travellers,and best in the
whole earth,and very much to be sought after .
On the occasion of an eclipse of the moon,when the sun was com
mencing his progress to the north,on Monday,the day of the full
n oon of the bright fortnight of the month Pushya of the Saumya
cmhvataara,being the year of the Saka 872,Mundeyara-Srimanta
giivunda”,—hav ing caused Prabhugavundu
" ,who was intent upon
maintaining religion and was a man of innumerable pious deeds in the
two parties“
of Narayailgal,which was thus charming,to build a
temple of the deitv of the original shrine in the middle of the southern
part of the village,—gave to Nilakanthapanditadéva,with libationsofwater,for the arigabluiya of the god,some land which was a grant
to be respected by all and anoffering to (the god) Parameévaradé va,d the locality of which is z—Four heaps of stones above graves
“ot
Kim-Narigul" ,together with (stones bearing the emblems of a Imga
and asceties and a cow,were set up (as boundary-marks) to the
thirty-six m-xl tars (of land) which were allotted,free of all rent
and free from all Opposing claims,to be continued as long as the moon
and sun and stars might last,to the N. of the road to Muduvolal" ,to the S. of (the field of) Navayavala,to the E. of the rent-free
service-land of Vttsiga‘
ivunda,and to the W. of some land on which
revenue was paid. Four heaps of stones above graves of Kim-Narigal,together with (stones bearing the emblems ot) a [hiya and ascetics and
‘3 See note to line 46 of the text.
Bala'
; see note 45 to No. VII of the Ratta Inscriptions at page 285 of
V0]. X,No. XXIX,of the Soc iety’s J ournal. Both the meanings of bala
’are
illustrated in the present inscription.
Guide" see note 17 to the translation ofNo. III of the Betta Inscriptions
referred to above.
K im-Nur igal,KiruoNar igal,K ir -Nur igal,or K ir i-Nar igal is the smaller ormore moder n Narigul as distinguished from l iir i-Narigul or Il ir iya-Nar igal,thelarger or older Na rigal. The modern terms are 11m ’
and Clukka,’ as Hir i
Bfigewadi and Chikkn-Bz‘
tgewadi.
‘7 Probably the modern Mut ,the chief town of the Native State of the
m e name in the Southe rn Maratta Count ry.
244 on) CANARESE AND SANSKRIT mscmm‘rons
before him (and thus werehis allies and tributaries),having taken possession of the territories of the hostile kings,and having charminglyacquired that power that springs from pleasing and virtuous actions,king Acha,the lover of the lovely woman Fortune,the abiding-place ofall happiness,became very famous. At the command of the universal
emperor Vikrama,he,a very lion in war and shining like the hot-rayed
sun,sounding his war-cry,pursued and prevailed against Peyanis,tookGave,put to flight Lakshma in war,valorously followed after Pandya,dlSpc Cd at all times theMalapas,and seized upon the
°
Kor°
1kana.
His son z—Conquering the cities of his brave foes'
,vanquishingnumbers of kings intoxicated with pride,possessed ofmany countr ies
acquired by his arm,menacing the fierce dawning might ofhostile
kings,avoiding that sin which springs from the influence of the Kali
age,performing great achievements against his enemies whose thunderings were silenced,a very sun to (disperse ) the darkness which was
( the inimical ) great chieftains,—such was Permadidéva. Possessingthe fierce heat of the sun of the white lotuses of the Sindakulaf—aothat the blue lotuses of the regal fortunes of kings who bent not down
before him closed their flowers,so that the darkness which was the
poverty of excellent and learned men faded away,so that the white
lotuses which were the faces of such kings as came to his feet began to
expand while the majesty of other kings grew dim,and so that he
pervaded the whole earth which is bounded by the quarters of the
regions and the sky,—king Permiidi vanquished Kulafiékharfliika,gloriously besieged Chatta and took his head with a sword ( to beheadhim alarmed and pursued J ayakési,seized upon the royal power of
Poysala who was the foremost of fierce rulers of the earth,and acquiredthe reputation of being himselfproof against all reverses. Going to the
mountain-
passes of the maraudcr Bittiga,plundering him,besiegingt irasamudra,and,pursuing him till hearrivedat and took the city of
Bé lupura,king Perma’,of great glory,—driving him before himwith
the help of his sword,arriv ing at the mountain-pass of Viihadi. and
overcoming all obstacles,—acquired celebrity in the world. Pursuingand seiz ing in war the friends,(mighty) as elephants (though theywere),of the kings who joined king Bittiga in the work of slaughter,
The name l’fn'mfidi occurs in th is form also in line 9 ofNo. IV and m in
in lim 3 ml'
nu Gallialli inscr iption published at page 296 ofVol. IX,No. 137 11o f t il " Socim J ournal.
assu me we ran e DAVAirsA maximum. 245
(Permitdi,) unequalled in his great impetuousity,brought them (backas captives) with derisive cheers.
’
Ilall While the fortunate Mahamandaléévsra king Permz‘
ididé va
who was adorned with the titles commencing with The Great Chief
tain who has attained the five Bl ahdéabdas he who is the lord of the
goddess of generosity and bravery ; he who is the sun of the white
lotuses of theSindakula ; hewho isa veryKamadéva among chieftains 3
he who,mounted on restive horses,is skilled in training them to perfec
tion ; he who is possessed of characteristic marks that are completelyauspicious ; he who is praised by poets,by wits,and by orators ; he
who is the receptacle of a number of good qualities he who has
for the ornament of his ears the listening to the Saiva traditions he
who is the support of all learned me11 ; he who is the preceptor of
inexhaustible benefits to others ; he who is brave even w ithout any
one to help him he who is as conversant as Chanakya w ith the manyexpedients of the art of government he who never breaks his word ;
he who is well versed in the science of arms and other excellent
accomplishments ; he who is the leader in the battle-field he who
is a verv Samkrandana in enjoying all objects of enjoyment he who is
a very Ravinaudana in respect of his complete liberality ; he who is a
verv T rinétra to (destroy) numbers of forts ofmany kinds ; he whose
achievements are like those of the first of kings ; he who is a very cage
of thunderbolts to (protect) those who take refuge with him he who
is as one of the elephants of the quarters among chieftains he who
delights m enjoying the sentiments ofpoetry and singing he who has
acquired the most excellent favour of the god Sri-Sai1karadeva’
,— im
partially punishing the wicked and protecting the good,was ruling,at his capital of Rambirage,with the diversion ofjoyful conversations,the K isukadu Seventy,the Ké lavz
‘
idi Three-hu ndred,the BagadageSeventy,and the Nareyahgal Twelve
The radiant country of Kuntala is esteemed the chief ornament of
the land of Bharata in the world which is encircled by the ocean ; and
in it Narayagal,laden with fruits,is verv charming.
On the occasion of an eclipse of the sun on Thursday the day of the
new moon of themonth Karttika of the Siidharana san’
walsara,beingthe year of the Saka 872,T ippanayyaniiyaka of IIiriya-Ilaunasu of
3 ‘Analttj t,’
of which I have not been able to obtain an explanatmn as a
scpz zi ran w on ],would appca1 to be connected ctvmo lugically w ith ‘anakuu
'
to
mm}.
246 OLD CANAREsE AND smsxmr rNscamnons
the southern part ofNareyaiigal which was thus charming,gave,withlibations of water,to Trilfichanapandita,on behalf of the god Tip
panéévaradéva,thirty mattars of Aravans in his rent-free service
land of IIannasu to the E. of Kuyyaballa,to the N. of the road to
Mfidapadahola,and to the S. of the rent-free service-land called
Teneyabala ; at the four corners four heaps of stones above graves of
Kim-Narigal,together with (stones bearing the emblems to ) a Inigo
and ascetics and a cow,were set up (as boundary-marks). The
shrine of the god is to the E. of thegate called Srivagilu,to theW. of
the fort,to the N. of the rent-free service-land called Gavundabals,and to the S . of the king
’
s highway ; at the four corners are four
heaps of stones above graves of Kir'
n-Narigul . Tippanayya set apart
one oil-mill for the purposes of the god. Four heaps of stones above
graves of K im-Narigul (are the boundary-marks) to one matter of
rent-free garden-land (that was given to the god) to the E. of the
road to J akile and to the S . of the rent-free land of the god Sr:Abéévaradéva.
To the W . of the road to J akile and to the N . of the garden-land
of (the god) Sdbagéévara,Devagz‘
ivunda’
gave one mattar of rent-free
garden-land,(the boundary-marks ofwhich are) four heaps of stones
above graves ofKim-Narigal.
The (corporation of) Sixteen and the (corporation of) Eighteen of
that place,and the (members of the religious body of) the locality of
the five Mamas,shall preserve the grants thus specified as long as the
moon and sun shall last.
Hail ! The fortunate king Jagadékamalla-Pérmiidideva,having deliberated on this act of piety
9 See note 1' to line 45 of the text.
1° See note I to line 48of the text.
[00:
0 OLD CANARESE AND SANSKRIT INSCRIP’I’IONS
No. III.l
Reverence to Sambhu,who is replendent with a chowri which is the
moon that lightly rests upon his lofty head,and who is the foundation
pillar for the erection of the city of the three worlds !
Hail ! While the victorious reign of the prosperous Tribhuvana
malladéva,—the asylum of the unigerse,the favourite of the world,the supreme king ofgreat kings,the supreme lord,the most venerable,the glory of the Satyaérayakula,the ornament of the Chalukyas—wasflourishing with perpetual increase,so as to endure as long as themoon
and sun and stars might last,at the capital of Jayantipura',with the
diversion of joyful conversations,he who subsisted (as a bee) on thelotuses which were his feet (was)
Hail ! The fortunateMahamandalesvarakingAcha,who was adorned with all the glory of the names of ‘The Great Chieftain who has
attained the five Maha'
éabdas,he who is a very Bhogiévara' in respect
of his pleasures,he who is a very sun (in respect of his hostility) tothe blue lotuses of the race of Kusava,he who is a mine of truth,hewho is a very second Dharmanandana‘,he who resembles Sarhkran
dana in his power,he who is the mightiest of chieftains who attack
when they discover a weak point,he who is a very Gandabhérunda‘,
he who plunders hostile chieftains,0,he who is resolute in war,he who is the
first of warriors and kings,he who naturally has the odour of musk,he who delights in liberality,he who supports men of letters,he whois the glory of brave men,he who is the lion of the prosperousTribhu
vanamalladéva,he who strikes the palms of the hands of hostile chief
tains.
’ Whilst he,with the diversion of joyful conversations,was
1 This inscr iption is from a stone-tablet built into the wall on the right of thedoor of the temple ofMollebrahmadeva at Kodiko pa a hamlet ofNar in theBen Teluka of the Dharwad Distr ict. The emb ems at the top of a stone
are —In the centre,a l ir'
iga ; to the right of it,a priest with a cow and calfbeyond
b
him,and over them the sun ; to the left of it,a figure of Basava with themoon a ove it.
An old name of Banawflsi .3 The king of serpents,—S6sha,or Yesuki .4' Yudhishthira.
5 A fabulous bird w ith two heads which preys on the flesh ofelephants.
AmmanMakci ru’,—meaning not known.
256 OLD CANARESE AND sansxmr 1Nscarm ons
No. IV.
l
Reverence to Sambhu,who is resplendent with a chowrs'
which is
themoon that lightly rests upon his lofty head,and who is the foundation-
pillar for the erection of the city of the three worlds ! Reve
rence toSambhu,whose spirit is composed of eternal joy and knowledge
and power,and who is the chief stay of religious knowledge which
becomes fruitful through the exercise ofmental determination !
Hail ! While the victorious reign of the prosperous and valorous
universal emperor J agadekamalladéva—the asylum of the universe,the favourite of the world,the supreme king of great kings,the eu
preme lord,the most venerable,the glory of the Satyiiérayakula,theornament of the Chz
’
ilukyas,—was flourishing with perpetual increase
so as to endure as long as themoon and sun and stars might last,hewho subsisted (as a bee) on the lotuses which were the feet of that
mighty potentate (was)
The brave king P15rma’,—the son of the chieftain Achugi,a very
thunderbolt to themountains which were the fierce hostile chieftains,possessed of unequalled manliness,—who,enveloping the whole world
with his great glory so that it was said that he could not be described
in words by any one,was waited upon by the preeminence ofhis fame.
IIail ! \Vhlls the fortunateMahz‘
imandaléévara king JagadékamallaPém fididéva—who was decorated with his own titles of the Great
Chieftain who has attained the five Maha'
s'
abrlas,he who is a veryMahéévara to (destroy) Love in theform ofhostile chieftains,’—punishing the wicked and protecting the good,was ruling at his capital,withthe diversion of joyful conversations,the district of Kisukftdu,thedistrict of Bagadige,the district of Kélaviidi,and the district of
Nareyagal
He who preserved and governed him was king Paramardi
Brahméévara,the Unborn was ever respectfully worshipped by
1 This inscription is from a stone-tablet built into the wall on the left ofthesame door of the temple of Mollc-Brahmadeva on the r ight of which is No. III.The emblems at the tsp of the stone are -1n the centre,a lingo and a pr iest ;to the r ight of it,a figure ofBasava,beyond which is the sun ; and to the left ofit,a cow and calf,beyond which is the moon .
See note 5 to the translation ofN0. II.
3 See not e 6 to the t1m1slation ofNo. 11.
t The god Brahma.
264 OLD CANARESE AND SANSKRIT INSCBIPTIONB
OLD CANARESE AND SANSKRIT INSCRIP’I’IONS266
w3
8Ma
yhe
m”3m
268 OLD casaarsn AND smsxarr inseam-loss
Many (kings),—who were the jewelled earrings of the race of the
Chalukyas ; who were considered to be the receptacles of endless
happiness ; and who were as mighty as lions in reading asunder the
heads of the infuriated elephants that were their foes,—governed it .
Among them (was)Hail —Soma,the son of king Vikramfiiika,—who was the beauti
ful autumn moon of the sky which was the prosperous family of the
Chalukyas ; who was worthy to be praised by the whole world ; who
was possessed of wealth that sufiiced to gratify the desires of lovelywomen who placed the lotuses which were his feet on the heads of
the kings of Andhra,Dravila,Magadha,and Népfila ; who was laudedby all learned men whowas a very king Sarvajfia
’among kings.
His son,J agadékamaHm—whom no one dared oppose ; who was
endowed with all good qualities ; who was a valorous universal emperor
who was renowned ; and who was the destroyer of hostile rulers of the
earth—was glorious.
His younger brother was Ndrmaditaila—who was kind towards
those who were skilled in rending asunder the infuriated elephants that
were his proud foes ; who had for a banner his good and spotless fame ;who was ever eager for the taste ofwar .
Hewhoplayed the part of a bee in ever being in attendance upon the
lotuses which were his feet was king Chfivundm—who was born in the
Sindakula ; who was the lord of all the proud universal rulers of the
earth who was esteemed a very Partha’among fortunate kings. Vic
torious is he,the king who excels in impetuosity,—who is the stage
for the dances of the dancing-
girl who is the.{goddess of victory ;
who has conquered (in) the battle-held ; who has broken the pride
of arm of his enemies who excels in the virtue of generosity ; whose
mind contains all knowledge ; who associates w ith learned men of
various kinds. Hail ! the brave king Chavunda is the sun of the
white lotuses which are those who are born in the Sindavafi a ; the
lotuses which are his feet are shaken to and fro by the many head
ornaments of the kings who bow down before him he has driven out
numbers of his enemies ; he is worthy to be praised by the kings of
Gfirjara,Andhra,Dravila,Magadha,Nepali; and other countries ; his
7 Sarvajfla’
,omniscient,is an epithet of é iva I do notknow ofany particnll lking to whom this epithet is applied.
0 A metronymic ofYudhishthira,Bhtma,or Arjuna.
autu mn ro run smnavu’
rsa cursrrams. 9
glory is perpetual he is possessed of a very powerful army. And the
lineal descent of this same Great Chieftain king Chavundadéva is
Glorious was king dchagi,who was esteemed the glory of the
Sindakula—who broke down the courage of the hostile chieftains ;
who was possessed of stability equal to that of the mountain Mandara
who was a very Purarhdara in respect ofhis might whowas possessed
of unequalled prowess.
The uterine brother of the thus-mentioned chieftain dchugi wasking Na
‘
ika,who was a very Wielder of the thunderbolts towards
themountains which were the arrogant and brave hostile kings ; (and
also) king Sirhha,and king Dai sa,and king Dama who abounded with
the valour of fierce demeanour,and king Chavunda,and king Chz‘
tva
who was a very Chfirudatta"to supplicants.
The famous king Bamma was born,amidst the praises of mankind,to king Acha among them,and,becoming a universal emperor,he se
quired distinguished power and eminence of bravery.
His onager brother was king Smga,and his son was the famous
king ha,who was renowned in the world,—who was as it were a
second Mandhiita and who was endowed with surpassing courage.
How shall we liken the arrogant crowds of chieftains to king Acha
who,having proudly and valorously given Gove and Uppinakatte to the
flames,made the kings ofKaliiiga andVanga andMaru and Gurjara and
Mi lan and Chem and Chile (subject) to his sovereign,so that he
might say to them,with such a command as is used in the case of
thosewho are subject to compulsory and unpaid labour,Walk on,0slave In his surpassing brilliance they wereall burned up,so that notone king
'
s town remained to be enumerated in the districts of Kalingaand Vanga who were foolhardy enough to withstand in war king Achawho,in such awayas to be compared with a demon,first swallowed andthen vomited forth Bhoja together with his troops which had invaded
his country
The destroyer of cities,'
- Indra.
Indra.
Perhaps the character of this name in the drama ofMrichchhakatikd.
Le. Siriga’s.
i s An ancient king,the son of Yuvantsva.
270 OLD CANARESE AND sw sxmr mscarrr rous
The son of king richa who was thus famous was king Pemma who
was a veryKalpa-tree (in respect of his liberality) to panegyrists ; who
was praised by good people who was as it were a second Bhoja who
was pleasing to mankind by reason of his daring. Having frightened
and put to flight the lordHoysala whohad ruled with severity over the
countries of Chengiri,Chéra,Chola,Malaya,Maleyel,Tulu,Kolla,and
Pallava,the city of Kobguna,and the countries of Banavdse and
Kadambale and IIayve,the braveking Pemma seiz ed inwar amultitude
of infuriated elephants.
Il is younger brother was king Chfivunda who was very famous,who was possessed of good qualities ; who was dear to his bride that
was his spotless fame ; who was avoided by the hostile kings who
bowed not down before him who was without a rival . Tell me now,who are there who have acquired sufficiently great courage to with
stand king Chfivundawhen they consider that his pastime is to frighten
and pursue the hostile kings who how not down before him,and thenin his wrath to assail their wealth,their substance,their chariots,theirtroops of w ives,their temples,their tents,and their countries ? In
respect of his great devotion he was a very Lotus-born
‘“ taking up
his resolute stand in war he pierced (his enemies) like Anaiiga1°
; he
was verily (to be likened to) Dhanada upon the earth ; he was,if youregard it,praised and learned —if,then,you give him his full meed
ofpraise,how is it wonderful that the king Chavunda is called a very
god upon earth If the hostile kings with (the proclamation of) theirtitles opposed king Chavnnda,they (were straightway ingloriously
put to flight and so) departed without the honourable decoration of
their entrails (torn out in a glorious death) and without enjoying theembraces of the arms of the nymphs of heaven (who are the reward of
such as die bravely) . If any one opposed him in the world,then thebrave king Chi wanda,-whose spreading radiance was like that of the
sun,and who protected the kings as the ocean did the mountains that
fled to it for shelter,—whcn he was angry,was like him who con
quered the three cities,so that the battle-field was scorched up justas the body (ofKfunadéva) was burned up amidst the crackling of the
consuming flames of the terrible eye in his forehead. The white fame
of the brave chieftain Chavunda,—who conferred happiness uponman
kind who darkened (with sorrow for the death of their husbands)
H llmhma.
1 The incorporcal one,’ —Ka
‘imadova,the god of love.
272 ou n ces AND sansxarr mscerer ross
punish) if they prostrate themselves and ask him for protection,but,ifthey meet him in enmity,he is a very open
-eyed Java or an angryserpent
-king,or a heaped-up fire,or a thunderbolt that falls till it
strikes its mark,or an enraged lion,or Death in front of one,orMari who consumes everything as she pursues.
While the fortunate Great Chieftain the brave king Chfivnndadéva,—who excelled 1n impetuosityandwho was very terribleby reason of the
might of his arm,—in conjunction with the princes—who were in this
fashion the abiding-places of glory and the objects of praise,—was
ruling,with the diversionofjoyful conversations,the Kisukadu Seventy,the Bagadage Seventy,the Kélavadi Three-hundred,and several otherdistricts,if you ask after the excellence of Pattadakisu
'
volal which
was the city of the regency of theA
ehief queen,the fortunate Demaledevi,and the prince the fortunate Achidéva
The district of K isukfidu,which was like the forehead of the lovely
woman who was the country of Kuntaia,was excellent and charmingand in it the city of K isuvolal,which might be called its jewelleddiadem,was very beautiful even Vasugi can never properly praise
the country that surrounds that town. Is there any holy place on the
surface of the earth that surpasses Kisuvolal which was theplace of the
coronation ofNriga,andNahusha.andNale,andPurfirava,andSagara,and other kings ? With its groves that are carefully tended,with its
pellucid tanks set round with flowers,with its sacred river called the
Malahari,with its fertile fields,with its beds ofwater-lilies,andwith itsswarming cuckoos and parrots and Chakora birds and cranesand geese,Kisuvolal is truly very charming. With its shrines of Bhava“,itsshrines of the Lotus-born,and its perfect shrines of the son of
Vasudeva,K isuvolal is verily the earthly birth-place of the goddess of
fortune.
While the chief queen,the fortunate Demaladévi,and the prince. thefortunate Achidéva,were happily governing as regents the capital of
Pattadakisuvolal which has been thus described—having deliberatedon the continuance of the pious grants that were made there by former
Yams,the god of death .
‘3 The goddess ofpestilence.
Probably the old form of the name ofPattadakal itself.‘5 The serpent
-king VAsuki,who has two thousand tongues.
‘0 giva.
K rishna, Vishnu.
sau nas'ro ran smnavar
’
réa emu -rams. 273
kings who were intent upon preserving religion,—ou a holy lunar daywhich combined a vyatfpdté with an eclipse of the moon,on Mondaythe day of the full-moon of the bright fortnight of themonth Jyeahtha of the Subhfinu amiwatsara,which was the year of the Saka one
thousand and eighty-four,—having washed the feet of Sri—Stlryfi
bhan na-panditadévm—they allotted,free of all opposing claims,tothe god the holy Vijayé évaradéva who was the representation on earth
of the holy Viévéévaradéva of K isuvolal which was esteemed the
Vi ranr‘
ii i of the south" ,three hundred matte rs in the circle of Mr‘
i
nikéi vara for the purpose of the arigablrdga and rar’
rgablrb‘
gc of the god
Si -Vijayé‘varadéva,and for the nourishment and clothing of the
priests of that place ; the four boundaries of that land are,-On the
E.,the lands of Ayyahole are the boundary ; on the S .,the river
Malaprahr‘
iri is the boundary ; on the W .,a stone called the stone of
the great elephant is the boundary ; and on the N. the hill called
Pam labetta is the boundary : there is one mattar of wet-crop-land
in it. To the E. of the village (there was given) one matter of
garden-land. and to the S . of Dévarapura
four oil-mills.
Déinaladévi and the fortunate prince Achideva granted to the agricul
turista of that place privileges and contributions and cattle and rent
frcc service-lands and houses and taxes. And the merchant Phéliya
actti of that country allotted a Irdg im'
And the ropomakers allotted one rim and one
l lgr’
ai’. And of the K isukddu
Seventy allotted one mdna on each large basketful of
and two mdmu on each three loads of a porter . May it be
as A hill in the neighbourhood ofBSdAmi and Pattadakal is so covered w ith
In ga as to be still called Dakahinakdéi,the K“! or Bcnarcs of the south'
.
”dash—the measure intended hero is probably a handful but mdm '
ma ns also afarteen were.
See note to line 75 of the text.
I
O‘l
C)
OLD CANARESE AND SANSKRIT INSCRIPTIONS
No. VI.
1
Reverence to Sambhu,who is resplendent with a chowr i which is
the moon that lightly rests upon his lofty head,and who is the foun
dation-pillar for the erection of the city of the three worlds
Hail ! He,the most excellent one,—(the colour ofwhose body is
as) black as a bee,and whose feet are placed upon the substantial rays
of the tiaras of all the happy immortals who bow down before him,acquired both the earth and the ocean .
The ocean,-fromwhich themoon arose which is the home of the
goddess of fortune ; which is adorned with the mountains that fled to
it for protection which is the place of the production of ever-new
jewels and the surface of which is the favourite couch ofMukunda,is marked,as ifwith a Signet,with (the earth which is) the habitation
ofmen which is decorated with plungings into the waters of rivers
which are
i
vocal through their lines of surging waves caused by the
motion of the fishes which are driven to and fro by the play of the
tortoises and the Pathina fishes and the alligators and crowds of ele
phants mad with passmn.
To the south of the mountain Méru,which is esteemed the tiara
of the earth which is charming as being considered to have that same
ocean for the girdle that encircles its waist. there is the good and
spotless land of Bharata and to the south of this there is the charm
ing country ofKuntala.
Many (kings),—who were the jewelled earrings of the race of the
Chalukyas ; who were considered to be the receptacles of endless happi
ness and who were as mighty as lions in rending asunder the heads of
the infuriated elephants that were their foes,—governed it .
Hail ! The brave king Chavunda is the sun of the white lotuses
which are those who are born in the Sindavarhéa ; the lotuses which
arehis feet are shaken to and fro by the many head-ornaments of the
kings who bow down before him he has driven out numbers of his
1 This inscription is edited from Plate No. I ofMr . HOpe’
s work referred to in
Note 1to No. V. The original is a stone-tablet in a Saiva temple at A ihole in
the B unagund Talukfl of the Kaladgi District. The emblems at the top of the
tablet are - In the centre,a standing figure of a god or goddess which I am
unable to particular iz e ; on the right of it,two indistinct seated figures,W ith thesun above them ; and on the left of it,a cow and a calf,wi th the moon above
them.
RELATING TO rns srsmvméa carsrrams. 277
enemies he is worthy to be praised by the kings of Gurjara,Andhra,Dravila,Magadha,Népfila,and other countries his glory is perpetual
he is possessed of a very powerful army. Victorious is he,the kingwho excels in impetuosity,—who is the stage for the dances of the
dancing-
girl who is the goddess of victory who has conquered (in) thebattle-field ; who has broken the pride of arm of his enemies ; who
excels in the v irtue ofgenerosity ; whosemind contains all knowledge
who associates with learned men of various kinds. Tell me now,whoare there who have acquired sufficiently great courage to withstand
king Chavundawhen they consider that his pastime is to frighten and
pursue the hostile kings who bow not down before him,and then in hiswrath to assail their wealth,their substance,their chariots,their troopsof wives,their temples,their tents,and their countries ?
And if you ask for a description of the glory,which extended to the
ten regions,of Siriyadévi who was the wife of the fortunate Great
Chieftain king Chavunda who has been thus described —Mankind
praise Siriyadévi,the virtuous wife of king Chevunda,. saying that
she is a very Arundhati in respect of devotion to her husband,a very
Bharati in respect of her wisdom,and a very Rati in respect of her
beauty.
While the princes,the brave Bijjaladéva and Brj ravadéva (l),—whowere (born to) the thus described Siriyiidévi and king Chavunds,andwho were the abiding
-
places of glory and the objects of praise,—were
governing,with the diversion of joyful conversations,the KisukaduSeventy,the Bagadage Seventy,and the Kélavadi Three-hundred,
the Virfidhi smiwatsara,(being the year of the Saks era)and four,
280 THE AGE or THE NAISHADHiYA.
4tt —Rajaéekhara states incidentally in another part of his
work that the first copy of the Naishadht'
ya was broughtinto Gujarat by Harihara during the reign of Rana Viradha
vala (cir ca 1235 and that the latter chief’
s minister
Vfistupfila obtained a copy of it.
I admitted,however,that Rajaéekhara’
s narrative was not in everyrespect trustworthy. I mentioned also that Dr . FitzEdward Hall as
setted the occurrence of a quotation or quotations from theNaishadlriya
in the Saraw atikazzjkdblrarana of Bhoja of Dharfi,composed in the
first half of the l l th century. But I stated that the latter assertion
required verification,as the quotation might have been interpolated bya later hand.
Against this the following objections have been brought forward. Myfriend Mr . K . T . Telang,who in the course of an inquiry into the age
of Udayanachz‘
irya,the author of the Kuw mdnj alifi was led to discuss
Sriharsha’s times,arrived at the conclusion that Sriharsha must be
placed in the 9th or l0th century,not in the 12th . The reasons given
by him for this conclusion are
lstly—That Sr iharsha’s Naishadlziya is quoted in the Saracens“
kap thdbharapa .
2ndly—That Vz‘ichaspatimrsra,a writer of the eleventh century,wrote a refutation of Sriharsha’s philosophical work,theKhapdanakkagzdakkddya.
3rdly—Sayana-Mzidhava in the Sankaravyaya names Sfiharshaas one of the contemporaries of the great Vedantist.
Mr . Telang finally denies the credibility of Bfijaéekhara’
s story,because he is obviously inaccurate ia many details.
In addition to the points brought forward by Mr . Telang,Mr.
Growsei‘ has called attention to a passage of the P r itirirdj Bdada in
which Chand,who is said to have lived at the end of the 12th century,and,if Rfrjasekhara
’
s story be true,must personally have known Sri
harsha,places in an enumeration of his predecessors the Sriharsha who
celebrated king Nala before Kalidfrsa.
Two other w riters in the Indian Antiquary,Bfibu Rfimdfis Sen and
Mr . I’firnaiya,have defended my views. or rather Riijaéekhara’
s state
ment,and attempted to weaken especially the force of the objection
Ind . Ant. vol. I.,pp. 297,353.
f 1nd. Ant. vol. IL,pp. 213,306.
THE AGE or rm: narsnanniva. 281
brought forward byMr . Growse . Grateful as I am for their support,I regret that I cannot base my defence 011 the arguments advanced by
In dealingwith the objections,thosewhich are based on passages tend
ing to show that Sr iharsha was known to authors of the eleventh cen
tury claim the precedence,and among them the supposed quotation or
quotations from the Nair/md/rt'
ya in the Sarasvati rap gha'
bharana. As
regards this point,which Dr . Hall first brought forward,I am,after acareful investigation of all the poetical passages quoted in the Sarasra ti
l anMdb/tarapa,in a position to assert that no verse from the Nair/1a
dflya occurs among them. Last vear I procured from Bcnarcs a copy
of the Sarasvatikagrghdblmrap a,and of its commentary the Ratna
J a pan,which latter,however,includes the first three chapters only.
My Si str i,Mr . Vfimanachz‘
rrya J halkikar,next made a complete alpha
betical index Of the verses quoted in the work,checking one copy with
the help of the other . He then compared cverv line of the printed
copy of the Naishadhi'
ya with the index. The result Obtained is that
stated above. \Vith this meth od of Operation I think it very unlikely
that Mr . Vfimanfrcharya should have made amistake,and this is somuch less probable as Dr . Aufrecht,who in the Catalogue ofOxford MSS. gave a list of the authors and works quoted in the Saras
valfkagrglca'
bharapa,was likewise unable to trace the Naislzadhfya in
it. Dr . FitzEdward llall’
s statementmust therefore either be based on
a mistake or on an interpolated copy.
The second objection,that Vfichaspatimisra,a writer Of the eleventhcentury,w rote a refutation ofSriharsha
’
s 117 mgalanaklmndaM rfdg/a,hasno greater force than the first. It is perfectly true that a work entitled
Khandanoddhiira has been w ritten bv a Vfrchaspatimrsra. Pandit
Vishveshvar Naval Gosvz‘
imi of Delhi possesses a copy of it,and waskind enough to show it to me 011my late v isit to the town. But there
is nothing to show that this Vfrclraspatimrsra was the author of the
eleventh century. The name Vz‘
rchaspatimisra is common to several
writers on philosophy and on law . The It'
l mgrdanoddfia'
ra is not in
cluded in the list of books Of the ancient Vedantistfi" Besides the
pandits of the Benarcs College,whom I consulted 011 the age of the
Kkapdanoddlcdra,declared that it was well known to them asamodern
work,and was composed not by the Old VachaSpati,but by a later
homonymous author .
See FitzEdwm-d l lall,Cat,11. O7 Colcbrooke,Essays,I. 532.
282 ma ass or run: NAISBADHiYA.
In the thirdplace,thepassage fromChand’
sP ritlcirflj Blade deservesconsideration. It occurs in theath stanza of the poem,which con
eludes the manbaldcharapa or invocation,and ofwhich a spirited transl ation has been given byMr . Growse. There the poet pays homage,lat,to the serpent
-king Sea/ca 2adly,to Vishnu,3rd1y,to Vydaa“My,to Sultadeva 5thly,to Sriltaraha,who on king Nola
’
s neck let
fall the wreath of victory ; tit/tly,to Kdliddca,who wrote a chronicle
of king Bhoja ”fl y,to Dapda-mali Bthly,to J ayadeva,the author
of the Gz‘tagovinda,whom he calls ‘
great names of elder fame.
’ Mr .
Growse is of opinion that the names of the poetsmentioned there stand
in chronological order,or at least that Chand intended to arrange the
poets named according to what he considered their order of succession.
Mr . Telang,whose indefatigable industry in the search for passages
bearing on the Sriharsha question cannot be enough commended,hasalready shown that Sriharsha knew Kalidt
‘
isa“ and quotes him in
the Kharzdanakhandalchddya. It is therefore impossible tomaintain
that Chand enumerates the poets in their proper order. But it would
be sufficient to make Rajaéekhara’
s story doubtful if Chand. who
certainly lived in the twelfth century,had written of Sriharsha as of a
poet of bygone ages. If,therefore,Rajaéekhara’
s story is to be main
tained as trustworthy,it must be shown either that another interpreta
tion of Chand’
s passage is admissible,or that the passage does not
belong to Chand,but to some later w riter . Inmy opinion the passage
certainly allows of an interpretation according to which it does not
stand in opposition to the assumption that Chand and Sriharaha were
contemporaries. Chand,I think,gives in the above lines not a chrono
logical catalogue,but he enumerates some of the authors best known
to him,in what he considers their order of mer it . Under this supposi
tion it is not strange that the author of the Naiahadlciya should he
placed before Kalidasa. For,to the purely native taste,the Natal edhiya appears now,and has appeared for many centuries,preferable toall the other Mahakavyas. Our Sx
‘
istris now study it more frequently,and praise it more highly,than evenKalidfisa
’
s works,and it has been
commented on more frequently than any other poem. It must not he
urged that Chand calls Sriharsha’s ‘a g reat name of elder fau c.
’For
this expression does not make it necessary to assume that be preceded
Chand by centuries. It will be explicable on the assumption that Srihar
I assume here for argument’
s sake that the KAlidl sa mentioned by Chand
and the great poet of that name are identical,though the point is open to doubt.
284 rue. ms or me musnannirs .
now been established,that Sr iharsha is not quoted in the Saraw ali'
kapghdbharana,is ofgreat significance. That work is of considerable
extent,and cites all the Maht‘
tkiivyas,as well as all other considerable
authors,upto the second half of the l l th century. I have also no
doubt that it really belongs to Bhoja of Dht‘
ira,as its colophon states,or at least to his Pandita. Considering the great reputation which
the Naiahadlti'
ya has always enjoyed,the silence regarding it is almosta proof that it did not exist in Bhoja’s time. It may be that other
works of Sriharsha will be recovered,and that we may gain therefrom
more authentic information regarding his age. The J esalmir Bhfindz‘
ir
containedonly ninetyyears ago a copy of his Sdhasdnlcacharita,thoughit is not to be found there any longer . We may therefore hope that
one of the other old Bha‘
tndti rs of our Presidency will furnish the book,or that the lost J esalmir copy may still turn up. But until the time
that such fuller and more trustworthy information is forthcoming,1shall hold that Ib
‘
tjaéekhara’
s statement that Sriharsha lived under
J ayachandra of Kanoj,which is confirmed by Sriharsha’
s mention of
the king of 19 1a as his patron,gives us reasonable grounds for fixingthe age of the Naiahadl u
‘
ya in the second half of the 12th century.
P.S.—Shortly after I had read the above paper before the Asiatic
Society,large fragments of an unknown commentary onSriharsha’
s
Mahdlcdoya,the Naiahadhadip ikd of Chdndu‘
papdita came into mybands,which furnish some additional evidence for the recent com
position of the poem.
Chdadupagzdita,who wrote his commentary in the year ofVikrama
1513 at Dholka,near Ahmadiibiid,calls the Naiahadlta a new pou r
(Irrirya u'
t He further states that in his time there existed onlyone commentary on it,composed by Vidyddhara (alias Si hitya
vidyadhara,of which I have found fragments at Jesalmir and Ahmadihad. He also confirms,in the introduction to the first sloka,thestory told by Rajaéekhara that H4 m,Sriharsha
’
s father,was conqueredin a disputation by a rival,and was avenged by his son. Accordingto Chandd the opponent of Hira was Udayana,and the mandaml bapdalclca
'
dyakhapdapa was the composition by which the latter phi
losopher’
s works were dcmolishedsr
Colophon of Sarga XXII. v. 52.
1The same tradition is also current among the Pundits ofKaimir.
ma ass or run narsm uin . 285
These statements go a great way to confirmRt’
ijaéekhara’
s statement.
But I amquite willing to admit that objections on the part of those
who wish to establish the claim of the Naishadltiya to a higher anti
quity are still possible.
In order to enable Sanskritists to judge for themselves the value of
Chiudd’
s statements,I give the beginning of the MS. and its end in
full. I regret that I am not able to entirely restore the corrupt text.
Introduction.
é sfi m lm w m
ART . VIL—An Histor ical and Archaeological Ske tch of theIsland of Angediva . BY J . GERSON DA CUNHA, &c.
Read 14th August 1675.
TH E island of Angediva is situated in 14°44
’ N. Lat. and 74°10
'
E . Long. It is about twomiles distant from the coast ofNorth Canara,and fifty
-one miles south-east ofGoa. Irregular in form,it is aboutthree miles long from north to south,and notmore than onemile broad
at its w idest part from east to west,and its area is nearly two square
miles . It appears barren and rocky on its western or sea side,butfertile and of a pleasant aspect towards the main,where some cocoanut
groves,rice-fields,and one or two orchards of themango and other fruit
trees surrounding a small town fortified by a wall,towers,and a castle,are observed. The strait which separates the island from the continent
is safely navigable,being from six to seven fathoms deep,without anyhidden shoal or sunken rock. Close to it on the outside the depth is
from ten to twelve fathoms. To the eastward of it,near the coast,aretwo rocky islets which w ith another about four miles to the south-east
contr ibute to make a pretty good roadstead,where in case of necessity a
ship may find shelter during the prevalence of the south-west monsoon.
Within this circumscribed space scenes full of dramatic incidents have
been enacted,and the picturesque beauty this isolated little spot in theArabian Sea displays,as derived from both its geographical position andother natural features,is greatly enhanced when allied to historical asso
ciations ofno littlemoment,especially that which hasmade it the themefor the classical model of the floating island ofVenus,” which is one
of themost charming episodes in the poem of Camoens. Again,whenconsidered,although summarilv,in connection w ith both its ancient
legends and medieval history,or from the earliest mystic times of the
Paranas to the days when the admiral Vasco da Gama,about the endof the 15th century,on his voyage homeward after the discovery ofthe
route round the Cape, put into one of the beautiful islands of Ange
diva”to refit his ships and supply them with wood andwater ; and the
Count of Abrantes,Dom Francisco d’
Almeida,in thebeginning of thel6th century,laid the foundation of the fortress,which he himself dis
sas'
rcn or m e rsu nn or anosotva. 289
mantled at the end of a few months ; or even as late as the time when
Abraham Shipman with his five hundred soldiers sojourned there fromApril 1663 to October 1665,and having buried in themeanwhile aboutthree hundred of his men* he put this mutilated squadron to sea,—a
time that is fraught with subjects for grave reflection,when the British
power in India was yet in its infancv,and the littoral provinces of the
latter in the height of disintegration,—thc island of Angediva com
mends itself to our attention,and deserves to be studied with more
than an ordinarv interest .
The origin of the word Angediva’
has been a topic for various ety
mological speculations. The Hindus,who believe the island to be
situated parallel to the spot where the Goparfishtra or Gort'
ishtra divi
sion of the Paraéurtimakshetra begins,consider it to be derived from
two Sanskrit words,fir/ya and (Iripa,meaning a primitive island,’in
reference to its existence previous to the reclamation of the Koiikan bythat well-known sixth araldr ofVishnu,l’araéurtima. O thers think
it to be a corruption ofthe word ‘
i atlripa,’
or the island of clarified
butter,’— this latter supposition arising from a legend,which is cur rent
among the people,to the effect that l’arasurz
'
ima intending to celebrate,after the extirpation ofthe Kshatriyas,the (kit’amedlta or horse-sacrifice,one of the most magnificent of ancient Il indu rites,'i
'
at the IIarmal
mountains in the province of l’crnem,and having failed to obtain the
clarified butter,so essential to the performance of that sacrifice,in theland newly reclaimed by him from the ocean,and which was then na
turally devoid of all such sacrificial materials,got it from the island of
Angediva : The Portuguese w riters are,however,of opinion that thename of the island is derived from ‘J nclzed iva,
’
which,they say,means‘five islands,
’
and De Barros§ confirms this opinion by stating that
there were four other islets around the principal one of the group,tomake up the number supposed to be expressed by the composition of
the word ; while really at present,as above noted,there are only three,
Hamilton'
s A New A ccount of the East Indies,Lond. 1744,vol. i .,pp. 184
at seq.
1In the Ma/ui bltdrata a very interesting description of the sacrifice w ill be
found by those who desire to learn its details.
1See W m ,chapters iv. and v .
Q Tome i .,pt. i pp. 407 r ! seq. of the Lisbon edition of 1777,and Lafitau’
s
H ist . des Desconm 'les,&c Paris,1736,tome i.,p. 163.
290 as msroarcar. AND aacnmow c tcar. sau ce
and if the fourth has disappeared w ithin the last three centuries the
fact appears to havebeen too easily forgotten. But ‘anche,’—or
‘anke,
’
as some chroniclers w rite it.—in no Indian vernacular,so far as I am
aware,means five and to have such a meaning the name should have
been I’ancha-dv ipa.
’
Another meaning of the word,and that which
has,I believe,all presumptive ev idence o n its side,is derived from
or the island of the goddess Aj ti,’
which is a synonym of
Mayaor Prakriti,and whose temple,standing on the island from verv
remote times,was,at the time of the persecutions by the Mahomedans,who had taken possession of the island,along w ith the coast ofCanara,in the year 1312 a .o removed for safety to Ankola,on the main land
near Carwar,where it is still existing. The Hindus,as w ell as other
people,are not seldom in the habit of naming places after their own
patron samts or tutelarv goddesses,-a habit that makes the latter sup
position appear themost plausible of all . The islanders.besides,appearto have been very religious,from the mention Dc Barros makes of their
attending to the holy duties (santos ofi cr’
os) with an extremely pious
z eal. *
Among the Greeks,we are told bv Murravd‘the island ofAngediva
was known by the name Lenke and it is said,again,that this was the
point where the ancient Greek merchant ships used to meet before
entering on the more fertile shores of Limer ikt‘t,or Canara and Malabar
Proper .
D'
Anv ille,however,in his map of Ancient India places the names of
Chcrsonesus and .Svsecr ieme jus t “here the Angediva cluster of islands
is situated whereas Ptolemy ass igns to these names places that appear
to correspond more correctly w ith the situation of the Andaman and
Nicobar islands,and the I t’ltcos (J urmrmlos of the Portuguese,or the
Vingorla Rocks,respectivelv,and has,besides,an Instr/a Aegidiomm,which,from its pos ition on the map and similarity of name,appearsto stand for Angediva :
Decades,p. 408.
f Murray'
s Itr t l n lt In dia,”w t. and Deser t/7L,Edit}. 1839,vol . i.,p. 67 .I In Sprnnncr Menke
'
s A tla s A l tf l ll l l t'a the name of Arqul iormn insults is dis
tinctly w ritten w hf re the Ang t «livan g roup ot is lands i s si tuated,which fact leadsto the surmi s e that the se h iatl tli may hav e been known to the classic wr iters ofthe “T at SPA ti l -0 I
’M/mum h'
coyu rp lmr Lt’l t‘
l New,Ams terd am,1606 ; and Villcent
'
s Voyage of S t a r t /amt,and I ’
t r tp lus of tire E l y/Hu ron Sea,vol. ii.,pp. 422and
or THE ISLAND or ANGEDIVA . 293
in the text,I havegiven in a.footnote below—the allusion ofIbn Batfitato Angediva cannot be substantiated. Ibn Batuta
'
s Travels,therefore,which for accuracy and trustworthiness cannot be equalled,require to
be carefully interpreted before we attempt to fill up the gap between
the reigns of the Kadambas,Buttes,and Chalukyas on the one hand,and the Mahomedan dynasties on the other,in our annals ofWestern
and on his journey to that country met w ith severe trials and long delays,was,according to h is own statement,tw ice at Sindfibur . He does not g i ve the date,but it appears that he was there between the years 1342and 1350A .D. If the
Mahomedan city ofGoa was,as st ated by the Portuguese chroniclers,built inthe ear 147 9,Ibn Batdta could not possibly have seen it in 1342and 1300,or e it was built by Mahomedans who,under MalikT ubliga,had settled in Goabetween 1312and 1367,in which year they w ere entirely driven out by Vidya
ran a Madhava,the pr imeminister of Har ihara,Rfija cf Vijayanagara. Though
in o inter val between this event and the capture ofGoaby t e Portuguese their
hostilities had not quite ceased,and in spite of the reign of the Vija dinagaradynasty,which continued for little more than a century,their skirmis ing con
tinned,until again,in 1469,Goa fell into the hands oi the Mahomcdans,andthis time those of the Bfihmani dynasty ofIfi apur,whoheld it unti l it glided awayinto the possession of the Portuguese,there i s no document to prove that eitherof these two peoples bui lt any ci ty in Goa. If the Mahoniedans built their own
town soon after the conquest in 1312,it is quite ev ident that it might have beenseen by Ibn Bati
‘
i ta. In this case the Portuguese annalists,who assign its
foundation to the year 1479,are w rong,or else the passage that refers to tho
l lahomedan town is a modern interpolation in the travels of Ibn Batdta,forthis st atement is not found in Lee
'
s tr anslation,but only in the French version
by Prof. Defrémery,under the heading Ib n Ba thutah’
s dia r ies,quoted byColonel Yulo. Another fact worth mentioning is that the Mahomedan king of
Honors and the H indu rfija ofGoa were frequently engaged in war against each
other . Ibn Batdt a w r ites I then betook myself to J anial-uddin,king of
Honore,by sea ; who,when I came near,met me and recei ved me honourably,and then appointed me a house w ith a suitable maintenance. He was
about to attend on div ine service in the mosque,and commanded me to aecom
pany h im. I then became attached to the mosque,and read daily a khatma or
tw o. A t this time the king was prepar ing an expedition against the isiand ofS indfibdr . For this purpose he had prepared two and titty vessels,which whenready he or dered me to attend w ith him for the expedition. Upon this occasionI opened the Koren in search of an omen,and in the first words of the firstleaf which I laid my hand upon was frequent mention of the name of God,andthe promise that He w ould certainly assist those who assisted H im. I was
greatly delighted w ith this,and when the king came to the evening prayertold him of it,and requested to be allowed to accompany him. He was much
surprised at the omen,and prepared to set. out in person. A fter this he w ent on
board one of the vessels,taking me w ith him,and then w e sai led. “men w e
t to the island of Sindfibdr,we found the people prepared to resist us,and a
battle was accor ding ly fought. \Ve carried the place,however,by di vinermission,by assault.
"
Again I then returned to Sindfibdr to the kingamAl-uddin,at the time when an infidel king was besieging the town w ith histr00ps. I left the place,therefore,and made for the Maldive islands,at whichafter ten days I ar rived .
See Ibn Batata’
s Travels,translated by S . Lee,Lond. 1829 ; Yule’s Cathay,
and the way ti nt/zer,Lond. 1866,pp. 444,445,and J . Gildemeister’
s Scr ip tor umA rabian dc rebas I zidicis,&c.,Bonn,1838,pp. 46,47.
291 AN HISTORICAL AND ARCHE OLOGICAL SKETCH
and Southern India. Coming as he did in themiddle of the long intervalbetween the travels ofMarco Polo (1271-94 A .D .) and the awaking of
the spirit of discovery in Portugal and the arrival of Vasco da Gama’sfleet (1486 Ibn Batuta supplies to us the place of both a com
mentator to the once obscure text of Marco Pole,and that of an
accurate,observing tourist,whose truthful remarks bear,moreover,themark of authenticity stampedon them by his successors the Portuguesewriters,to say nothing of such minor authoritieswho both preceded andfollowed him,as Bishop J ordauus ( l32l Friar Odorico (1325Nicolo Conti (1440 and others,whose accounts taken together confirmmost of his statements .
Ibn Batfita informs us circumstantial ly that he sailed from this Sindzibfir island and passed over to another smal l island near it,which,from details he gives,cannot beany other thanAngediva. He writesAfter some days we came to the island of Sindz
‘
ibi’
lr,in the interiorof which are six and thirty v illages. By this we passed,however,anddropped anchor at a small island near it,in which are a temple and a
tank ofwater. On this island we landed,and here I saw a Jogee (yogi)leaning against the wal l of the temple and placed between two idols he
had some marks about him of a religious warfare. I addressed him,but he gaveme no answer . We looked,too. but could see no food nearhim. When we looked at him he gave a loud shout. and a cocoanut
fell upon him from a tree that was there. This nut he threw to us : to
me he threw ten dinars,‘ after I had offered him a few,of which hewould not accept. I supposed him to be a Moslem : for when I addressed him he looked towards heaven and then towards the templeat Mecca,intimating that he acknowledged God and believed in
Mahomed as his prophet. 1' A yogi placed between two idols,itappears,could not possibly be a Moslem however,that is Ibn Batfita
’
s
statement.
“ The dinar of Ibn Batfita is the tcinga. of other Mahomedan authors,corresponding more or less to themodern rupee : Col . Y nle
’
s Cat/my.
1Lec'
s Ibn Batata’
s Travels,pp. 164,105 . Lee gives a note about the
yogt'
s marks of a religious w arfare,taking exception to w hat Apretz has trans
lated as civi cast igatimmm vestig ia impressa erau t,which Lee interprets to the
effect that Ibn Batuta really believed the yayt‘
to be a Mahomedan,and re
cogniz ed in him those characters (marks) of promptness and fitness to contend
for the Faith,w ithout the actual existence of scars,wounds,and the like,whichwould then deserve to be named castagatwnumvesfiig ia.
”
296 AN HISTORICAL AND ascnmow ewan sxs'rcn
Vasco daGama,on obtaining the above information,hastened to lay upthe supply of fresh water and wood he wanted for his fleet. He stayedthere altogether twelve days,for taking on board,besides water and
wood,a stock of provisions consisting of figs,cocoanuts,and fowls,ofwhich latter article they bought,according to Gaspar Correa,six forone vintem (less than twopence),and for the refitting and careening ofhis caravels,which operation more than anything else occasioned thislong delay at the island. Thenceforward he made this port a favouredanchorage of the Portuguese,thus practical ly expelling from it theMoors ofMecca,who,according to Cabral,* used to take this route to
Calicut,and step here to take i nwood and water,before the arrival ofthe Portuguese.
A cur ious incident in connection with Vasco da Gama’s stay on theisland is the arrival of an embassy consisting of twelve well-dressedmen,who came in two boats from the main land,and said they weresent to him by some native prince,—probably theking ofGoa,—andbrought him as a present a bundle of sugarcanes,which present theadmiral was civi l enough to accept with thanks,but most decidedlydeclined to accede to their rather indiscreet request to pay a v isit tohis ships. Then a Jcw,1‘ who spoke the Castilian dialect well and wasthe captain-major of the fleet of the Sabaio,the,ruler ofGoa,subjectto the king of Bijapur,came on board,making all sorts of friendlyovertures,although in real ity acting the part of a spy. Thisman wasnot only refused admittance on such terms,but was,on the contrary,the admiral’s suspicions having been roused by the islanders againstthe character of the Moor,who,they said,had been sent from the
main land by the native pr ince to pry into the state of the navigators,and to capture them if possible,—put to the torture until he confessedthat the suspicions entertained against him by the islanders were notaltogether unfounded. This man was at last known to be a PolishJ ew,a native of Posna,in the service of the Sabnie,and was carr ied
Voyage of Pedro Alvares Cabral,Lisbon,1812,p . 118.
1There is still some doubt hanging over the nationality and creed of this personage. Osorius call him a Sarmate by nation and J ew by religion ; GasparCorrea a Grenadine J ew ; Castanheda says he announced himself as a LevantineChristian -hence some annalists called him aLevantine renegade,and state that.while being carried away by Vasco da Gama,at a distance of about two hundredleagues from Angediva he confessed he was a Moor . But it appears that hewas really a J ew,and wasmam ed to a J ewcss who lived in Cochin.
or run ISLAND or Asenmva. 29 7
by Vasco da Gama to Portugal,who on converting him to Christianityunder the name ofGaspar da Gama—he is
'
somctimes known in the
old chronicles as Gaspar da India—stood godfather to him. He was
afterwards made a knight by the king,and not only became a valuableacquisition to the Portuguese sailors in their subsequent trips to India,but was again at Angediva w ith Almeida at the building of the fortress
by command ofthe king DemManuel,where he rendered importantservices. Vasco da Gama then set sail on the 5th
.
ofOctober“ for
Lisbon,but not before he had signalized his stay on the island by sinking a pirate ship he had taken during the skirmish there,notwithstanding that a ransom of one thousandfanci es was offered for it.
In his second voyage,Da Gamahaving sailed as far as Dfibul,a heavy
gale overtookhim there at night,and dispersed his caravels,which couldonly meet to “
salute the flag-ship the next morning,when the gale
hada little abated,near Angediva. Here he observed two great bargeswith armed people coming towards his fleet,which barges,the J ewGaspar informed him,belonged to the renowned pirate Taneja,whopaid part of the plunder to the king ofGarsOpa,and was going towardsAngediva with the intention of taking possession ofVasco ,da Gama
’
s
ships. The latter had scarcely anv trouble with him. Waiting untilthe pirate
'
s‘fustas,
’
as they were called,approached near enough,theadmiral made short work of them all by dischar
g ing his artillery at
them,which wrought terrible havoc among the crew of the Malabaresecorsair,who was obliged to beat a hasty retreat into the river of IIonore,and was cvcntuallv brought round,at a later time,to be the steadfast
friend of the Portuguese. This action was followed by wanton and
unprovoked attacks by the Portuguese on IIenore and Batecala,which
the humane Dc Foe has rightly characterized as acts ofmurder to
punish the robbers.
”
The fiction of the floating island of Venus,or the enchanted island
(illca namorada),as it is called,has been for centuries a bone ofcontea
‘Thc Portuguese historiansmre often at variance w ith one another in the
matter of chronology. Correa says loth December Goes,Castanheda,andDe Barres5th October. The latter have moreprobabilities on their side. Maflcy,who does not care much about dates,only refers to events thus Cum co r e
aponsoGamma Anchediv a x1i'IsuLImpctiIt,leucas a ( Jalccute circitcr quinc,Iaginta,fru luentem nemer ibus,ct pi scc omnis gen. I .npprmn idantem. Ibi re
fectis t long aJ acLItIone sociis,nm ilmnque,l lc um pre catas utI pr opitius iterumadeaset n ducn nquc so optimo l lc zxi pmpinquis,ac puma: sisterct in Bump-ml(‘
ursum intentht. —11wt. l u J .,1500,p . 05.
298 .\N ulsroau'
ar. axe A ltC lM-ZOLOGICAL sxsrcu
tion among critics ; and their criticism,as theHonourable Mr. Stanlev
observes,has not in general been fair toCamoens.‘ Assuming for the
nence,—and there are very good grounds for such an assumption,that Angediva was the material basis on which the superstructure of theepisodeof the enchanted island is raised,poetic genius having really thepower to impart to the commonest object on earth a hallowed renown,such as the genius ofMilton once conferred on the now desolate islandofO rmuz,would in itself sutlicc to raise the islet ofAngediva,swa
'
mpyand pestilential though it be,in the estimation of scholars.
Voltaire,who had otherwise demonstrated to the world in hisPucelled’
Or leans that his was not too prudish a nature,pretends to be shocked
at the scenes of the island ofVenus as described by Camoens. Another
cr itic,and a countryman of the poet,has,as the above-quoted writerremarks,brought the imagery of the ilha namorada
’ Love’s ownisland to the level of amatter-of-fact description of a vulgar dcbauch,which he,against all probability and historic grounds,imagines to havetaken place at Mcliudc or Z anz ibarxf
But several stanzas of canto IX. of the Lusiad plainly indicate thatthe nymphs and delights of the {Umnamorada
’
are but the honours
and glory promised,and won bv the companions ofVasco daGama,forheroic deeds. In this pectic creation Camoens has but faithfully ad
hered to classical models,as is apparent throughout his poem,andhis aim appears to be to endeavour toprove that the great and the goodwho were admitted to the tables of the gods to drink (to use a local
simile) the amr ila of the mount .\Ieru,or to enjoy the company of the
immortals who peopled the Grecian Olvmpus,were all ordinary menwho rose to that high station or were placed there as a reward for
their virtues and merit. Again,Dupcrren dc Castera—who for thefantastic explanation he once gave regarding the fables of paganism
being found mingled w ith the legends of Christianity in the poemof
Camoens,drew from Voltaire the following sarcasm A la bonneheurc,j y conscns mais J asone que jc uc m
'
cn I'
tais pas apercu,”and
was often the butt for the satires of the Abbe Desfontaines—remarks,i n his La Lusimlc,Paris. 1735 -5S,that the fictions of Camoens. like
See Th u r e v/dyev u} Vesu flfl Hum /r,Lend . ISGQ,p . Ii" .
T Son (fl
u,‘( t do I I In
" M .“ No) (M l,P0310, “ d (”m3"t Lu is l ie
”
um-n u t l . .-ln ‘l‘ "0” i104 .
300 AN HISTORICAL AND ARCHE OLOOICAL sxs'ren
(Bern come 0 vento leva branca vela),Para onde a forte armada se enxergava
Q ue perque naepassassem,sem que nel laTomassem porto,como desejava,
Para onde as naos navegam amovieA Acidalia,que tudo em tim podia.
LIII.
Mas tim e a fez e immobil,come vio
Q ue era dos nautas vista,e demandadaQ ual ficou Delos,tanto que parioLatona Phebe,e a deesa acaea usada.
Para lI'
I logo a prova 0 mar abrio,Onde a costa faz ia huma enseada
Curva e quieta,cuja branea area
Pintou de ruivas conchas Cytherea.
LIV.
Tres formosos outeiros se mostravamErguidos com soberba gracioza,
Q ue de gramineo esmalte se adornavam,Na formosa ilha alegre,e dcleitosa. :
Claras fontes,e limpidas manavamDo cume,que a verdura tern vicosa
(J ust as the whi te sails are inflated b the air )W here the brave armada the islan first perceived
But,that they might not pass that par t of it whereThey should take part ; the goddess had contr ived
The entrance where the vessels sailed to predispose
By Acidalia,who could do what she chose.
LIII.
But firm she made it,and immovable to the sightOf the sailors it seemed,w ith them in such request ;
So Delos stood when Latona t here brought to light
Br ight Phoebus and the goddess used to the chase.
Thither then the prow straight through the sea out rightTo a deep bay wherein the waves were at peace,
Curv ing and quiet,where ofthe smooth shining beachCytherea w it h pink and yellow shells painted rich.
LIV.
Three beauteons hills before their eyes appeared,Round,smooth,and gracefully with flowers bespread,
Adorned w ith gramineous verdure,gently u reared,And in the delightful isle soft valleysma 0
Clear fount ains,too,coming from these hills were heard,Which whispering limpid among white pebbles strayed
or me ISLAND or snesmva. 301
Per entre pcdras alvas se derivaA sonorosa lympha fugitiva.
LV.
N’hum valle ameno,que os outeiros fende,Venham as claras aguas ajuntar-se,
Onde huma meza faz em,que se estendeTai'i bella,quanto pode imaginar-se
Arvorcdo gentil sobre clla pcndc,Como que prompto ostI
'
I para afi'
citar-se,Vendo-se no crystal resplandecente,Q ue em si 0 estai pintado propriamente.
08 Luz iadas,Canto IX
DomFrancisco d’Almeida,the first Viceroy ofthe Portuguese settlements in the East—who,being a man of great political sagacity,wasfully aware that a small nation of scarcely four mIllions could not holdlarge conquests for any length of time w ithout loss ofprestige,but hadexpressed to the King his opinion that they should,on the contrary,strive to confine themselves to obtain supremacy over the sea,whichwould eventually assert their power over the countries bordering on it,or even secure their territorial dominion,a system that in former times
had been successfully practised by the Athenians,and has in our own
days w ith apparent advantage been tried by some of the modern
nations—wrote from India to the King,Dom Manuel,that they shouldbuild factories and counting-houses only,and a few fortresses for their
defence,where needed,on the coast and the adjacent islands,and thus
place their trade onamore solid footing,rather thanmake largeterritorialacquisitions,which would in the end simply interfere with,ifnot ruin,their commercial position in Asia,and drive them away from it. His
prediction was at last to be fulfilled. This sound policy,was,howeI er,
Cool and fresh down from the summit’
s shady source,The fugitive sonorous lymph der ived its course.
In a pleasant valley,by the hills defended,The limpid waters met and joined in one,
Forming a maze,or table,which extended
As beautiful as fancy e'
cr gazed upon
Groves gracefully o’er parts of the shores impended,
A s if they were going to shave,and looking down.View ing t hemselves in the crystal bright presentedBoth accurately and naturally painted.
The Lusiad,Canto IX.,translated byLieut.-Col. Sir T . L.Mitchell,Kt,D.C.L.
302 AN HISTORICAL AND ARCHEOLOGICAL SKETCH
counteracted by the more ambitious views ofAlfonso d’Albuquerque,who wished to found,like the Romans,an empire in the East,andamalgamate the Portuguese with the natives,— an exper iment that hasbeen found,new that it is too late to repair the evil,to be fruitful ofgrave evils to both parties. May not this be a warning as well topresent and future statesmen and philanthropists ofother nations todesist from pursuing any longer apolicy inaugurated,so unsuccessfully,by the great founder of the Portuguese empire in the East ?Albuquerque
’s policy,as foretold by Dom Francisco d
’
Almeida,could not be followed beyond the government of Dom Jose de Castro,or,even allow ing for their last reactive efforts,as late as the governmentof the brave Dom Luis d'
AthaiIle,who,unfortunate man ! did reallv
struggle hard against all odds,and perhaps more than any of his
predecessors,to preserve the power thatwas decaying but the fateswere
against him,and he succumbed’the moment the resources of Portugalwere exhausted,and corruption had crept in toprecipitatethe downfall.N0 human power could then w ithstand it,and,it being but natural,itappears strange that some of the later Portuguese writers should attempt to lay all the faults of their impolitic rule at the door of the
Spanish yoke. This is,no doubt,the best argument to evade bitterrecrimination,which a retrospective glance upon their own past misdeeds might evoke.
The King,quite convinced of the soundness ofAlmeida’s suggestions,
wrote back that he wished him especially to have Angediva fortified,from its being situated about the middle of the coast,which,besidesaffording protection to his trade,would also secure a supply of waterfor his shipping . Another place which Dom Francisco much desiredto possess and fortify along with Angediva was the Mount Dilli,a promontory some sixteen miles north of Cannanore,—the first Indianland seen by Vasco da Gama on his sailing towards Calicut,and at thattime the most frequented seaport and empor ium,almost all the shipsfrom Mecca,O rmnz,Cambay and Calicut anchoring in the little bayunder it .
l t was on the 13th September 1505 that Dom Francisco d’Almeidalaid the foundation-stone of the Angediva fortress. A curious incidentin connection with its foundation is the discovery of some crosses
Mi tchell,referr ing to Osorio,says hefound many crucifixes of black and red
colour but he is incorrect.
304 AN HISTORICAL AND ABCHEOLOGICAL SKETCH
cal,expedition was successful in capturing a number Of zambucs withvaluable cargoes Of spices,timber,and silk.
The building Of the fort could not be carried out to the satisfactionOfDom Francisco,from the absolute want of proper cement,such as
lime,in the island ; but he succeeded in building one,rather hastily,Ofsimple clay and stone. Having done so,and his presence being re
quired elsewhere,he handed over the island toManuel Pecanha,whomhe named Captain Of the Fort OfAngediva,and for whose nominationhe had h imself previously solicited the K ing
’
s approbation. Hav ingcompleted thebuilding,andhaving armedone galley and twobrigantines,he gave them in charge toanother Of his Officers,by name Joab SerraI'i,which vessels were afterwards used by Dom Francisco himself in hisnaval excursions in the Indian Ocean ; and having placed,moreover,the administration Of the factory established on the island in the handsofDuarte Pereira,who was made its provost or chief,andwas assistedby three clerks and other subordinate Oflicers,he left for Cannanore,where he assumed the title OfViceroy.
Scarcely had six months elapsed since Dom Francisco left Angedivawhen the fortress was besieged by a host Of Mahomedans and Hinduswho were in the service of the king Of Goa,—who had grown ex
tremely jealous of the Portuguese,since they had made an alliancewith the king OfHonore,—under the command Of a Portuguese renegade
by name Antonio Fernandes,a carpenter,who had once been left on
the shores Of Africa,near Q uiloa,as a convict by Pedro Alvares Osbral,and,having embracedMahomedanism under thename Of Abdulla,had somehow found his way to India. Thisman being aware that
both Dom Francisco and his son Dom Lourenco were absent from
the island,the former at Cannanore and the letter at Calicut,seizedthe Opportunity to r isk an attack upon the undefended island. The
attempt,the historian* tells us,was made by Fernandes under a
promise from the Z abairn (Sabaio) that he would appoint him captainof the fortress Of Cintacora,modern Ankola,provided he expelled thePortuguese from Angediva. The bait Fernandes thought was worth
catching at,for from the estimate Of his character given by chroniclershe could not certainly be above taking the Offered bribe.
DO Barres,tome i.,pt. II.,p. 419.
or THE ISLAND Os ANOEDIVA. 305
The attack was sudden. In the dead of night,or a little beforedawn had dispelled the darkness and enabled people to see each other,the landing Of the enemy,who brought with them a fleet Of sixtynil,took place. The surprise Of the descent,however,evoked all
the fury of the Portuguese to repel the attack. The moment he was
surrounded by the enemy,the valorous captain Manuel Paganha,knowing well that his fortifications consisted Of only a low wal l and a tower
ofclay and stone,which could il l afl'
ord him shelter against the showersof shot and arrows Ofthe host Of the enemy,w ith his handful Of a garrisen sallied forth and at the point Of the sword began the slaughterof the fee. TheMahomedans took alarm at the bold front thus shownthem,and it really kept them at bay for some time. An unopposeddebarkation on the island had raised their hopes andfilled their heartswith joy,and they were confident that the firing Of a few shots wouldsoon be followed by complete submission and unconditional surrender ;but they were mistaken. From the place Of their first attack,—whichwas,as Lafitau expresses it,vigorous,—theMahomedanswere obliged toturn round,mount a hillock,and from under a grove Of trees whichoverhung the fortress pour their shots andarrows into it,so that butfor the bravery Of the defenders it wouldhave lain at their mercy .
From so favourable a position,gained almost by accident,the Portu
guese could not easily dislodge them. Nor did the latter dare to issuefrom the fort,on account of the danger they incurred Of becoming a
mark for the enemy . Facanhe,however,was equal to the emergency .
In the midst of perils he did not lose presence Ofmind. TO mount his
pieces Of ordnance on the tower,from whence he could beat down theattacking party,and to place on the wall some Of his big mortars withwhich to sink the fleet in which the Mahomedans had crossed the
channel,was an idea put into execution as soon as conceived.
This expedient was very successful,but,in spite Of it,the state Ofblockade lasted for four days and nights continuously,duringwhich thePortuguese could scarcely move from their post Of defence. DeBarres
writes,they did not even care for their meals or sleep . They werereadv to sacrifice their lives for the honour Of their country but what
caused them the greatest annoyance was the vile language used againstthem during the calm of the night,and which could distinctly beheard in the fortress,by the renegade captain Abdulla,alias Fernandes,who was leading this attack against his own countrymen.
306 AN HISTORICAL AND ARCHE OLOGICAL SKIITCH
TheMahomedans,who,in spite oftheir overwhelmmg numbers,hadfailed to realize their expectations,being unable to reduce the fortress
within that time,and noticing that two Portuguese boats had,at thebeginning Of the surprise,started to informDom Lourenco—who wascruising in the sea close by,andwas much feared by theMahomedans
Of the nature Of the attack,raised the Siege and fled across to the
continent as precipitately as they had landed on the island. On the
arrival Of the reinforcements and provisions sent by Dom Lourenco a
council was held,at which it was resolved that as the rainy season was
fast approaching,and Cochin,the head-quarters Of the troops,toodistant to afford it assistance easily,Angediva would be constantly ex.
posed to attack,and,in view Of the expense and trouble involved insuccouring it,it would not be worth keeping,the fortifications shouldbe raz ed to the ground and the place abandoned. At the same time
Dom Francisco d’Almeida began to build the castle Of Cannanore,which also greatly enraged the Moors of that country .
* This took
place in themonth OfMay 1506.
Some time before the building Of the fortress,the wel l-known traveller Ludovico diVarthema,whowas himself in Angediva,refers to thecondition Of the island thus I quitted this place (Bathacala,modernSadaéivagaIn,and went to another island which is inhabited by a cer
tain sort ofmaple who areMoors and pagans. This island is distantfromthemain landhalfamile,and is about twentymiles in circumference.
The air is not very good here,neither is the place very fertile. Thereis an excellent port between the island and themainland,and very goodwater is found in the said island.
”1' Here Varthemagreatly exaggerates
its dimensions.
In the long interval between the dismantling Of the fortress byDomFrancisco d’Almeida,or its total abandonment by the Portuguese,and thenext histor ical event Of importance in connection with theisland—its occupation by the troops of Sir Abraham Shipman,—it appears that the island was left entirely desolate ; so that it became oneOf the haunts Of thepirates of the coast.
See the letter fromtheViceroy,DomFrancisco d’Almeida,to theKing,in theAmazes dc Sciencias,Lisbon,1858.
1" The Travels ofLudomco d/I
’
Varthema,A.D. 1503to 1508. Translated by J .W.
J ones,and edIte'
d Wlth notes by G. P.Badger,Lond. 1883,p. 120.
308 AN HISTORICAL AND ARCHEOLOGICAL SKETCH
on requesting that the island might be made over to them,the Portu
guese Viceroy,proffering some plea and reasons—some Of them worth
attention,‘but too tedious to enumerate here—refused to accede to the
demand ; whereupon they sailed to Surat and made an application to
the English President,Sir George Oxenden,to Obtain permission fromthe Mogul to effect a landing of the troops there,but even this was refused. Further misunderstandings led LordMarlborough to return In
January 1661tO England,but his five hundred men had no other re
source left than that suggested by Sir Abraham Shipman,to land at
thedesolate island OfAngediva. which then belonged to nobody. Here
they remained about two years under the shelter Of a few huts,andwithout sufficient protection from the deadly effects of the climate.
The consequence was that Sir Abraham Shipman died on the 5th of
Apr il 1664,and three hundred Ofhis men perished on the island dur ingthis short interval,—the marshy condition Of the island,the absence Of
any accommodation towhich aEuropean is accustomed,and the scarcityOf provisions,having thinned their numbers rapidly and when by an
other of his royal letters,dated the l 6th OfAugust 1663,the cession of
the island of Bombay was almost imperatively urged on the Viceroy,Castro de Mello,by the K ing OfPortugal,a new treatv was drafted,tobe signed by Humphry Cooke,who had become acquainted with the
Viceroy in Lisbon,where he was carrying on the trade Of a tanner,andhad succeeded here to the command Of the British troops. It was on
the 10th of January 1665 that the new treaty was signed,and theformal cession was made on the 17 th Of the following month,1' whenHumphry Cooke took possession OfBombay with thewreck Ofhisarmy,as the few English troops still surviving onAngedivawerecalled,amounting to only two oflicers and a hundred and ninety-one rankand file. All
the others were buried in the rocky island Of Angediva,and,strangethough it may appear,nobody has yet thought in this the nineteenth
century,in which it is the fashion to commemorate even the most ordi
nary events in life and to raise statues to no less ordinary beings. ofplacing even adecent slab tO thememory Ofthose braveand self-denyingpioneers Ofthe British power in the East,who,having themisfortune toseek a refuge that was denied them elsewhere,were at last obliged to
Memor ies dc Tefaeira Mngalhaes,Goa,1868.1" See my articles entitled Wor ds and Places in and about Bombay
”in the
Indian Antiquary,Bomb. 1874,vol. 111
Ol‘ THE ISLAND or ANCRDIVA. 309
make an unhealthy spot their retreat,and in the case Ofmost Of themtheir grave. But I must stop here,OII the principle Ne sutor ultra
On the English evacuating the island it was left without a possessor,and now the time . was at hand for the Portuguese to make another
attempt to appear on the scene and raise new fortifications. This wasdone in1682,during the governmentof theViceroy Condo d
’
AlvOr,whenthe Portuguese again fortified the island,and this time more effectuallythan ever,the corner-stone being laid on the 5th ofMay Of that year .
The fort is a pretty large quadrilateral bastioned one,consisting Ofawal lbuilt of stone and mortar,and possessing embrasures,battlements,andall the other features and appliances Ofmedieval fortifications. It has
casemates under the ramparts,and some Of the landward and southern
hastions are built with orillons. It has also a balcony for the guarda large store-room for gunpowder amagaz ine for ammunition and vic
tuals ; a castellated governor’
s palace a cuirass ; a house for the doorkeeper of the palace and of the cuirass ; amajor
’
shouse ; two redoubtsfive bastions,named Francisco,Antonio,Conceicafl,Diamante and
Lumbreira ; three batteries,named Ponta do dentro,Peca and Fen
tainhas,and several other small buildings amidst palm-groves and
other trees,which it would be too tiresome to enumerate here. The
entrance gate leads to a courtyard,and in the enceinte Of the fortress isa fine tank of spring water .’
When completed it was one of the most pleasant seats fortified bythe Portuguese government in India,who appointed Amaro Simoes itsfirst Governor but it isnow in a very dilapidated condition,a few rustyold iron guns lie about in the interior of the fort,and the localityis one ofthe most unhealthy Of the possessions still remaining to them.
In fact,unwholesome air appears to have been its characteristic sincethe days when Varthema was there what the causes are,nobody,itseems,has yet thought it worth while to investigate.
Its population,living w ithin the fortress,amounts,according to thelast census,tO 527,inhabiting 147 houses. They are all Christians of
the RomanCatholic faith,and belong to the only parish in the island,itschurch,dedicated to N. S. das Brotas,being situated within the
O This is perhaps the very tank that supplied water to the fleetofVascodaGama,and ismentioned by Ibn Batuta in his Travels.
310 sxrrcn or me ISLAND or suesmvs.
precincts of the fortress.’ This mere handful of islanders aremost
ly descendants of the old Portuguese soldiers who once formed the
garrison of the fortress and of convicts for Angediva was,as late as
the last century,a penal settlement,whither felons fromGoa,Damaunand Diu were transported. Some of these men are engaged in the
cultivation ofrice and cocoanuts,and in fishery,all living in the eastern
part of the island ; the western is but a rock for fishermen to dry
their nets on. The women spin cotton thread and yarn,and weave
stockings,which are said to be the best made on this side of India.
There is nothing remarkable about the physical and moral condition of
these islanders,—at least nothing more than what we see among the
native Christians ofBassein,Bandora and Mahim. The island is nowunder the jurisdiction of the province of Salcete,one of the three old
divisions of the territory ofGoa.
It appears that this church was built on the very spot where.
the Hindu
templementionedby Ibn Batdtaonce existed. It hasbeen themvanable customof the Portuguese to appro riate the ground and building materials that ones helonged to the Hindus and omedans.
312 maouas AND INSTRUMENTS
did,ofpossessing astronomical observations dating as far back as nearlyhalf a million ofyears and even the conjunctions offive planets andof the solar eclipse observed in China during the years 2514 and 2436
before our era,and examined by the European astronomers of the lastcentury,were found to be so untractable by the laws ofcalculation thatthey gave rise to polemics and guesses as vague as those ofthe Chinesethemselves. It is,however,at presentknown that in 1109 before Christ
gnomons eight feet high existed in China ;1' so that the honour of
having invented the gnomon belongs no more to the Greeks :
Montfer rier,Diet,tome I.,p. 182.
1“Supplement an mus des Instruments Astronomit s des A ruba,par M. L
Am. Sédillot,p. 7 .
I Anaximander,the successor of Thales in the direction ofthe Ionian school,and born about 620years before Chr ist,was usually considered as the inventor
of the gnomon ; and Diogenes Laertius,lib. ii .,cap. i.,3,says of himPrimus antem gnomonem invenit,ipsumqne Lacedemone in solar-lie statuit,que
nt ait Phavorinus in omnimoda historia,conversiones Solis,et oquinoetia
notaret.
The large columnar pillar at Stonehenge,sixteen feet high,has recently been
found to be a gnomon,marking noon by throwing no shadow. See The Timesof India,J uly 31,1875 .
About twelvemonths ago a correspondentofa home paper drew attention tosome remarkable henomena observable at Stonehenge,in connection with thesun
’s rising onmi ummer
’
amorning,and suggested that the inference therefromwas that these megalithic circles,certainly this one in particular,had been erect
ed for the purposes of Baal-worship. The facts mentioned interested several
scientific and literary men,and it was felt that a complete and scientific examination of the stru
sture was (
iesira
r
l
al
l
e in order to set at rest th
f
e
flow surmises of
archwologists an others. cco°
ngl last w eek a
Kart-yo ci engmee
'
rs
ceeded to the spot,and were engaged fdr four or five ya in takingmost ab hor-
tomeu uremente of the structures,as well as making astronomical calculations.The results of their exhaustive sur vey,we are informed,have been very striking,astonishing nonemore than the savants themselves,and leave not the least doubtabout the solar references of the structure,and further,that it was undoubted!erected as a temple of the sun,thereby ver ifying the inference to thatM whichappeared at the time re ferred to. By an arrangement of the stones,the time ofr isin and setting of the sun at the w inter and summer solstices canbeascerh ined,and 0 large columnar stone or gnomon,which stands isolated some dish nee boyond the main avenue,marks the time of noon by the fact of its reflecting mshadow then. This was tested by one of the party,who altered his watch fin eby it,and checking it by Greenw ich time on returning to Salisbury found it bcor respond exactly. The position of th is gnomon,some sixteen feet high,indicates in more ways than one that it was intended to serve astronomiml purposu .
The interesting results of this,perhaps the most important,ifnot only Id enfiflesurvey,in the true sense of the term,that has been made of these historioruim,w ill,we are informed,be embodied in book form,and as a contribution towardsthe elucidation of a question which remains unsettled,it w ill doq prove i tantiquar ies and arche ologists a valuable addition to that literary cairn whichthis subject has already provoked.
or run ARAB asraosousas . 313
It cannot be deniedthat when the Greeks wereyet in a state ofalmostcompletebarbarismthe Chaldaaans andEgyptians“ hadmade considerable progress inastronomy,and it is certain that the Greek astronomersof the school ofAlexandria (one of whosebrightestornaments,born twocenturies before Christ,was Hipparchus) had recourse to Chaldman
observations ; whilst before their time Thales in the 7th,Plato in the5th,Eudoxus in the 5th,and Pythagoras in the 2ud century before Christ,went from Greece to the Egyptian priests to seek instruction. Hence
it is clear that the Greeks were not the inventors of astronomy and
although we havementioned only the Chaldaaans and Egyptians as
their teachers,there is the greatest probability that the Chinese,theHindus and Persians,likewise furnished their quota of astronomicalinformation,but that,on account of the immense distance and the
want of close intercourse w ith these nations,the Greeks became ac
quaintedwith their discover ies only at second hand.
Although the influence ofthe East upon theWest must be admitted,some discoveries may have been made again and again in both. After
all,however,the first positive data on the science ofastronomy must besought among the Greeks. The principal instruments used by the
Greeks were the sphere,the gnomon,the heliometer,the heliotrope,together with various kinds of quadrants,clepsydras,and sand-clocks ; ofthese it w ill be necessary to say something before mentioning the in
strumenta of the Arabs,who made good use of them,added new ones,and achieved brilliant successes in the science whilst Europe was vetplunged in the darkness of the so-called MiddleAges.
There is a natural law in the development of sciences according to
which they gradually proceed from the simplest requirements promptedby the necessities of the human race,to more complicated ones,a nd to
0 The ingeniousmethod by which the ancient Egyptiansmeasured the diamet er
of the sun by means of water-clocks is worth mentioning —At the momentwhen the disk of the rising sun touched the horizon on the da of the equinox,water was allowed to escape drop by drop from the bottom 0 a vessel always
kept full by means of another vessel placed above it,and which was likew ise
kept full. The w ater escaped from the first appearance of the sun’
s limbon the hor izon until the full orb had emerg t d. In a second,much larger basinthe water was preser ved which fell,unti l the next mor ning’
s first appearance of
the sun'
s upper limb. Then the water contained in each basin w as carefullymeasured and w eighed,and the following proportion was established —Thewhole wat er which has flowed out is to that contained in the small basin as the
” degrees of the celestial sphere are to the diameter of the sun which is
sought. (Supp lement,&c.,pp. 16,
3H raaouas AND msr auusx'
rs
discoveries having no palpable influence on the wants of daily life.
Thus,for instance,it must have been one ofthe earliest problems of astronomy to determine the length of the year,as a knowledge of time isso important an item in all human transactions. To find the durationof the year,it was sufficient to observe the lengths of the shadows
thrown by gnomons at the time of the solstices,and from these the
equinoxes were approximately deduced,which were corrected by means
of the equatorial circle. No necessity for trigonometry had yet arisen,as the length of the year,of the seasons,and the inequality of the dayscould be ascertained without it,from daily observing the sun
’
s altitudeon the meridian by measur ing the length and the various hours of theday could be known by observing the direction of the gnomon
’
s
shadow .
The gnomon,which is the simplest and oldest of all instruments,gives the height more accurately in proportion to its own. Thereforeextremely tal l gnomons were sometimes used,and,although the vague
termination of their shadows was inconvenient,it took some centuries
to make the discovery that the passage of the solar rays through a
small circular aperture would more accurately define the end of the
shadow ; and the observations demonstrating the progressive diminutionof the obliquity of the ecliptic were thus taken long afterfihe obliquityitself had been (letermined.
* The gnomon and the sphere had beenin use at a very early time in Greece,but it is uncertain whether Thalesemployed other instruments,and nothing positive is known either aboutthe form,siz e,or use of the heliotrope and the heliometer . A littlemore is known about the dials of the ancients ; that ofEudoxus,fivecenturies before Christ,is explained by Vitruv ius,but the Romansthemselves erected the first of them only three centuries later,al e. in
233 before Christ ; the sand and water clocks are also of an ancient
date,but the latter are not to be confounded with the clepsydraa used
in Rome and Athens during the fourth century .
Ifwe now take up the astronomical instruments ofwhich Ptolemy hasleft us a description in his Almayest,1' they are as follows z—The first iathe solstitial armilla,which serves to show how much the ecliptic is in
clined to the equator perhaps Aristillus andTimocharis were acquaint
The most cclebmu'd ofthese observations were bv Cassini in 1660at Bob”,and by Monnier in 1743 at Paris.
1“ Supp le’
ment,pp. 17 ct seq .
316 msonss AND INSTRUMENTS
their might the movement of civilization which had manifested itselfamong the Arabs. But among all the Arab princes who became celebrated by their love for the sciences,the KhalifAl-Mamun-A’
bd-Allah,second son ofHarrin,who ascended the throneA .H . 198 (A .D. 813
is deserving of special mention. He protected the sciences as a sover
eign and a philosopher ; for,magnanimous like Alexander,he never
forgot,even in his warlikeexpeditions,thenoblepurposehe had in view.
He imposed onMichael II I . a tribute ofbooks,constituting the treasuresof the ancient civiliz ation ofGreece,and afterwards waged war against
Theophilus,whohad refused toallow Leo the archbishop ofThessalonicato depart to Baghdad,and whom this Christian emperor allowed to
live on the price of the lessons which he was obliged to give to slaves.
Beginning with the reign ofAl -Mamtin,all the sciences,but particular lyastronomy,took a prodigious start among the Arabs,and crowds
ofmen remarkable for their works and for their scientific attainmentssurrounded his throne. TheAlmagest,as well as all themathematicalworks ofGreece and of the school of Alexandr ia,was translated. The
astronomers ofBaghdadmade a greatmany important observations,anddrew up new tables of the sun and of themoon,more exact than those
of Ptolemy,to which the name of verified tables” was given . Theydetermined,withmoreprecision than Hipparchushad done,the durationof the tropical year,and measured in a plain of Mesopotamia a degreeof the meridian,with the object of calculating the exact siz e oftheearth .
It would be necessary to cite many astronomers who distinguishedthemselves during the reign of Al-Maml
’
m and his successors to illustrate the progress of astronomical science made in those times ; biographies of these astronomers occur in var ious works,but their insertionwould be out ofplace here. One,however,maybe given as a specimen,namely,that ofMuhammad Ben Jaber,whohaving been born in Meso
potamia in a place called Batan is on that account known in Europeby the latinized name Albatenius,and whose labours are among the
most important. The precise epoch of this great man’
s birth is not
known,but it is certain that he flourished about fifty years after thedeath of the KhalifAl-Mamtin,that is to say,towards AD . 880. He
was not a Moslem,but a Sabaean and a worshipper of stars in those
times religious toleration was so great and science sohighly esteemedatthe court ofBaghdad,that physicians,mathematicians,and scientific
or res ARAB Asr aoxomsas. 317
men in general who were Christians,Jews,Sabaeans,or Hindu polytheists. enjoyed respect and occupied honourable positions. Like themajority of Arab mathematicians,A lbatenius applied mathematicschiefly to astronomy,the study of which be embraced with the doublemotive of religious sentiment and as a high branch ofknow ledge. In
spite of his religion,which was horrible to Moslems,he enjoyed thedignity of governor of Syr ia under the K halifs. All his observationsweremade either at Antioch or in the town of Rukkah in Mesopotamia,for which reason some old authors called himMalcometus Aractensis.
The following is a general sketch of the labours of Albatenius,which,considering the epoch when they were undertaken,are veryremarkable.
This illustrious astronomer adopted nearly the system and the hy
potheses of Ptolemy,but rectified them in some points,and made alsoseveral discoveries,which have procured him a distinguished placeamong themen whose labours have enr iched astronomical science.
As far as the movement of the fixed stars is concerned,Albateniusapproached the truth much more than the ancients. Ptolemy caused
them tomove only one degree in a century,but the Arab astronomer
made them pass through the same space in 70,whilst modern as
tronomers allow 72years. Albatenius measured the magnitude of the
eccentricity of the solar orbit,* and the appreciation could not be more
just. The determination of the length of the solar year,in whichAlbatenius was engaged,does not appear to have been so successful .On comparing his own observations w ith those of Ptolemy,he madethe year to consist of 355tl. 5h. 46m. 24s.,which conclusion is
erroneous by 2}m. But one of the most beautiful discoveries con
useted with the name and labours ofAlbatenius is the one relating tothe determination of themotion of the sun
'
s apogee. Before the time
of this astronomer the sun’s apogee had been considered as fixed to the
same point of the zodiac,immoveable and imaginary,and to be beyondthe stars. Such it seemed to Ptolemy himself ; but Albatenius,aided
0 By the eccentr icity of the solar orbit,in reality that of the earth is nowmeant ; and this eccentr icity of the apparent orbit of the sun was determinedby observing the difference between the apparent diameters of the sun. Thediameter of the sun necessar ily appeared smaller in proportion as the distance from the earth was larger hence it sufficed to know the sun
'
s largest andanallest appar
ent diameter in ouler to obtain the ratio between the largest andthe smallest distance.
318 LABOURS AND msrsmrsx'rs
by observations more distant from each other,disentangled this move.ment,and distinguished it from that of the fixed stars. He showed
that it was somewhat more rapid,as the most recent observations seemto confirm. Albatenius took notice of the defects ofPtolemy’s theoryof the moon and the other planets,and if he did not entirely correct it,he at least rectified his hypothesis in many details. His discovery ofthe motion of the sun
’
s apogee led him to suppose that it was appli
cable to themovement of the other planets and also in this respect hisconjectures have been verified. Lastly,Albatenius constructed new
astronomical tables and substituted them for those of Ptolemy,whichwere beginning to become sensibly incorrect. These tables,much moreperfect than the first ones,attained great celebrity in the East,andwere used
'
for a long time.
The work containing the discoveries ofAlbatenius,and called by himZ ij Stibi,was translated into Latin under the title of De scia tic
stellarum but a biographer justly observes that the translator knewneither Arabic nor Latin. This translation is actually ful l of graveerrors,and can give but an imperfect idea of the labours ofAlbatenius,which were so remarkable. The first edition appeared in Nurembergin 1537,in folio. The second,which was l ikewise inaccurate,was
published in 1645,in quarto,at Bologna. The original is believed to
be in the library of the Vatican. Albatenius,whom Lalande ranked
among the forty-two most celebrated astronomers,died A .H. 137,A .D. 929 .
"l
The wr itings of Arab astronomers were but imperfectly known tillthe beginning of the present century. The introduction to the tablesofMuhammad Ben Jaber Albatani,whomhis translator had surnamed
Albatenius,having been carefully commented upon by Regiomontanus,appeared to show that theArabs were scrupulous imitatorsofthe Greeks,had retained their general theories,had only somewhat perfected theirinstruments,better determined the obliquity of the ecliptic,the eccentricity of the sun,its mean movement,and the precession of the equi
noxes ; that they had used sines instead of chords in their astronomicalcalculations,but that they had not gone further ; and that in order to
point out new progress it is necessary to haverecourse to theEuropeanastronomers of the l 6th century .
Montferrier,Dirt,tome L,p. 38.
320 u souas AND xssraunssrs
time the sine and the cosine of the unknown quantity ; thus he com
pleted a revolution initiated by an unknown author,but ascr ibedwithoutfoundation to Regiomontanus,who had never gone further than,noreven as far as,EbnYunis ; Europe profited by it six centuries after thefirst invention by the Arabs,whose works were unfortunately not sufli
ciently known.
Encouraged by this success,Sédillot extended his researches to the
Persian and Tartar astronomers. He informs us that the catalogue ofU lugh Bég is really original,like that ofHipparchus,and that the positions of all its stars had actually been determined bynew observations ;that all the other catalogueswere but copies ofPtolemy,'who had copiedMenelaus,and that the latter had taken everything from Hipparchus.
Albatenius,as well as Nacer-al-din,had,in order to determine the precession of the equinoxes,likeMenelaus,contentedhimselfw ith observingtwo or three stars,and had taken the others from Ptolemy by applyinga common correction which resulted from a smal l number of comparisons . Sédillot also states that the astronomer A
’bd-al-rahmzin Cufi oc
cupied himself only w ith taking sights andmagnitudes of stars,so thathis catalogue,which had been considered really original,is only that ofPtolemy w ith the addition of a constant quantity known to us this remark is curious enough,inasmuch as in consequence of it an authenticcatalogue of Ptolemy can be obtained,and therefore also of that ofHipparchus,whereby a considerable number oferrors (which crept in as no
means were at hand for restoring the original readings) may be rec
tified.
The above-mentioned information had h itherto been bur ied in librar ies,and its having been brought to light has filled out a great and important lacuna in the mathematical sciences ; it has been embodied inDelambre’s history of the astronomy of the Middle Ages,of which itforms a really new and original portion . But the laboursof Sédillot didnot end here Montncla had not hesitated to state that the gnomonicsof the Arabs were lost,like those of the Greeks ; whereas those of theGreeks existed in their totality in the Analemma of Ptolemy,with thefirst idea of si nes and of versines. The works of Albatenius proved
that up to the ninth century of our era the Arabs had not madeanyaddition to the theory of Ptolemy. In his translation of Ah-al-Hasan
A’li’s treat ise on astronomical instruments,Sédillot has produced a com
plete and verv detailed work on the gnomonics of the Arabs the con
or m s anu s Asr aoxousas. 321
tents and the doctrine being still the same. but with cur ious and important additions. Although Vitruvius had written on some processesknown in his time,his descriptions were so equivocal that they admitted only of conjectures. Themore exact descriptions of Ab-al-Hasan,who lived in the 13th century,remove all doubts,and his work moreover contains a number of inventions evidently due to the Arabs.
But the Arabs distinguished themselves in the sciences especially inSpain. In Cordova,Seville,Grenada,and other large towns of that
country,flourishing schools and colleges were maintained. More than
six thousand volumes could be seen in Cordova at theUniversity library,and seventy such libraries existed in Spain.
It is true that as far as philosophy is concerned the Arabs studiedAr istotle much more than nature their astronomical works were ofteninfected with astrology ; but their errors contributed to preserve pre
cions indications,and in their new researches they met sometimes withthe truth . The invention of algebra,the solution of equations of the
second degree,and the geometrical solution of the third is attributedto them. The science as taught by Muhammad Ben Musa does not
extend beyond quadratic equations,including problems with an adfectedsquare. These he solves by the same rules which are followed by Dio
phantus,and taught,but less comprehensibly,by Hindu mathematicians.
* That he borrowed from Diophantus is not atall probable for
it does not appear that the Arabs had any knowledge of DiOphantus’
s
work before the middle of the fourth century after the Hej i rah,when
Ah-al-Wofs Buzjani rendered it intoArabic . It is far more probablethat the Arabs received their first knowledge of algebra from the
Hindus,who furnished them with the decimal notation of numeralsand with various important points of mathematical and astronomicalinformationsf
The period of time designated by the term the Middle Ages,whichwas to us an epoch of darkness and servitude,embraces the most brilliant period of the history of the Arabs. When our knights,who wereas brave as they were ignorant,followed to the East myriads of pilgrimsimpelled by religious enthusiasm,they imagined that they were going
0 Laden“,p. 29,Vyagam'
ta,p . 347,Colebrooke’
s translations .
1“ Algebra of Muhammad Ben Mum,edited and translated by Fred. Boson,p. x.
322 u souas AND msravxsms
to attack barbarians scarcely worthy to fall under their noble swords,butthey had to deal with a nation as brave as it was enlightened,and Arabcivilization triumphed over this formidable attack the Christians,however,brought back from the East ideaswhich germinated in Europe,and afterwards contributed toproduce the intellectual revival . Such was
the positive result of the Crusades. It is no doubt great,and bearseloquent testimony to the providential direction which society under
went .
*
The beneficent influence of the Arabs on the progress of civilizationin Europe cannot be denied. Their schools were frequented and theircommercial relations led them into all the ports of the Mediterranean,where they spread the germs of useful knowledge. Their works,orthosewhich they had themselvesborrowed from theGreeks and Romans,were translated,and it is thus that so many Arab words crept into theastronomic nomenclature of scholars during the 15th century .
The school of Baghdad has far surpassed that of Alexandria withreference to the methods of calculation . The substitution of sines for
chords,and the introduction of tangents into trigonometrical calculations,natural ly imparted more comprehensiveness and simplicity to the ex
pression of relations and their combinations. The determination of the
var iation by Ah-al-Wofs,an entirely new fact in the history of science,had at the same time awakened greater interest concerning manuscriptsof the Arabs,and Opened a vast field of conjectures and investigations tofriends of literature ; but it is surprising that so little attention hadhitherto been paid to the instruments used by the Arabs,who were always considered to have employed such as had been invented by theGreeks.
The Arabs possessed not only astrolabes of various kinds,sextants,and a number of other instruments,but had also attained great perfection in the mechanical arts. The Khalif Hardn-Al-Rash id had sent a
clock to Charlemagne,and of these they possessed three kinds namely,water -clocks,sand-clocks,and such as were put in motion by wheelworks. Silvestrede Sacy has described thegreat clockofDamascuswithmany details ;1‘ and the celestial globes made of various metals likew isebear testimony to the skill of the Arab instrument-makers.
Montferrier,Dictionna irs des Sciences Matlaénmh'
ques,tome I.,p. 170.
1Silvestro dc Sacy,Relation dc I’Egyp te par A bdallatcf,p. 578.
324 Lasouas AND msr aunss rs
B . Masud B. Mahmud Al-Tabib Al-Kasby,sumamed Ghayiis. He
describes an instrument which he had himself invented,and saysI succeeded in prepar ing ametal disk,by means ofwhich the approach
and latitude of the seven planets,as well as their motion away from the
earth,together with solar and lunar eclipses,can be observed, He
calls this instrument the Tabakal-manatek,or ecliptic plate,and states
that its use is the same as that of the Louh alittisalat,or tablet of conjunctions,invented by learnedmen long ago. No. 59 contains not lessthan five different treatiseson various astronomical instruments,most ofwhich,however,have already been described,such as the armilla,theastrolabe,and a few others,not omitting even the gnomon. In No. 72
the second part of the MS. has for its author Ebn Kashef Al-dynMuhammadKrigy,who describes various instruments,and among them
also one called the Mukblid-al-samavat-val-tirg,,i .s . the keys of heavenand earth. The last MS. to be noticed is No. 21,which contains a
number of instruments,but has on nearer examination not answered
my expectations,although I have copied the whole of it in hopes thata close study of the text would enable me to obtain clear ideas onthe numerous figures it contains,all of which represent astronomicalinstruments. Of some partsof instruments hor izontal and other views
are given,but,as I could not satisfactorily make out how they might fiteach other,I shall be compelled to curtail my descriptions and restrict
them only to a few instruments
The vernier and micrometric screw being probably unknown to the
Arabs,they were,in order to obtain very accurate results,sometimescompelled to use instruments having a very large radius,as for instanceAbu Raihzin Al-Beiruni,who employed a quadrant offifteen cubits.
Nevertheless,heavy and clumsy as these ancient quadrants were,theyserved as models for our beautiful and accurateones,some of which arealmost small enough to becarried in the pocket. The construction ofthe
quadrant is given in M.S. No. 21,as follows —Take a piece of box.
or poplar,or other wood to form two rules and the quadrant,the formerintersecting each other at r ight angles at the centre of the quadrant.
whose two extremities are connected with them. The length of each
of these rulers or bars is not more than five cubits,and the thicknessmust be one quarter ofa cubit,to prevent warping. When these three
parts are firmly joined together in one plane by cutting of some wood
from the thickness of the.bars and of the quadrant,the latter is to be
or m s ARAB asr aonousas . 325
e xcavated circularly so as to present a channel ofabout one digit broadand half a digit in depth,into which an are made of brass or iron is
fi rmly inserted,so as to form but one surface therewith . After draw
ing a r ight angle on the two bars,one point of a pair of compasses isto be fixed in it as a centre,and with the other four concentric arcs are
to be described on the brass or iron quadrant. Then the innermost arcis to be divided into ninety degrees from 5 to 5,the next one into singledegrees,and the third into parts of degrees or minutes. This quadrantis to be fixed in a wall (representing the direction of the meridian) soas tomake but one surface therewith,the perpendicular bar coincidingwith the southern angle of the wall according to the plumb-line ; thenthe other bar will be horizontal . To this quadrant a dioptra moveablearound the centre is fixed by a pin which passes not only through thecentreof the quadrant,but also through the wall . The dioptra is a baror ruler prepared by drawing through its middle a line whic
h must on
the one side pass through the centre of the quadrant,and on the other
point out the degrees. Twopinules,i .e. rectangular pieces of brass,areso fixed on the dioptra that one of them w ill be not far from the centre,and theother fromthe limb of the quadrant. These pinnies both stand
perpendicularly on the dioptra,and observations of the sun or star passing across the meridian are taken by looking through the small eyeholes in the two pinules. Lastly,the holes must be so placed that a
perpendicular line draw n from any of them on the dioptra must strikethe above-mentioned line which passes on the dioptra from the centre
of the quadrant to its limb . This instrument is adapted only for altitudes from the z enith down to the point where the meridian touches
the horiz on to the south,but it may easily be arranged so that it can
be turned and serve for the northern side if necessary .
An old instrument for observing the obliquity of the ecliptic,andfor other purposes,consisted of a circle from which not only degreesand minutes,but also seconds and even terces,could be read off.
The instrument consisted of a circle,not less than six cubits in diameter,which was immoveable,but within it and in the plane of the same
meridian there was another which moved in a northerly and southerlydirection,and a dioptra w ith which sights could be taken of the sun or
stars. There is much probability that an instrument of this kind musthave suggested the vernier ofmodern times,but l do not know whether
any Arab astronomer was ever struck bv the idea that a circle or partofa
326 LABOUas AND INSTRUMENTS
circle moving around another,but not havingexactly the samedivisions,might be made to serve to determine accurately minor divisions,andthus perform the function ofwhat we now call the vernier.
For the purpose ofmeasuring in digits the extent ofa solar or lunareclipse,a dioptra was used with an immoveable ocular pinnle,whichhad a very small hole. This dioptra was divided into 212parts,andtheir subdivisions called the digits of the sun or moon ; within a groove
in this dioptra there was another ruler having also a pinule,but beingcapable ofmotion forwards or backwards until the observer could
perceive the full image of the moon or sun through the hole,whichwas larger than that on the immoveable ocular pinule. Two diskswere used for ascertaining the magnitude of the eclipse,—the larger diskfor a lunar,and the smaller for a solar eclipse,—bymoving the disk between the ocular and objective pinule,arranged as just stated,in such a
manner as exactly to cover the eclipsed part,when the extent could beascertained by taking notice of the division of the ruler over which thedisk stands when it covers the eclipsed part.
There was also an instrument called “the two quadrants, Al
Ruba’
vn,by means of which two observations could be taken simultaneously. On a horizontal circle divided into degrees two quadrants
were so arranged perpendicularly as to forma semicircle if required,andto turn on the axis of the horizontal circle (which rose to some heightand served also as their axis) as doors turn on their hinges,these two
quadrants forming any required angle with each other . Both these
quadrants were provided with separate dioptras.
There was a contrivance for measuring angles without using an ia
strument divided into degrees. It consistedoftwo quadrangular pillarsof masonry (see Fig . 1) whose t0ps were perfectly horizontal,eachbeing covered with an iron plate containing a bed for a horizontalspindle,from which a beamwith twopinules,p,p,for taking sights,wassuspended perpendicularly,and capable of being elevated and turned
bv means of the pulley P. There was another,horizontal beam fixed
to an axle A,and capable of being lifted by a string on the pulley K .
This was called the chord-beam,because it had a scale of chordsmarkedon it according to the perpendicular line A B,which was consideredthe radius,and constituted w ith the two just-described beams a triangle,e .g . A,B,C,when an altitude was observed and it was onlv necessary
328 tacosas AND msr acussrs
latitude of Kashghar,Khojend,Samarkand,Balkh,Kayz,Tuz,TrisShirvan,Asterabad,Kashmir,Ahmedabad,Gujerat,Kambayit [Cambay],Surat,Broach,J unpiir,Dakah,Bengalah,Badakhshin,and Dokhiirti.
The longitudes and latitudes are all given in the Abujad notation ; thefirst name beingMekkah,and having for its longitude g } meaning 7 7
°
and its latitude toK i .s. 21°
At the bottom of the astrolabeis a small cubical protuberance,a,serving to keep all the Cafihat provided with a corresponding cavity,into which it accurately fits,steady,when they are inserted. In the centre there is a hole,It,for receiving an axis or pin which passes also through all the plates,and the
dioptramade ofwhitemetal turns around it. The tophas thefol lowinginscription,taken from the preface to the Gulistén of Sa
’di
6:1“ l be ) ! c an ] J }
44 15! res a“ U a
“ ‘5
The intention of this drawing is that it should remain after us ;
for I see no permanence of life.
”
The back of the astrolabe u ;h y13 05 (see Fig. 3) is divided
into four quadrants by two hues intersecting at right angles in thecentre of the instrument,and pointing to the four cardinal points.
The limb is divided into degrees. It contains also the lines of
shadows 3 9 -0 Us the a )”
r lé sl Us and o f “
eel-OI dBthe words W’
orkmanship of A’
bd-al-A’
ly in i .s. “1
w ith u"uh“ ea
.» “Lo the date,no doubt,standing for A.H. 1119,
A .D. 1707 .
Fig. 4 shows the whole astrolabe complete in a side-view with the
dioptra D D,fixed to its back,the dotted lines a b,b c,and c (1
showing the cavity. i s . mother of the astrolabe. containing all the six
plates. In this figure the dioptra is represented foreshortened,toshow how on the pinules a small hole faces a large one,and vicississ.
The dioptra,however,and all the small parts are also shown in separate
figures,namely,Figs. 5,G,7,8,9,10,for the sakeofgreater perspicuity,and require no further explanation.
The spider o ffline is represented in Fig. 11. and shows the ecliptic
divided into degrees,with the twelve signs of the zodiac markedthereon.
or me am as'
rBONonsas. 329
The constellations w ithin the circle of the ecliptic in their properplaces on the sky are as follows
Ursa major . u fl lt" Mouth of the horse.
F]! u ! ) Head of the fish . a lly -J ! Cancer .
é 'fl'r—“l The falling eagle w é é'ad ivPainted nose.
Menkib. “it‘ll 65k“Neck of the serpent.
( I) a t“ Arcturus.
Without the circle of the ecliptic are
(ll-1s Wing of the crow .
Cbf; Arm.
its ! a) ; S a r e" U? ) The left foot.
S “Aw 9 35 Tail of the whale.
use Bull’
s eye. -H J Heart of the scor
Goelfl -o S pion.
ea ”! Heart of the lion.
In thecentre theA’
nkabzit has ahole,11,through which the axis oftheinstrument passes when inserted into the mother of the astrolabe,andnear the limb there is a button,B,which the observer takes hold ofwhenhe wants to turn the spider around its centre,which is in the pole-starin the tail ofUrsaminor . As the spider,when in position,is the uppermost plate,and inserted when the five others are already in the cavityand fixed by a quadrangular notch in each,corresponding exactly w ithand fitting the cubical protuberance a mentioned in the description of
the mother of the astrolabe,and as
'
it is above the said protuberance,there can be no obstacle to its motion round the centre.
The celestial globe of theMulla Firuz Library is of brass,near ly eightinches in diameter,and is supported by a stand. The meridians are
marked,as well as the ecliptic w ith the figures of the zodiac,and alsothe equator,both divided into degrees. The constellations,which amountto 48 or 49,but have in later times by European astronomers beenaugmented by four more,are all given in figures of men,animals,orother objects,with their names written on them in Arabic,the singlestars in the constellations being marked by large dots of white metal,but most of these have no names attached to them. The axis does not
pass through the true pole,where all the meridians intersect,butthrough the Pole-star in the tail of Ursa minor. From the inscription,one word of which is damaged,it appears that this celestial globe
830 LABOURS AND INSTRUMENTS or ran ARAB ASTRONOMERS.
was prepared for the instruction of the son of some great ma n. It is
as fol lows
d‘
n-llp uses-u, u.) f
u lfill fi l M l
Made and figured at the desire of Allah-Abul-Kasim,son of our
lord and teacher,theparagon ofhis age,and unique inhis period,A’bd
al-Rahman Ben Hasan. May God bestow abundant mercy on both of
them !”
As the year is not marked,it cannot be accurately known when thiscelestial globe wasmanufactured,but,to judge from the writing,it cannot be very old.
332 mass WALABHI’
COPPER-PLATES .
stated in both to be the saita (or son) of Siladitya Dharmaditya ; but
other copper-plates hitherto found describe him as anuja (or youngerbrother). After (No. VIII) Dharasena,wh ile describing the descendants of (IV) Siladitya or Dharm'iditya,he (the said Sfladitya) is stated
to be the brother of Dharasena’
s grandfather ; and Kharagraha (V)is also described in terms which make him out to be the brother of
Siladitya ; so that anuj a (or brother) would be the correct reading,andnot sate (or son) .
(No. VI) Dharasena is styled in Plate B as Dhruvasena ; but in
Plate A he is styled Dharasena ; and the latter seems to be the correctdesignation,as being borne out by other plates hitherto discovered.
(N0. IX) Derabhatta is stated in other plates as anyajanma'
,or son
born of his body but in both A and B he is styled ayraj anmé,whichmay be his elder brother the latter seems to be amistake.From No. XII Siladitya all the subsequent pr inces up to XV are
styled Sfladityadeva,but there is nothing else to distinguish them,—nu
unusual circumstance,which may perhaps he explained by other plateshereafter .
The fifteenth (XV) Siladitya is the grantor of both A and B . Of
these,A is dated Sarhvat 403 (of theWalabhi plates),Magha Babul12th and grants toDémodaraBh liti
’
s sonwasudevaBhuti,Chaturvedi,an emigrant from Wardhamana district (i.e. now Wadhawana Prints)and l iving in Liptikhanda,ofthe Gargyasgotra,oftheBig-Veda section,the v illage of Antarpilliké,near Dinnaputra,in Saurashtra. B is
also a grant to the above individual of the v illage of Khandajja,nearUasinghafrin Saurashtra,dated Samvat 403,Vaiéakha Suddha 13th.
Captain Phillips writes that these were found at Dhanka,a place ofsome note in Kattywar . It is under Gondala It is now amoderate
siz ed v illage. There are other places in its neighbourhood noted for
tiquarian remains,worthy of being inquired into.
The third copper-plate (C) ofwhich I present a facsimile,transcript,and translation to-day came from ThakoreRaul SriMegharajji,ChiefofWale,a third-class chief inKattywar,who forwarded it to the Honourable James Gibbs,our President,by whom it was placed in myhandsWala,sometimes calledWalén by the people,is descr ibed in papers about
i s. dark half of the month ofMagha.
1‘On the Uasingha hill there is a fort of the late (Hindu) per iod,mine d
the stones whereof appear to have belonged to J ain or Buddhist buildings foundon the north side of the fort walls in a mound,which,as well as its neighbourhood,requires to be carefully surveyed.
mass: wsu sm'
COPPI R-PLATES .
mo centuries old asm or war? (i .s.
‘Waleh orWalahé,’
a corruption ofWalahi ofthe Jainp ref/ vita authors,and theWalahhi ofSanskritwriters.Colonel Tod was the first Engl ish writer who identified this placewith theWalabhi of the ancients .
C consists of two copper-plates forming together one grant (or danapatra),slightly spoilt by time,but,except the last corner of the first
plate,and a portion of the beginning of the second (which have beenaltogether destroyed by corrosion),the rest of the plates can nearly all
be read pretty easily .
This grant contains the following enumerat ion of the Walabhi
kings
Sri Bhatarka,[A lineal descendant of his]Guhasena,his son Dharasena,his son Siléditya or Dharméditya.
The last-named is the grantor . Silédityamade the grant in the 286th
year of the era current in Walabhi plates,on the 6th of the dark halfof the month of Jyeshtha. Its object was to support the Bhikshus (byproviding them w ith food,bedding,and seats) for the service of the
sick ; and for medicines and provisions,and for flowers and oil for lampsfor the god (Buddha) ofaVihaira (the name of theVihara is obliterated)inWalabhi,and for the repairs,&c. of the Vihara itself. The followingplaces are given by this grant,viz .
[The village of] Pandharakupika in the precincts [probablyParganaof]Pushyanaka-sthali,[in the v illage of Uchchzipadraka,in the possession of]one Surynka,one field ; and another field in the
possession of [name obliterated] in the village ofKarkajja onewcipi
[probably ameasure of landwhich could be watered by one well]in thepmsession of Ardhaha,and one wdpi in the possession of one Kam
bhska [or ra in the village of Indranipadraha ; a field in the
possession of [name obliterated] on the confines ofWalabhi a flower
garden,and Icupalcas or wells. Thus a v illage with three fields,twowépis,a flower-garden,and four wells,were bestowed.
Wlpi here probably signifies a piece of land watered by a wép i
or well,and the fields are those cultivated by rain-water this inferenceis supported by the present state of things in Kattywar,where thesetwo kinds of fields exist. And the four wells must have been in the
nower-garden.
Along with the last plate,the Thakore sent also two earthen seals,and some coins,on which I have to make very brief remarks.
334. mans wm sm'
corpse-pu rse.
The two seals are made of earth baked ; one appears brown,and the
other black.
The inscriptions are alike. The legend thereon is theBauddhamantr aso often met w ith in five lines :
i t fifi s (Flm‘t
WW W:
This occurs on the pedestals ofBauddha images met with in difi'
erent
parts of India,and also on seals found in stupas (or topes). The
Bauddhas ofNepzil use thismantra at the present day in worshipping theimage of Buddha with parched rice ; and it also occurs at the end of
all their works. Thismantra is not found in Bauddha writings prior tothe fourth century of the Christian era,and also from the form of the
letters on the seals it seems to be later than theendof the fourth century.
In some Nepal works the mantra line 2 reads,instead of Q? anti,gfi sfl
' but the former is the form more frequent.
These seals are in a character later than that of the Walablti plates,as may be seen from the formation of the letters q,er,q . Compar ingthem with the plates,the seals may be of the seventh century of theChristian era,or somewhat later ; and it seems,therefore,that at thattime the city ofWalabhi was the capital of a kingdom,and the religionthen current there was that of Buddha.
‘I
Dr . B iihler,in the Ind ian Antiquary,mentions a similar seal,thelegend ofwhich be therequotes partially . The third word there should,I think,be p rabhavci instead ofP ravltava.
Of the coins
Four are silver,commonly called gadlcayas,of very impure metal.These are corruptions by the later Hindu dynasties of the Sassanian
coins and the present are some of the worst specimens of these
corrupted forms. On one side is a human face almost undisfinguiah.
able by an unpractised eye. On the other is a bad form ofthefire-altar .
The ornaments which occur about the face on the better specimens arehere mere dots . The five copper pics are of the later periods of the
Muhammadan rulers.
0 Vol. I.,p. 130.
336 THans WALABHI’
COPPER-PLATES.
5
mm rmmw fimw fi
aw:m am mfir [4]sierra
m giaqvfiatmv
‘
mm fiqmqwm t sw afirramfi S CI
6 o
wfiatiiaimnfia‘
gfs : arm'
s“
: {trW e? [5]M N ‘
7 9
an ag ram“
massaLO] fa? reams: W W W
mam a mamm a
em [a]dam :flags
are] [apart W e area] wmfixm = m in-
smasarescssm
’
irrmfla w as :
{w mmsw z a‘mé’mafl
rear [7]armFast
'
ssr [7]arm : w rit-sass
Hmsmfitnn’
sfi fim srmfi
as [8]61: FMrm” [8]ms:W arm ing
f‘
m steamémqrfi i flamm W m fi trimmamm samaffix
-
ctr affer
I4
grammar? [9]{am m(“
Hr (“We fi r? (
“
Mfr
U s ( l a: ( l 'T ( l ffi
mass WaLAnm'
COPPER-PLATES . 337
M aw qt stems—W W « safes t
use : m amm w m
m gfimgfisfilfi 61133151
30 21
reg stem [13]em: 5
m firm awtsmar ter 51m wfi m m [1l]
( M? ( ) t l fl Tfit W
2:0m (
m) Repetit ion,
(w) qr’WI (
20
) 1Should,from the context. and
other plates,be sa ri s : (as
) at
ts [a]rm fimesm ummyfamgdsfifasmm mmt . eaéi
‘
wmhflrmy firmIt
ex x15
fl
qmnm w fi gwmrfl lwmt
B 17
gwamfimm[12]gwam
exfarii]w fimfifimfim'
usifi é
mfaqfltiiam pmifi fi énearfim if
‘
crwh3]W arm
31W mfirew’
mmfiass et? (w e [14]wttaxm
[rka Wm fihfim
[flfirem fmfam ewfir mammalia
)HUI gfl‘
: The or ig inal is clear ly an
m m ("
H (“MT (
“
l s(“Mei r (
"w t“
) fimfirfir11311The repet ition is a cler ical error .
rm
338
W rm zflins mar
Wmmamqrfs iyafi afw[15]w as?“mi ss
-
e rsemit23
WWW Q Q : merma
m afi:W e [16]
fei‘
mifi'
éfiw rgmegmm zI1
mafimwfi rw‘
ram: 3011'
s26
m“
aqm'
51raqrias&tfim [175-1
27
snag-
pans: « sures t : afie
t trz'
fm gara’marj ww sai.
fivrfm =Wh iskers [18]Farmm mfimfim : eas tw
mf‘
emfi mfi rwwmg a
W mfimmm raism'
i
arse-
ner [19]W ins m s30
gfirfi'
qmfi fiM armarsl
01: w msm m sm rr
fir rs (25
) 71
q i l iii q
(9 9
) some plates make it NFWW '
MFR, e. who found out [all]theschemes [of his en9 111ies
1.
(“l s May be zir (3)
THREE WALABHI'
COPPER-PLATES .
Eden’
smamfimm [1]=m%
s r: status : as: [181551
maram ti‘
mfiwa filmw mwnfimfit [19]are fi t
26
am fiw fiam fiufilfi qt
w sngt isss’fi lhfin is
mr’
é [20]115W m as-
sum
) s ("
h r (“h
( H mm (“H
mass wsnasm'COPPER-PLATES . 341
6m m tram—fi rm 111111;z
W WW “Mr“ T ’
ses [a]m mm ammary]W U an
’
hfihfii‘
sfl‘
amfiqdw a rfis
Fr'
smssrfiwmgtrm: Fair:
its [4]m firw : i rm s-"
gs:
1111: Gam es unrem i
W W : [8]sfigfl'fiw
(“l Iii-v .11 l s 5111
("
l N hires-11131117113 ?(a
) A clerical error .
342 THREE WALABHI’ COPPER-PLATES.
W erner-
{haw 111117 111161
W inner-1mm regs]: slaw :511[9]mmamm figagma 11315211161 m ffiwfi afi r agga
-
sear
[19]rem ain:i sth m
Gu
zmfinmm]m ash in
mainframe zm a'
afisfi [W [13] (arm '
s
(”H
1 mm ( 11111611rants? “ sai (
“l fir
1am l fs (”Hr (
“11st (
”ma r (“Wm
(“la t
”) <1 wfir
mm : WAu nm‘
COPPER-PLATES. 345
imam [26]m7.
W [261WW 2l?
=n[27]m fimfimrawh
zrzfi [28]fiqfi fi aiffaamtr
W inemgfla:58mminim
W ma‘a‘xrfméfiafim lilueuam an W igwam
fafirzpl][293m m 1m 11;
133?Eran [29]$q e
at? W earcrfi'ma
filmm sa [II]argfimhm
gm“ W EN. [I1][30]1m 1m 1m {rm m an
m [umdiv-fit? an'
i zmma’tai mW mmfiw
22 instead of{firm F2.
(7 0
) if“: (so) It would be better
b
io
021135513? [22]newm an
M mfifllfi ufm man?! imam[30] gr 31m[lmlhfii M fir fir
srf‘
amafia: [math—J armew-ata mi? 2137 arfifzfir
fi'
ta'
efi 6! tier 801“
amxi wa i t rm
("
h it-f h is ?
H (“W2
346 THREE WALABHI cor ms-ru n s.
m um an? i t amam
swath [mums [21]scisssmfit reefs slat : 311
23331
W I er 6173? m fi ffi fl
Translation of the Walabl u’
Copper-plate Grant .
GONDALA A .
P late First .
[May]Prosperity [attend]From the great SaivaSri Bhatta
’
i rka, [who]resided in the citynamedSrikhetaka. the abode of success ;who had achieved success in hundreds of battles occurring in the
wide extent of territories of Maitrakdsf who were endowed with iacomparable courage,and who had forcibly reduced their enemies to
submission ;who had gained the affections of those whom he had conquered by
bravery,by means of gifts,honours,and candour ;who has obtained the glory of a king through the power ofhis de
voted army [of three kinds],termed maula,I [i .e. hereditary soldiers],bhr ita [i.e. receiving pay for service done],and éregu
'
[i .c. man em
ployed in thémis or posts].
sometimes termed Bhatarkka,and Bhatarka in other plates.1' Seems to be a race of the later Kshatrapa warr iors.I See the Nz
’
tisdra,or the Elements of Polity,by Kamandaka,edited by Bi biB éjondl
'
QML-Mitm,Calcutta,1861,p. 118,fix.
2“m m ,oh
xviii.,v. 4 . This gives six kinds of forces. In other plates w hidah or friends
are accounted a species of force 5 that is,the expression runs thus
W flailfat”P . These terms are also defined in the Ni limayikha of Nib»
kntitha,whose interpretations I have adapted.
348 mass WALABHI'
COPPER-PLATES.
ly—and whose beauty—induced the [:Ibhiydmilca or]kingly qualities“
themselves to approach him [i .e. his protection]rapturouslywhose innate strength and acquired education specially astonished
all wielders of the bowprotector of the old Dharm'iddya [i .s. religious] grants of former
sovereigns ;the destroyer of evils Oppressing [his]subjects ;one showing [in himself] the combination of Lake/mil [i.s. riches]
and Sarasvati [i .s. learning];1'
whose power in enjoying [or preserving] the wealth gained fromenemies overthrown [was]noted ;whose pure kingly wealth was gained by valour ;this was the great Maheévara Sridharasena.
His son [was Sri Sihiditya]
who,worshipping at his [father’
s]feet,has occupied the whole firmament by the aggregateof remarkable qualities causing joy to thewholeworld
TheseWW W qualities are thus laid down in the Nttiscira.ofKamandaks.[Calcutta cd .,p. 78]
‘
wai srém sflsm'
ew rsm'
ean arsfwnmw m mmnmM amsmfiwfimlm m i
fl w s mfiw ne u
fimnll c llCh. iv.,W . 6—8 ; the gloss at p . 166 runs thus
a r
’
,‘W
’am :
c
qm fim m ‘ r,cm '
5auwm .
W I w fi f sfirn ew new ism as fi z,‘
sft z'
amps star,‘arsrqfim
‘
ar’
T sis—am nesia.
‘m mfl ar mm
BTW : W W W await are: awe.‘
w fi m’
. M aw-
a“.
W ow h I fi n em“
a mfizfim an 12”
2m m :W rits areW armm s sumssrmiz,‘
fi'
vffaar'
firmmm m e w‘srarfimfimrz’seams
-
fi rmsat.
1' This is considered an unusual combination.
mass WALABIII'
COPPER-PLATES . 349
whose shoulder is beautified by the brilliancy of the sword whichhas been crowned w ith success on hundreds of battle-fields who bearsthe great weight of serious [state]projectsrefined in intellect by a study of all the sciences,* spiritual as well
as temporal,and yet capable of receiving pleasure from even a grain
of fine talkthe seriousness of whose mind is °
unapproachable by all,and yet
whose virtuous conduct clearly discloses a very beneficent disposition ;who has acquired great fame by an investigation of the ways of all
the kings in the K r ita age
who,by following the paths of v irtue (or Dharma) obtained enjoyment of thepurest wealth and happiness,and thus gained for himselfthe truly significant second name Dhanndditya 1
'
[This was]the great Mzihesvara Sri-Silziditya.
His son (l) [should be his younger brother]I the worshipper of hisfeet ;
whose courage was not shaken by either joy or sorrow,in bearingon his shoulders,as the well-disciplined bullock does carry [the yoke],themuch-to-be-coveted kingly wealth with which he was invested [byhis brother who]behaved towards him with the same respect as Indradid towards [his younger brother] Upendra for his soul was devoted to simple obedienceAlthough his footstool was covered by the lustre ofjewels set in the
diadems of hundreds of kings subdued by his prowess,still the bent ofhismind was not affected by pride which would hurt the self-respect ofothers
whose enemies,though celebrated,powerful,and proud,had left offall means of opposing him,save the one of submissionthe collection ofwhose pure qualities has gladdened the whole world
These are laid down as in: and 311113 See also Mandatopan ishada,KhandaI 5
m agma: smarter -ast z ras tar—vi eoarm W W I“
ai
W l aa aaaarm raflnm ”
Calcutta ed. 1850,pp. 260 69 .
1' The sun ofDinar-ma.or virtue.
1Other plates give it as 313W,and it also agrees with the context .
The ori ginal is dsaktam,but it should be read as amnj itam.
I]From this it clear ly appear s that Siladitya r esigned in his bmther’s favour,
and seated h im on the throne during his lifetime ; and he gave his whole wealthto his obedient brother .
350 mass WALAnm’
cor rsas rw rss.
who,by his power,has destroyed the entire manifestation of the
force ofKali
whose mind was most exalted because it was not tainted by all the
sins which occupy the thoughts of the wickedwhose exceeding bravery and excellence inwielding armswere famous ;who,having obtained the wealth ofmany opposing kings,had raised
himself to the first rank amongst the brave and powerful ancient
sovereigns ;this was the great Mdheévara Kharagraha ;his son who was a worshipper at his feet ;who intensely delighted the hearts of all the learned by acquiring
all knowledge ;who,by his power and generosity,when his enemies were of their
guard,had broken the axle of the moral and mental chariot ofhis
Opponentswho,although acquainted w ith the deepest portions ofmany sciences,
arts,and popular annals [or biography],was yet ofa very pleasant disposition ;who,being artlessly gentle,whose gentleness became his ornament ;who,by tak ing the flags after successes on hundreds ofbattle-fields,
has destroyed by his famous arms the r ise of pride of all his enemies ;whose command is accepted by the whole circle of kings,whose
pride as warriors has been destroyed by his own how.
This was the great Mi’
iheévara Sridharaseua.
His younger brother the worshipper at his feet whose virtues
excelled those ofall former kings who by his valour acquired countrieswhich were very hard to obtainthe very impersonification ofmanliness ;whose subjects came to him—like Manu—of themselves,being in
spired thereto by love for his high qualities,which had filled their
hearts ;invested with [knowledge of] all arts and sciences ; brilliant. causing
comfort,like the moon,and yet whose splendour is not obscured [ likethat of the moon] he is like the moon himselfwhose ample glory has destroyed the vast darkness [of ignorance]
in the vast expanse of the heavens like the sun [unlike whom]he isshining at all times ;
Like other words,this is a figure of speech thus Kalameans arts,&c.when applied to the king,and phases when used in connection with themum
352 THREE WALABHI'
COPPER-PLATES .
the paramount power,the great king of k ings,the supreme lord,themonarch of the earth,[named]Sridharasena.
A,Second P la te.
[Then comes Sri Derabhatta.]The son of Siladitya,the brother of his [é ridharasena
’
s] grandfather,who [Sri Siladitya]was like Sérngapéni [L e. Vishnu],who hadmade obeisance by lowering his limbs through devotion [to Siléditya]whose head was always kept shining by the exceedingly fair lustre
of the gem-like nails of [his father’
s]feet,like the most fair Mandé kini
[i .e. Ganges]who was a royal sage,like Agastya,* scattering liberalitywhose circle of richly fair fame graced the horiz on [literally the
eight directions of the sky],and formed an entire and total halo roundthe lord of the night [moon]in the heavens ;who was the lord of the earth,whose [i .e. earth’s]two breasts are
the Sahya and Vindhydmountains,whose tops clothed in black cloudsappear like [her]nipples ;[such was]DerabhattasrH is son [was Dhruvasena]who gave protection to a host of allied kingswearing the cloth of their own pure fame,and offering him (like a
gar land of flowers by a damsel at her own marr iage) the sovereigntyIof their kingdoms
This is a figure founded on the word ddkshinya,which means living in thesouth,like the sage Agasti,and w isdom or generosity like that of a royal sage.
1' The object of thus br inging in Derabhatgta by circumlocution seems to
be this —the main line of kings terminates w ith Dharasena ; and Siladitya,thebrother of Kharagraha and father of Derabhatta,was not in the direct line of
kings,but his son Derabhatta.seems to have been an ofiicer of note,who had
probably made excur sions or conquests towards the Vindhya and Sahyadr i
ranges. But his son,Dhr uvasena,again ascends the Walabh i masnad. A ll the
copper-plates since the time of this Dhruvasena date from the camp Khetaka.
and those pr ior to thisDharasena date from Walabhi . This Khetaka is probab lythe present Khedfi or Kaira and it seems to have formed a part of the Walabh i
dominions. Since the time of this Dharasena,it seems that the Walabhi kings
hereafter lived in Khetaka,instead ofWalabhi .
I The or iginal word for the host of kings is Hgfi'
f,which being in the feminine gender,the whole figure is founded thereon,and hence the example of
swaysmrara,or giving away in mar r iage by a damsel of her own person.
m ass WALABm'
COPPER-PLATES . 353
who possessed valour which was irresistible,and which he held likea sword. subduing a formidable array of enemies ;
who duly efl'
ected taking possession of the countries of his enemies,the acquisition of which was made by force in winter [i .e.m ],by forcibly handling his bow and arrow ;and who has properly taken the taxes from those countries ;whose cars,which had been already ornamented [ by listening to lec
tures]conveying profound learning,were further beautified with ornaments made of precious stones ;the ends of whose hands bore wristlets beautified by sparkling
emeralds,[which looked]as it were made ofyoungmoss,luxuriant withthe sprinkling ofwater accompanying uninterrupted gifts ;1who had embraced the earth with arms forming the boundary line
of the ocean made up of jewelled bracelets which he worethe great Miiheévara—This was Sri Dhruvascna.
His elder brother [was Kharagraha]whose body was marked by altogether unmistakable signs by Lak
ehmi herself in her embrace,as if with the sole object of getting rid of
the sin [communicated by]the touch of other—sovereigns ;who had attracted all sovereigns [towards himself]by the greatness
of his exceedingly graceful deeds who had joyfully gained over otherkings by his great love [towards them];Iwho has burnt out by his valour the race of all his enemies
who gave all his wealth [Lakshmi]to the company ofhis friends [unlike Vishnu]who w ielded no disease [or distress];who never left the company of the true sciences ;
who played no sports of childhoodwho despised no twice-bornwho won the earth by valour alonewho did not sleep among or keep company with the dullardswho being an extraordinarily excellent person,like Dharma himself,
properly regulated the practices of the different orders of the classes ofthe people
The same countr ies are compared to beantiful daughters.
f This is a figure of speech : a g ift by a Hindu is always confirmed by w ater
poured by the hand of tho g iver on that of the receiver . And hence the in
troduction ofmoss,which g row s in water y places.
1This is near ly a repetition,and does not occur in B.
5“any ofthe adjectives here used are applicable to the god Vishnu.
354 T HREE WALABHI'
cor pse-prams.
whose family was glorified by the standard of his excellent spotlessvirtue,being lauded and raised by the three wor lds,which were much
delighted by his freeing and confirming with his highly frank disposition even those grants to gods and Brzihmanas which had been spoliatedby former kings of the earth,who had been incited by a shade of greedwho,having duly honoured the gods,the twice-born,and his pre
ceptor,permanently introduced new grants.* was yet unsatisfied,and theseries ofwhose famous deeds filled the cardinal points of the heavens ;this was Kharagraha,the great Mriheévara,whose second name was
Dharmaditya,which is but plain and truly significant.Of his elder brother 1[Siléditya]who enlightened all the regions of
the world by his fame,which was just like the light of themoon unfolding the beauty of a host of lotuseswho was lord of the Earth,whose heavy breasts were the black
Vindhva mountains,like a bal l of the unguent made of the blackpowdered aloe
and whose name was Sri Siladitya,whose son was Sri Sfladityadeva,who was like thenewmoon,increasing every dayhis stock of knowledge ;who graced the splendour of royalty,as the young lion graces the
mountain forestwho,like the god Kcr
’
r tilceya,I was crowned with a diadem,andwho was possessed of formidable powerwho was full of glory,like the sultry Sarad season,and whosewealth
was in full bloom,like lotuses in the .Sarad seasonslaying the cloud-like [big] elephants erhis enemies ;who,like the morning sun,destroyed in battles the lives of the cue
mies in front
who was a great votary of Siva,a great monarch,a great lord,and
The word in the or ig inal is tad/ranger the meaning of this has not yet been
proper ly settled it seems,however,to be something w hich accompanied gifts
of towns,because in near ly all plates thegrants are gi ven along w ith ud/rangas,and therefore must be some old coin of those days.1' This was also not in the line of kings,and must therefore have been a
subed dr of the country about the Vindhya range.
I The words in the or ig inal have two senses,one applicable to the king,and the other to the god Kdr tikeya.
Here also is a play on words .
356 THREE WALABHi’
COPPER-PLATES .
[this]was Sri Siladityadeva,a great votary of Siva,devoted to thefeet of the great king,the mighty lord,the great king of kings,SriBappa; this was the greatmonarch,the great lord,and the great king ofkings [Sri Silridityadeva]commands allBe it known to you all ; each and all thus for the increase of
the merit and fame ofmy father and mother and myself,for the ac
quisition of the fruit of this and of the next world,is given out of
charity by me,confirming the gift by pouring of water,to BhattaVasudeva Bhii ti,the son of Bhatta Damodars Bhtiti,who,leaving SriVardlmm/ma Bhulctz
‘
,1has taken up his residence in Lipti-khanda ;who is familiar w ith the four sciences,I of the Gargyas gotra,a
student of the Bahr r icha Stilt/1dfor the performance of bali [i .e. worship],char s [i .s. rice for sacri
ficial oblations],vazsvadeva [i .e. offering to all deities],agm'
hotra [i .e.
sacrificial libations to the th ree fires],Icratu [i .a. other sacrifices after
the simple sacrifice to the fire],&c.,the village of Antarpallikii,"near
Dinnaputra,in the Surrishtra country,along w ith adranga, with all
its appurtenant taxes,&c.
w ith the r ef/ta [i .s . r ight to exact labour]along with timerm ay; I]with the profits i nkind and ca
.sh [literally
gold]with the jurisdiction to inquire into the ten offences ;[the gift is]not to be interfered w ith by all government officerswhich was not given before either to gods or B rahmanas ; which,on
the principle Bhumichhidra,is to continue as long as the moon,thesun,the ocean,the earth,rivers and mountains lastwhich is to be enjoyed by the son,the grandson,and the descendants[of the donee]therefore,wh ile he,with the due limits of the rules ofcharitable gifts,
enjoys it,ploughs it,or causes it to be ploughed,or parts with it,he
Probably Wadhawana. 1' TalukaI The fodr Vedas. There is a section among the Mods Brahman” termed
Chatnrvedi,now cor rupted to Chacbarvedi.
See note’,p. 356.
As yet nntranslatable : the expression occurs in var ious shapes,thus : G11"
c 2W W W W :,sometimes we havem : instead
of I]
m ass wasxsm’
corpse-mu ss. 357
should not be obstructed by any either the future blessed kings or ourheirs,or others,knowing thatwealth is unsteady,human life is transitory,and that the reward of the gift of land is common [to all kings],this ourgift should be acquiesced in and protected . It is said—The earth hasbeen enjoyed by many kings,beginning with Sagara when it is theterritory of any one,the fruit [of gift]belongs to him.
What good person will possibly retake the wealth which is made theabode of charity by k ings,from fear of povertv,which [wealth] isconsidered like m'
rmcilya [i . e. flowers devoted to gods] or a thingvomited ?The grantor of land lives in heaven for sixty thousand years ; its
depr iver,and the ratifier of such deprivation,shall dwell those years
[sixty thousand]in hel l.’
This [gift] is by the humble Agent [termedDtitakal Siltiditya.
This is w ritten by Sr i Gillaka,commander of the army,and son of
Sri Buddha Bhata. Samvat 403,N tigha Vadya 12.
My own hand .
Explanatory Note to Gondala Copper-
plate Grant B .
(A) In grant A,line 9,the passage is“m a n-g em “ .
“ fam e,whereas in this it runs thus : m arina-thum p I
think this reads better,and is thus translated : whose power in en
joying [or preserving]the wealth of his overthrown enemies.
”
(B ) Line l l . In grant A there ism m mmmwhereas in B the passage is garmfifmg
-
W im sr And
this seems to be better than the other,and may be rendered thus :The excess of whose good deeds have made quite clear his very
benevolent disposition.
”
(C) In A (lines 12and 13) occur the words wmamrqm,while inB the words areW W W . Both expressions,however,bear thesame meaning [see translation].
(D) Line The wordm1 is clearly an error ; for the same kingin A is fi x,and that he isW ,and not gags,appears clearly fromother copper-plates.
(E) Line 21. In A the corresponding passage runs thus : mm imfi r whereas 11] B it is “
e m fffi'
arqfl m i
mfa’: which means,“ who excels all former k ings by the acquisitionofall the sciences.
”In the above passage I have added [W m],as
itmakes the sense more complete.
358 mass t xsm'
COPPER-PLATES .
(F) Lines 27 and 28. In B,after the words W W comes arm.
which does not occur in A,but the sense of both passages is exact
the same.
(G) Line 29 . In B,after the words 115e q there isan evident omission ofM m : which occur in A. For without thisaddition there can be no comparison,and the sense would be incomplete .
The meaning is that by the taking of light taxes he gladdened the
earth ; but,to bring this out,the wordsM urmmust be inserted.
(H ) Line 8. In B the words arem m ,ni gh t”; whilein A the corresponding passage runs thus : “W h it?
m g
”Therefore sw im,meaning extended
and very powerful glory,&c.,is an additionto B .
( I ) Line 9 . In B the word armw rm: occurs whereas in A we
haveW lsfitm that is,in A we have the attribute,and in B theperson.
360 rear s t xsni’COFFEE-PLATES.
[10] mm sm ears? sim msfi i t rims] efleta i zfl'tsr[11] firms : W W W Manam
M flq‘ffl: m s“!
[12] I : M ew gals-m m
W aessm'
goe]
[191 m M m m sn -hfifig
IO
m . t'
) arm-aria In this art is an addition to A,and meansmore.
(10
) In A the read ing is 8113; here it is a,which forms one m ponnd
meaning—who has borne on his shoulders the weight of ser ious pmjeotl .
(n) Ifl
'
rq’
. (n
) In A,instead of m g ,fifia'
a'
( a exist; The”seat passage runs thus “
or w ho has acquired great fame by discover ing the
deserted paths of the It'
n'
ta age.
”(i s
) The two intervening letters between t
and (Z,Wfi’,are corroded. Eight letters after fi'
are lost. (n
) Sixletters after it are lost. The line after t is altogether lasts
mass wamsm'
COPPER-PLATES . 361
Second Plate.
[1] W ghmvmm w mm iwmfimfi gman
[e] erst asr—[glwmwfifi s rqvfi
‘rmfi mire: a eros
[3] mi er w rri fimm w‘cfi ssmfi
W ares a [as]
[W ] mmfis w mfi m ufi‘wm mmm amsumm[5] fis t! ) ]m an m am—«miter “
w ere.
W WW W assum
[7]W W W : M ainstream
[8] 3133 : {W ham miflisfiihsfim‘aemmais
Wfilfi‘mfilm[9] In stasis as steamm m {in quire a}.
M afi a W WW sant
M an am a W ith [11] erg
gm swimmfirrm m m W m m m puuh rm
Three letters lost. Letter to“,
362 mass wsu nm’COPPER-PLATES.
[13]we: [n] W aah i t an mg
Note on a Walabhi Copper-
p late GrantfromWolf,in Kdtl uamida.
Instead of a translation of the whole plate,which would,to a greatextent,be a repetition of what comes in the translation of A (see pp.
16 to 27 —for in these plates the adjectives applied to the differ
ent kings are,excepting some slight verbal changes,almost preciselythe same—I propose to give below only those parts where this plate
difl'
ers from the others,and also those where additional information,such as concerning the subject of the new grant,the grantee,&c.
&c.,is to be obtained,or further explanations appear to be necessary.
Thus,in this plate,we have a Bhatarkka [Bhattarka] and in his line
we have Guhasena,his son Dharasena,his son Siladitya,otherwisecalled Dharmaditya. Their description in this plate is the same as
in A,to which I beg to refer .
In the beginning of the plate,in line 1,the word Waldo/tit“,i.e.from Walabhi, shows that this plate is from that city,and not from
Khetaka,from which subsequently copper-
plate grants (like GondalaA and B,see pp. 335 to 346) have been issued.
A fter this,up to line 17,first plate,the adjectives are similar tothose in A,and any verbal differences are given in themarginal notesto the transcript . The following is a translation of the part fromand
after the words Sri Siladityah m line 17,first plateThe great votary of Siva,the prosperous Sri Silaiditya,commands
each and all,[such as]the Ayulrtalcas,* the Viniyuktakas,’ Mahat
In A and B this phrase runs thus Thus in A and
B we have flow ers used up and matter vomited,while here we have the madup flow er s only.
0 Some village emeers
INDEX TO
Ah-al-Wofs,319,322Ahwaz ; Conquest of some towns
of the,193Albatenius,316,317Andreas,Dr .,Sketch ofInvestigations in Persia,xxxvi
Angediva,Historical and Archaeological Survey of the Island of,288
Arab Astronomers and their In
struments,311Astrolabe in the Mulla
Librarv,311Firuz
Bahrain,Expedition from,193Babu Ramdas Sen,280Beloochee (Mekranee) Dialect,1Boekrah founded,186Bridge,Battle of the,167B li hler,Dr . Additional Re
marks on the'
Age of the Naisbadiva,279
Correa,Gaspar,295Camoens,298Canarese (Old) and Sanskrit
scriptions,219Chdlukyas,105
Dynasty,219Chand,280
VOL XL
Da Cunha,Mr . J . Gerson,Au Historical and Archaeo
logical Sketch of the
Island of Angediva,288
On the Tooth-relic of
)eylou,Gautama Buddha,115Dalada,115De Barros
'
Decades,290,295,304De Braganqa,D. Constantino,128Dhatuvaiiéa,117Do Couto,Diego,127
E
Bulk,Persian,conquest of,151the loss of. 165
Espalnin,occupation of,202
G
Gildemeister,J 292
Gorgan,Taberistan,Aderbnjan,andDerbend. conquest of,207
Growse.ML,280
II
Hormuz én,Capture of,193
Fars,K i1-man,Seistan,andMekran,Expeditions to,215
Fleet,Mr . J . F.,O ld Canarese and
Sanskrit Inscriptions relating to
the Chieftains of Sindavar'
néa,219
INDEX TO VOL. X1.
Ibn Batfita,291,293,294
J aldlzi and Ilelw1’
1n,the takingof,189
Jamshid B . Masud B . MahmudAl-Tabib Al-Kasby,324
Jayantachandra J ayachandra,279
Kadesyah,Battle of,17 9Kfinyakubja or K imoj,279Karneévara,99Kolluipura,Inscription on Maha
lakshmi Temple,103Kufah built bv Musalmans. 192
Imga-worship,99
Madayn,the taking of,187Mahaivanéa,118Maligfiva Temple,14 1Mandlik,Hon . 11110 Sdheb V. N.,
Sangamesvara MahatmyaandLii1ga-worship,99
Three Walabhi copper
plates with remarks,331Mekranee (Beloochee) Dialect,1Musalmzins,Progress of the,174
Nahr-al-dam, e. River ofBlood,154
Naishadhiya,Additional Remarkson the Age of the,279
Nehtivend,the taking of,198
Paolino,Fra di San Bartolomeo,307
Paraéurdma,106Persia ; Sketch of preposed Inves
tigations in,xxxviSubj ugation of, by the
Moslems,147Pierce,Mr . E.,Descr iption ofMokrance-Beloochee Dialect,1
Prabandhakosha,279Ptolemy
’
s Almagest,314Pfirnaiva,Mr 280
Rajaéekhara,279Ramakshetra,100Rehatsek,Mr . E on Labours of
theArabAstronomers.and their Instruments,description of the
Astrolabe in theMullaFiruz Library,311
—Ou the Subjugation ofPersia by the Moslems,and ex
tinctionofSdsainiauDvnastv,14 7t s Davids,139
Sahgameévara Mahatmya,9 9Szisanian Dynasty,extinction ofthe,147
Szisxinians,Chronology of the,148Sédillot,J . J .,319Sédillot,M . L . A . M.,312,320,327
Sesha,99Siladitya,331Sinda Family,Genealogy of the,219
Sindavamsa,Inscriptions relatingto the Chieftains of the,219
Sriharsha,279
1? ABST RACT O F THE S O C IETX S P RO CE EDIXGS,
6. A New Chalukya Copper-
plate,dated Saks 532,with Remarks,bv Kashinath T rimbak Telang, B.
156 Facsimiles,140 ofwhich represent Muhammadan,H indu,Bactrian,Roman,By zantine,&c. Coins,and 15Muhammadan,Svrian,and other Gems,by E. Rehatsek,H .C .B.
A Note on the Age of Madhusddana Sarasvati,bv d himith
Trixnbak Telang,M .A .,LL B .
The Society'
s J ournal .—Since June last,Nos. 29 and30 ofthe Socie
tv'
s Jour nal have been printed. No. 29 has been distributed,and No. 30,tog
ether with an Index to Vol . X.,w ill be in the hands of the .‘Iembetsin the c ourse of th e next two weeks. They w ill complete the tenth
volume of the Journal. It is proposed to commence a new volume in
the eurrent y ear. so as. if possible,to publish during the vear all the
papers read w ithin that vear .
The l‘
11t -11’1wue1
—At the death ofMr . Tay lor. letters A andB of the
firs t Part were 1ady,set up in type. Since then the remainder of
Part 1. and the whole of Part II. have been ca r ried through the press ;
and the “111111111111 Catalogue up to the end of 1873 is placed before the
Meeting o n this dav .
.1e .\1111ex1\1is an Abstract Statement andAuditors
’
Report of
the 1
‘
\1i111\1
'
s 11111111
\ 511111w ing a balance of Rs.-9-7 in favour of
11111 S. Then1 11111. besides. the following sums belonging to the
G111x11
1
11
1111111111111
‘
\1tio:1
1 1111 R 11 111111. d Donation (depositedm
11111 t‘11111111 111
11 11a.1k 01 India. Lou
1111111 11111111 6 0
111111311111111111111‘111sh11tta11111as Tonation (depmited in
517 13 0
i
2113119 313 11M'
S s111 1 11 511313 5 : the Receip ts .
—The amount11\1I1s1\11111111161 year 1
1
3 .
1
111 1
1: .111s et Resident Members and
S ubwu lw s 11111111 Rs 11‘ 120 1111111111: 1
‘
73 it was. as well as can be
11111111 11111 3111
1
111131. 1 1 111rt1\
1
t accounts. Rs. 1 the dif
11111111w 111111111111 11! al
l
:11 01111
11: the .1er rate b eing Bs. 3,l 87 -8-0,111 11111111 “o zd x
. 11111
1111s v ear nearly correspondsto 11111 111111
1
N 111111111 111 t'
11e amount of subscr iptions, 25
(1111N A“
O FFIC I AL,L IT ER ARY,AND SC IENT IFIC .
It was then proposed by the Rev . Dr. Wilson, Honorary
Pr esident of the Society,and seconded by the Rev . J . S . S. Robertson
That the Report now read be adopted,and that the best thanksof the Society be presented to the O ffice-bearers of the Society for
their valuable services during the past year. This motion was carried
unanimously.
The Rev . Dr. Wilson then submitted the following motion,commemorative ofDr . t iu
TheSociety in again adverting to the death ofDr . t iuDziji,theirhonouredVice-President,which occurred on the 29th ofMay last,cannot but anew express their appreciative and tender regard for his
memory,founded on his high character,distinguished talents and
acquisitions,and his consecration of them to objects of public utility,not only as connected w ith his ownprofession as amedical practitioner,but as bearing on general literature and science,especially on the anti
quities,civil and religious history,authorship,and productive resourcesof India in all its extent. They gratefully recall to remembrance the
effective assistance which he rendered to the instruction and education
of his countrymen as an assistant-professor in the Grant Medical
College ; as the author of a Priz e-essay dehortative of the unnatural
crime of Infanticide prevalent among the J zidejtis of Kathiaiwaid and
Kachh as a Member of the late Government Board of Education ; as
a personal advocate and early supporter of Indian Female Education ;
as a constant attendant at social meetings for the enlightenment and
improvement ofstudents ; as a frequent public lecturer in the Town Hall
ofBombay and other localities ; as one of the Fellows of the University
of Bombay mentioned in the Act of Incorporation,.a member of twoof its faculties,and of late years one of its Svndics and as one of the
originators of our public Museum. They recogniz e his genuine
philanthopy in fearlessly supporting the cause of truth and purity on
the occasion of the prosecution in the Supreme Court,in 1864,of a
public journalist for his exposure of the immoral tenets and practices
of the professed heads ofa sect denominating themselves the followers
of Vallabhzicharya ; and in his long-continued and expensive exertions
tomitigate and remove human suffering,especially in connexion with thedreadful disease of leprosy,by which so many in this land have,forages,been grievously afflicted.
“ In adverting to the special obligations of this Society to Dr . Bhéu
Dip,they feel called upon to insert i n this place the titles of his
ansr aac r or r un soc rsr v’s PROC EEDINGS,
means not only of extending his physical researches,but of increasinghis ability to benefit his fellow-countrymen bv imparting to them
the benefits of the European practice of medicine and surgery. He
became a student at the Grant Medical College,and was one of the
first who were distinguished as After holding for a veryshort time the appointment of Sub-Assistant Surgeon,he gave up the
idea of Govermnent service and commenced a private practice,whichin time exceeded anvthing he could have at first hoped for,and whichsoon made him famous as one whose w isdom and exPericnce rendered
him the best adviser for the ailments of all classes,from the prince to
the peasant,from the chief to the coolic and while his opinion was
courted by his rich fellow-countrymen,he,to his great credit,never
turned away his face from the poor man,’
but,aided in every way byhis hardly less able brother,Dr . Nairziyain D.ij i,administered to the
medical wants of large numbers of the poor at their dispensary in this
c ity. Ever anxious for information,he searched the old works of the
Sanskr it sages,and examined the effect of drugs to which they had
given almost fabulous power over diseases,and in the course of this
inquiry was led to the investigation of that terrible disease leprosy.
Much has been written and said about his secret . I think it right to saythat the medicine is no secret. (Hear,hear .) I know that it is known to
many—to some here present—and the treatment is still carried on by
his brother. But what Dr . Bhaiu D.ij i felt was that in this matter itwas not w ise to publish the results until those results showed,as far ashuman eve could see,a certainty in grappling with the disease. I was
present on one occasion w ith some of the leading medical and scientific
men of this city when Dr . Bhau Daij i showed us drugs,and photographs of patients in the different stages,and also living instances of
the power the medicine had had for good,and he then explained thathe still held back from placing the treatment before the profession and
public until he could conscientiouslv sav,Here is a cure. In the
meantime he was accunmlating the necessary facts and having the
illustrations prepared for the work. H is sad illness and death have
prevented its completion,but we mav trust that his able brother will
perfect what he left undone. I now turn to his more public career as
a citizen of Bombay and an ardent promoter of education. He was
the first representative of the Elphinstone Institution that was appoint
ed a member of the late Board of Education,and remained so until its
abolition and the cstablislnncnt of the University,of which he was oneof the Fellows mentioned in the Act of Incorporation,and up to the
or r rcran,L r'raaaav,AND scrsn'
r rr rc . ix
time of his death took a leading part in its proceedings As the first
Native President of the Students’
Literary and Scientific Society,and thecompanion of the cause of female education,he will be handed down tofuture generations by his name being associatedwith oneof the first and
most promising schools for girls founded by that Society,for which an
endowment was provided by his friends and admirers. (Applause )Ever prominent in all good works for the advancement andamelioration
of his countrymen,his voice was never silent when distress or calamityin Europe led to appeals for charity here,and in the proceedings of the
Lancashire Relief Fund he took a prominent part. In the political
progress of India he took great and active interest,and the BombayAssociation and the Bombay Branch of the East India Association
owe their existence mainly to his ability and exertions,and on two
occasions when chosen as Sheriff by the Government the voice of
public approval showed how highly the appointment was approved by
his fellow-citiz ens. In all this he showed himself not only a good
citiz en of the world,but,more than that—the helper and defender of
the poor,and the sick,and the distressed.
”—Hon.Mr . Gibbs,Chairman.
(2) It is now nearly twenty years since I had the happiness of
making the acquaintance of the late Dr. BhaiuDaiji,who has,to thegreat
loss of this Presidency,been takenhence in theprime ofa useful,honoura
ble,and generous life,ofwhich the communityofBombayhasjust reasonto be proud. Eminent and successful in his own profession,he nevertheless found time for literature and antiquarian research,and laboured
to promote in all respects the welfare and advancement in civilization
of his country. The lesson which his life teaches to and illustrates for
his fellow-countrymen is this—that,unlike too many of the young men
of the present day in India,his craving for education did not limit
itself to learning sufficient to obtain for hima Government appointment,or other situation,or a profession. He never thought that he could
educate himself sufficiently ; he hungered and thirsted for knowledge to
the day in which he was stricken down by the malady which proved
fatal to him. He loved learning and science for their own sakes,andcultivated them ardently and steadily,and with marked success. His
labours as an antiquarian have established for him a European name.
He sp red neither time nor money in obtaining copies and photo
graphs of inscriptions,of which India yields such a plentiful harvest,and in accumulating ancient and valuablemanuscripts and books,whichmay yet,I trust,in connexion with his name,advance the cause of
2a
m ann er or r un socra'
r v’s r aocs smsos,
learning in Bombay. I shall never forget a speech which it was my
good fortune to hear him deliver in this hall,when speaking ofa relic
gious faith to which he did not belong : he expressed himself with I
will not say a toleration,but with an intelligent appreciation and sym
pathy which manifested that liberality of sentiment which is the result
of high mental culture. Nor ought I to pass over an instance ofhis
public spirit. Believing one of his poorest and most humble fellow
countrymen to have been wronged by one of the local authorities,hewarmly espoused his cause,and never deserted him until he obtained
compensation for his wrongs in the chief tribunal of this island at the
time.
”
(Cheers.)—Hon. Mr . Chief J ustice Westropp
Dr . Bhau has rendered invaluable services to his country by his
researches into the ancient architecture of India. So greatwas his re
putation as an antiquarian that when our Viceroy,Lord Northbrook,visited the caves ofEllora,he invited the learned doctor to accompanyhim,so that he might benefit by his lucid explanations. As a medical
practitioner you must have all heard of the cure of the terrible maladyofleprosy which he succeeded in discovering,andwhich has been spokenof so highly. It is a known fact that to the poor and needy his ad
vice was given gratis,and instances are numerous in which with advice
was combined assistance. Many here present who enjoyed his friendship will agree with me in thinking that as a private individual Dr .
Bhiiu was all that could he wished. His genial disposition,his suavityofmanners,and his other sterling qualities will live in the memory of
all who knew him for years to come.
”—Hon. S ir J amsetj ee J ej eebhoy.
(3) Dr . Bhan’
s name as an antiquarian and scholar stands very
high . His reputation as such is spread over India,Europe,andAmerica.
Hemade several very valuable discoveries in this branch . I will men
tion one or two of them. The value of the ancient Sanskrit numerals
was for a long time unknown. Even Prinsep,that prince of Indian
antiquarians,was not able to determine it . It did not depend on the
position of the figures,as it does at present. The numeral 1,when itstands alone,signifies unity,when there is another figure over it it
signifies ten,and another still one hundred . Such was not the case with
ancient Sanskr it numerals. Their value was constant,whatever the
position,like that of the Roman numerals. In some copper-plate grants
a certain mark was found,alongside which there were the words ‘three
hundred and Prinsep and all subsequent antiquarians took it to re
present that number in all cases. But after a while it was found that
xii ans'raac'
r or T HE socrr-z'rv’s PRO CEEDINGS,
antiquities,and in taking copies of inscriptions,Dr . t iu was indefati
gable. He went several times to Ajanta,deciphered and translated
the cave-inscriptions at that place,and threw light upon a new
dynasty of kings. He did several other such things,and wrote a
good deal more ; so that no one who wishes to write a paper on the
antiquities of the last two thousand years can do so without referring
to Dr. Bhau’
s writings. (Hear,hear .) But this was not the only
thing of the kind that he did. He devoted much time and atten
tion to the collection of rare Sanskrit verses ; himself went to places
where he could find them,and when he could not go employed agents
to look for them and get them copied ; until there was almost no part
of India which had not an agent of Dr . Bhiiu’
s.”—Professor 'R . G.
Bhdnddrhar .
(4) He had known,Dr .Wilson said,Dr . Bhau Drip from his veryboyhood. He first attracted his attention in the classes of theNative
Education Society taught byMessrs. Bell and Henderson,in which he
especially noticed his eagerness for the acquisition of knowledge,particularly thatwhich was connectedwithmathematics and physical science.
He was a favourite pupil (for his intelligence and diligence) with thosemost zealous and able pioneers ofGovernment English education in
Bombay,and with Dr . Harkness and Mr . O rlebar,who were the firstPrincipal and Professor of the Elphinstone Institution,with whom
Messrs. Bell and Henderson were united in office on their raising upmaterial for a collegiate institution. (Applause.) Under these four
gentlemen,all distinguished for their attainments in learning and their
success in tuition,Bhau D.
'
1ji made rapid and sure progress. He soon
became a regular attendant alsoat themeetings,conferences,and lectureswhich were conducted and delivered by himself (Dr . Wilson) and he
never failed to express his gratitude for the benefits which he thought
he had received at them. He privately studied the Sanskrit language
when he was an assistant-teacher at the Elphinstone Institution ; and
his scholarship and benevolence,aided by his knowledge of that tongue.first found their scOpe in his Government Priz e Essay on Infanticide.
which had an important effect dehortative of that unnatural crime amongthe Jaidejzis of Kathiawzid and Kacch. (Hear,hear . ) The commence
ment of his studies at the Grant Medical College did not contract,butenlarged,the sphere ofhis observation and inquiry. With Dr . More.
head and the Professors there he was an admired favourite and he
obtained from them the respect and confidence which he deserved. He
or r rcu L,L ITERARY,ann scran'r rr rc . xiii
preferred being a private practitioner to being a Government servant,that he might follow the bent ofhis own inclinations as to practice and
study. On his joining the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society
he took a hearty interest in its work. In our Journal about a dozen
substantial articles appeared fromhis pen,while many other valuable
notices were to be found in the Appendices. It was believed bymanythat his name might yet appear in the history of medical science as di
rected to that dreadful disease leprosy,in connexion with which his ex
periments and treatment inmany instances,to all appearance,have beensuccessful to a large and encouraging extent. Much of his medical
practice was unrewarded byman. Advice,attendance,andmedicine wereby him frequently freely bestowed—a fact which,it was to be hoped,would be kept in mind in the destination of at least a portion of the
testimonial subscription to be made on this occasion. Altogether,Dr.Bhdu Déji was a most remarkable character . He would,it was to behoped,be a bright exemplar in this countryfor generations to come—an
exemplar as a student,andascholar,and a philanthropist ; and it shouldbe added,with a full warranty of facts,as a candid,religious inquirerand bold religious reformer . (Applause) His courage in the notorious
Maharaj case,both in the Supreme Court and elsewhere,could not beforgotten. He had imperilled his practice with many on that occasion,but this he did without regret. The respect which he had for another
faith (not that of his fathers) had already been alluded to by the
honourable speakers bywhom the meeting had alreadybeen addressed.
(Cheers.)—Rev. Dr . Wileon.
(5) From the first days of our acquaintance I felt drawn to himbythat attraction which links all workers in the intellectual field in onegreat
fellowship. I found hehadhad cravings and aspirations in his student
days which seemed to reproduce thatpart ofmyown life. He had been
an indefatigable labourer,yetwithal somethingofa visionary. But what
visions those are which rise before the mind of the successful student as
early manhood and h0pe roll out the future before him i Wordsworth
has said,Heaven lies about us in our infancy.
’Rather it gathers
round us in those years of opening manhood when,the drudgery of
mastering the rudiments being over,we learn in the society ofcultivated
and accomplished minds to drink in the full beauty and significance of
all that science and literature have to reveal. Then it is that a vision
splendid’opens on the student in his moments of day-dreaming. His
dull surroundings fade from view. Illimitable vistas of knowledge to
xiv summ er or r un socrn'r r
’s r aocnnnrnos,
be gained and honours to be won Open out to his mind’
s eye,and vaguebright hopes are borne in to him on the wings of a young imagination.
He would take all learning for his province,and compass with his life
the task ofages. In such dreams had Bhéu Déji indulged,and whenhe spoke all he had hoped to do my spirit leaped in sympathy. He
had seen all this fade into the light of common day,’
as all ofushave
or are destined to see it. But these musings were not all unpractical .
They had revealed glimpses ofan intellectual paradise,which havingseen he could no longer view with the longings of a baser nature the
vulgar rewards which for somany are the chief good this world sup
plies. He gained an ideal of the man of learning,which kept himthrough life independent,firm in integrity,in Openness ofmind,andkindlinessof heart. He had difficulties to overcome in acquiring the ru
diments oflearning,which havebeenwell described to themeeting. But
he also enjoyed an inestimable advantage. I would not be understood
to disparage the educational system now at work,or the teachers whowork it ; but there appears to have been in the infant days of British
culture in Bombay an energy,an elasticity,ahopefulness and confidencewhich now somehow are wanting. All institutions as they grow older
becomemore andmore imbedded in traditions. Proprieties press down
with leaden influence on all spontaneousness,and mechanism takes
the place ofnature. In earlier days this was not so. There wasmore
faith,more dependence on the one side,responded to bv a more full
outflow of the teacher’
s whole being on the other. There was an inter
course of mind with mind,an approach of soul to soul,which,whenthe teacher is worthy of his position,affords the highest ofall training .
Of all this I speak from tradition,but the tradition cannot be whollywrong when it is corroborated by such results as appear in the life of
Bhin Déji,and of somewho yet survive to do credit to their teachers,asI trust,for at least another generation. Under such teaching,Dr . t u
Déji easily tr iumphed over all disadvantages. He not only acquired
learning but manliness,a contempt for all tinsel pretences,and a love
for thoroughness ofwork which was essential in his future career . In
this spirit he entered on the study ofmedicine,and how successfullyhe
prosecuted that study you have already been told. He had an ideal to
satisfy,and a truthful,modest nature. His ability thus got fair play,and placed him ere long in the front rank of his profession. Meanwhile
he was becoming a philologer . His labours no doubt were impeded
by professional work,but for this even there was a compensation. If
we look back on the intellectual gains of the last half-century,and
“
n
or r rcu a,u r anaav,AND scran'
r i r rc. xvii
duates,not,as was ably pointed out by one of the leading Anglo
vernacular papers a fewmonths ago,permitting their exclusively Englisheducation to lead them to deny the existence ofscience and art amongtheir ancestors ; not falling behind the alumni of the older educational
institutions of the Presidency ; but,following diligently those pioneersof the study of the past,let it be said that they perfected what others
began,and that the University of Bombay has sent out not mere
pedants.much less conceited half-educated striplings,but men who in
the state,on the bench,or at the bar,as architects or as physicians.
prove themselves,as Dr. Bhau Déji did,worthy of their education.
beloved and respected in their lives,and in their deaths honoured
and deplored.”(Loud applause.)
After the above documents were submitted,it was unanimouslyagreed to insert them in the Proceedings of the meeting.
It was then proposed by the Rev . Dr . Wilson,seconded byMr .
Manockjee Cnrsetjec,and unanimously carried That the following
gentlemen be elected as the Committee for the year [875
Couum nn or MANAGEMENT .
P resident The Honourable Ju nta Grass,Vise-Presidents The Honourable Mr . Justice West,B.A.,
the Honourable K60 saheb Vishvamith N. Mandlik ;Surgeon
-General W. Thom, Col. J. A . Ballard,C .B R E
Members W. Loudon,Esq . ; E. T . Leith,Esq.,LL.M. ; Prof. R.G.
Bhindiirkar,M.A. ; Lieut. H. Morland,I.N.,F.R .A.S
Ni réyan Déji, Esq., J averilal Umiashankar,EsqJ .A . Forbes,Esq ; Surgeon
-MajorW.Dymock,B.A Rev. D.C .Boyd,M .A C .E. Fox,Esq .,M.A. ; Dhanjibhai Framji,Esq. L G. daCunha,Esq .,Secretar ies The Honourable R60 Stihcb Vishvan‘th Ndrfiyan
Mandlik ; Surgeon-Major O . Codrington,Auditors Thomas Lidbetter,Esq. ; Atmsrim Ptndurang. Esq
The following new Periodicals were ordered z—Hiada Patr iot,Calcutta ; Mookerj ee
’
sMagaz ine,Calcutta ; Madras Athem minstead
ofMadr as Times .
The following were ordered to be discontinued—J ournal desDébats,Norderdeutsch,New YorkHerald,PoonaObserver,Seindiaa,Once a Week,Australian Illustrated News.
3 a
LIST OF MEMBERS
or r un
BOMBAY BRANCH OF THE ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY.
The Honourable Sir Pum p E. Wonanovsz,K .C.B Governor .
Vice-Patrons.
The Honourable Sir M. R . Was-racer,Knight.
The Rt. Rev . H. A. Doucu s,D.D.,Bishop of Bombay.
Honorary President.
The Rev . J oan WILSON,D.D.,P.R .S.
P resident.
The Honorable Ju nta Grass,
The Hon. Mr. JusticeWest,B .A ., Surg.-Genl. W. Thom,
Colonel J. A . Ballard,C.B.,R EThe Hon. R60 Séheb Visbvanéth
N. Mandlik.
Consum es or Manaaanxn'
r .
Members.
W. London,Esq. J . A . Forbes,Esq.
E. T . Leith,Esq.,LL.M. Surgeon-Major W. Dymock,R A.
Prof. R. G. Bhandarkar,M.A . Rev. D. C. Boyd.M.A.
Lieut.H .Morland, C. E . Fox,Esq.,M.A .
FB .G.S. Dhanjibhai Frimji. Esq.
NéréyanDap,Esq., J. G. da Cunha,Esq.,Javerila
'
l Umiéshanksr,Esq.
The Hon. R60 Sfiheb Vishvsni th
ISurgeon
-Major 0. Codring ton,Ni riyanMandlik.
Auditors.
Thomas Lidbetter,Esq. Atmiirim Pindurang, Esq.,
LIST OF MEMBERS.
List of Resident Membersfor 1874.
Year of Year of
Election.
1840 Manockp Cursetji,Esq.
1845 H. P. St. George Tucker,Esq.
1816 Lestock Reid,Esq.
1847 The Hon’
ble Sir J amsctjeeJ ejeebhoy.
ManmohandasDevidas.Esq.
1850 Dhanjibhoy Framji,Esq.
1854 S. Carvalho,Esq.
R . A . Dallas,Esq.
1855 VinayakraoWasudeop,Esq.
1857 Sir MangaldasNathubhoy.
1860 J . A . Forbes,Esq.
J. M. Maclean,Esq.
The Rev . D. Macpherson
The Bou’
ble James Gibbs.1861 Framji Nussurwanji,Esq.
Cursetji Rustamji Cams,Esq.
W. London,Esq.
TheHonourable Rao Saheb
Vishvanath N.Mandlik.
Surgeon-General W. Thom.
1863 Cumroodeen Tyabji,Esq.
TheHonourableMr. JusticeGreen.
The Bou’
ble Mr. JusticeR . West.
The Hon’ble Mr. Justice
R. H . Pinhey.
Harichand Sadasew; 1,Esq.
J averilal Umiashankar,Esq.
Cnrsetji Fardunji Parakh,Esq .
F. F. Arbuthnot,Esq.
Manockji Sorabjt Ashbur
ner,Esq.
1863 Burjorp Sorabj t Ashburner,Esq.
The Hon’ble A. R. Scoble.
The Rev. R. Stothert.
WilliamDymock. Esq.
Dhirajlal Mathuradas.Esq.
1864 TheHonourableMr Justice
Nowrop Manockyi Wadia,Esq.
G. A. Kittredge,Esq.
Byramji J ejeebhoy,Esq.
A . C. Gumpert,Esq.
Cursetji Nussnrwanji Cams,Esq.
ShantaramNarayan,Esq.
Ardaseer CursetjiFurdoonp,Esq.
G. S . Lynch,Esq.
W. Niven,Esq.,M.D.
Colonel J. A. Ballard,C.B .
The Rev . W. Maule.
The Rev . D. C. Boyd.
Sorabji Framji Patell,Esq.
Atmaram Pandurang,& q.
F. Mathew,Esq.
Narayan Daji,Esq.Hamilton Maxwell,Esq.
A .W . Fords,Esq.
T . B . Johnstone,Esq.
Henry Cleveland,Esq.
W.M.Wood,Esq.
E. D. Sassoon,Esq.
C. E. Benn,Esq.
Brigadier-General J . S. Gell.
Vandrawandas Purshotam
m u n.
LIST OF MEMBERS.
Year ofElection.
1866 Charles Currey,Esq.
D. Watson,Esq.
R. L. Crawford,Esq.
E. B . Carroll,Esq.
J anardhan Gopalji,Esq.
T . O rmiston,Esq.
Captain G. F. Henry.
C . H . Reynolds,Esq.
Ramcrishna Gopal Bhan
W. G. Hunter,Esq.,M.D.
1867 The Rev . G. C. Reynell.
D. Graham,Esq.
Dr. F. G. Joynt.
Dustoor J amasji Manchem.
C . P. COOper,Esq.
G. H . Farran.Esq.
JohnWestlake,Esq.
T . E. Taylor,Esq.
T . B . Kirkham,Esq.
P . F. Gomes,Esq.
R. M. A . Branson,EsqThomas Lidbetter,Esq.
Morarjee Gokaldas,EsqE. T . Leith,Esq.
KahandasMancharam,Esq.
TheBou’ble Nacoda Maho
med Ali Rogay.
C . A . Langley,Esq.
F. R. S .Wyllie,Esq.
Surgeon-Major J. Lums
M. R . D’
Q uadros,Esq.
R . M. MacLean,Esq .
J . C . Lisboa,Esq.
C . E. Fox,Esq.
James Burgess,Esq.
H. P. LeMesurier,Esq.
Year ofElection.
1868 Perozshaw M. Mehta,Esq.
1869 EdwardWalker,Esq.
A. E. Al t ’s & q.
W. P. Peel,Esq.
F. L. Latham,Esq.
P.W. Doolittle,Esq M.D.
L. P. D’
Rosario,Esq.
Cursetji Manockji Cursetp,Esq.
Sorabji ShapoomBengalee,Esq.
John Dixon,Esq.
1870 The Rev . J. 8. 8. Robert
son.
J. Jardine,Esq.
The Right Rev. B . A .
Douglas.
HormusjiArdaseer Suntook,Esq.
The Bou’ble Sir M. R.
umon,Esq.
The Bou’bleMr . Justice
Kemball.
James Simpson,Esq.
Robert Ewing,Esq.
W. Fraser,Esq.
J. Q . Pigot,Esq.
ThakordasAtmaramMehta,Esq.
J . A. Cassels,Esq.
Bomonji Cursetji Can di,Esq.
J. J efferson,Esq.
ShapoorjiHormusp Phatak.Esq.
xxiv a ss or n u n s.
Von-Resident Members.
Year of Of
Ele ction.Election .
1856 T ,0,Hope,Esq .1867 Alijeh Ramchundra Apa
1859 J . P. Stratou,Esq.Saheb. Chief Of J um
1861 M. Shaw Stewart,Esq.khundy.
A,Faulkner,Esq .COLW . V. Shev ell.
1862 J . B. Peile,Esq .1868 Alijah Amrootrao Deflay.
1363 J . R. Arthur,Esq. Chief of Jatt.
H. .\l . Bir dwood,Esq . Colonel W. W. Anderson .
G. Buhler. Esq.,Ph .D. Azn hugwanji Kurumsey,J . R. Rickey,Esq . Minister to H. H . the
186-1W . T . Rlaufonl,Esq. J am ofNowannggnr .
ll . .\l . Smut. Esq . Axum Goculji Sampntram.
R. S. Sinclair. Esq .. LL.D. PrimeMinister toH . H.
Major T . “Eddington. the Nav ab Of J M ‘
Captain E. West ghur .
13335 T . t‘m l e. Esq“ M.A. .Ml Gopal Shri Soorvingp Tha
-11. kore Saheb of Palitans.
Rao lishsdur JananlauWa
l“: ll Aztl an.
Fuh mm:are 12m $1Sin s:
J . ll 17s}.
T \! awa i h i . Esq
1 R “av -aw . Esq
3? ram s}‘
sq H. H. the “ l b of Joana\l ms fl sq d zu
\l s
l N D
kutay,Esq.
Gowrishanker Odeyahsnker,Esq.,Minister to H . H.
the Thakore Saheb of
Bhownuggnr .
J umwnath c aram,Esq.
H. H . the J am of Nowa
nuggnr .
Arum J eyashankarLalshan
h r,Minister to theTimkore Saheb ofGondnl.
J harrjaShri J eyasinfifll'
hs
LIST OF MEMBERS .
Year of
Election.
1868 H . H. the Thakore Saheb
ofBhownuggur .
H . H . the Thakore Saheb
ofMorvee.
H. H. the Thakore Saheb
ofGondul.
1869 Bomanji J amasp,Esq.
J orawur Khanji Bahadoor,Nawab of Radhunporc.
Lt -Col. J . F. Lester .
Rev . A . V. Lisboa.
1870 R . M. E. B rereton,Esq .
J. Jardine,Esq.
187 1R . E. Candy,Esq.
A. D . Cunnyngham,Esq.
XXV
Year of
Election.
1871 G. H. D. Wilson,Esq.
1872 J . E. André,Esq.
H . Batty,Esq.
Surgeon-Major W. Davey.
Professor Kero Laxuman
Chhatray.
W . Lee-Warner,Esq.
W. Ramsay,Esq.
“7 . Woodward,Esq .
1874: A . F. Pereira,Esq.
Shripad Babaj i Thakore,
Leopoldo CiprianodaGama,Esq.,Deputy PostmasterGenl.,Portuguese India
List of Honorary Members.
The Rev . JohnWilson,D.D F.R .S. (Honorary P r esident .)1830 Sir J . Gardiner Wilkinson,
London.
1832 Mons.GarcindeTassy,Paris.
1835 A . S . Walne,Esq .,Cairo.
1842 Prof. C . Lassen,Bonn.
M. leMarquis deFerriére dc
Vayer .
N. L. Westergaard,Esq.,K .D .,Copenhagen.
1848 M. Felix Bogaerts,Antwerp.
M. le Vicomte de Kerek
hove,Antwerp.
M. Eugene de Kerckhove,Antwerp.
1849 B . Hodgson,Esq.,BengalO .S London.
Captain R . N. lnglefield,London.
1855 The Rev . R . H . Friederich,Batavia,Java.
1860 Martin Hang. Ph.D.
4 a
1862 H . J . Carter,Esq.,late of the Bombay Me
dical Service,London .
1865 W . E. Frere,Esq.,O .S.,London.
1866 Honourable Sir R . Temple,Calcutta.
Dr . A . Weber,Berlin .
1867 A . H . Leith,Esq.,M.D .,London.
J . H. Rivara da Cunha,Esq .,Goa.
1868 G. C . M. B irdwood,Esq .,M .D .,London.
1869 H. Newton,Esq .,1874 M©Commendatoran i
-i,b
M President of
theGeographical Societyof Italy.
E. Rehatsek,M.C.E.
xxvi LIST OF MEMBERS .
Members gone to Europe.
Year of
Election.
1822 \V. Nicol,Esq.
1828 Sir P. M. Mclvill.
1829 Augustus LeMessuricr,Esq.
1830 Sir H . C . Rawlinson,C .D.
Lestock R. Reid,Esq.
1831 J . S . Law,Esq.
1832 Colonel James Holland.
1834 R . W. Crawford,Esq.
1835 John Harkness,Esq.
1837 P. Ewart,Esq.
E. L . Jenkins,Esq.
1838 B. Davidson,Esq.
Majer-GenLSir G. LeGrand
Jacob,C .D.,C . Morehead,Esq.,M.D.
Col. H . B . Turner .
1839 W . Graham,Esq.
1840 S ir H . L. Anderson.
S. S. Dickinson,Esq.
Rev . J. M. Mitchell,D.D.
1841 C . J . Erskine,Esq.,O.S.
H . G. Gordon,Esq.
J . R . Hadow,Esq.
1842 W. Cargill,Esq.
E. B . Eastwiek,Esq.
The Right Honourable Sir
H . B . E. Frere,
Sir Thomas Erskine Perrv,Knight .
1843 R . K . l’ringle,Esq.
A . Spens,Esq.
1814 Col . \V. R . Dickinson.
Major-General \V. F. Mar
riott.
1845 J. A . Baumbach,Esq.
l l . Conybeare,Esq.
Year ofElection.
1816 T . S. Cowie. Esq.
Lieut. J. F. Jones,LN.
Arthur Malet,Esq.
1847 W . C . 00103,Esq.,M.D.
H. P. Malet,Esq.
Sir Wm. Yardley,Kt.1848 Rev . J . H . Glasgow
1849 G. M. Campbell,Esq.
Rev . J . D. Gibson.
H . B . Gilinour,Esq.
Thomas L. Jenkins,Esq.
1850 Major-General C . W. T re
menheere.
1851 J . Graham,Esq.
1852 H . Miller,Esq.
1854: \V. P . Adam,Esq.
John Fleming,Esq.
1855 R . T . Reid,Esq.,LL.D.
1856 Sir Edward Lugard,K .C .B.
Major-General H . Rivers.
1858 J. P. Bickersteth,Esq.
H . Hebbert,Esq.
J . S. White,Esq.1860 His Excellency the Hon
’ble
Sir G. R . Clerk,K .C.B.
G. Foggo,Esq.
Sir Alex.
LL.D.
1861 Captain F. Black.
W. R . Cassels,Esq.
W . D’
Oyly,Esq.
C . M. Keir,Esq.
D. J . Kennelly,Esq.
Major-General Liddell.George Scott,Esq.
1862W . B . Tristram,Esq.
1863 W . R . l loare,Esq
xxviii assraacr or mm socm'
rv’s raocrsnmos,
Non-Resident Members of the Geographical Section of theBombay B ranch Royal Asiatic Society.
Year of Y ear ofElection . Election.
1851 J. Scorgie,Esq.,F.C.S. 1865 Captain C . Swinhoe.
1859 Surgeon-Major J .T .O. Ross. A . Taylor,Esq.
Lieut. A .W . Stifl'
e, H . Warner,Esq. late LN.
1861 Lieut. H . Burn,late LN. 1866 SurgeonW. A . Shepherd.
1862W .M. P. 1867 Alex. Gibson,Esq.
1863 Lieut . G. C . Parker,late F. B . Girdlestone,Esq.
1868 F. W. Pickering,Esq .
1864 Lieut. W. P . Arnott,late R . Proctor C .E.,
F. A . R . Morrison,Esq. W . Sowerby,Esq.,C .E.,1865 Dr. A . G. Fraser . F.C .S.
Lieut .-Colonel Sir Lewis
Pelly,C .S.I.
At the Monthly Meeting on 13th February 1875 the Honourable
James Gibbs. P resident,in the ChairThe following gentlemen were elected Members of the Society
Manockji Cursetji J amsetp,Esq.
Cowasji Cursetji J amsctji,Esq.
Honourable Mr . Justice Green,LL.D.
A paper entitled The SailgameévaraMahétmyaand Linga-Worship
”
was read by theHonourable Rao Saheb Vishvanath NarayanMandlik.
The Rev . Dr . Wilson,in proposing a vote of thanks to the author,made some interesting observations upon the worship of Siva,and said
that anything throwing light on the question was of interest.
The Rev . J . S . S . Robertson,in seconding the proposal,hoped hishonourable and learned friend would continue his researches on this
subJ ect.
At the Monthly Meeting held on the 13thMarch 1875,theHonourable J9 nos Gibbs, P r esident,in the Chair
B33“ Lang,Esq.,Barrister-at-Law,and the Rev . G. Shirt were
elected Members of the Society.
New books,maps,&c. presented to the Society were laidbefore the
meeting,and thanks voted to the donors.
om en s,u rrasav,sun scxsrm r lc. n ix
A special vote of thanks to Chevalier Dr . Von Scherzer was passed,on the motion of the P resident,seconded by the Honourable Rao
Sbheb Vishvanfith NarayanMandlik,Vice-President,for obtaining andforwarding to this Society the volumes containing the proceedings ot
the Novara Expedition.
Mr . J. G. da Cunha read a paper entitled Memoir on theHistoryof the Tooth-relic of Ceylon, in which he gave an account of the
ao-called Buddha’
s Tooth,dwelling especially on the writings of the
Portuguese on the subject of its destruction by the Jesuits at Goa.
A vote of thanks to the author was passed on the motion of
the Honourable Mr . Justice West,seconded by the Rev . J. S. S.
Robertson.
The Seals belonging to the late kingdom of Si téré,presented by theGovernment of Bombay,were laid before the Meeting,and the P re
sident gave a short account of how they were obtained. Captain
Robinson proposed,and the Rev. J . S. S. Robertson seconded,that a
vote of thanks be passed to the Honourable President for the pains he
had taken to secure these seals for the Society. Car ried nem. con.
A letter from Dr . Biihler was read forwarding Photograph of a
C0pper-
plate Grant of the Valabhi king Druvasena I.,the oldest yetfound.
At theMonthly Meeting held on April l0th,1875,the HonourableJames Gibbs, P resident,in the Chair
The Honourable Rao Ssheb Vishvanath NarsyanMandlik read a
paper entitled Three Valabhi Copper-
plates,w ith remarks. Two of
the three plates had been sent to the Society by Captain Phillips on
behalf of the Gondal State. They had been found at the site of the
ancient city of Mugna Pattan,in Kathiawaid,and both refer to the
last Siladityadeva of the Valabhi dynasty. Both are dated Sarhvat
403. The third plate was forwarded to the P resident by Thékor SriMeghréjji,Chief of Wi lli,in Ksthiawad. It is dated Samvat 286 of
the Valabhi plates,and grants certain places to the Bhikshus of a
vihara the name of which is obliterated. The grantor i.Sili ditya or
Dharmiditya. The era of these plates is most probably the era of theGuptas.
The thanks of the meeting were voted to the author on the motionof the P resident,seconded by Mr . Burgess.
man ner or me scemn ’e Paocasnmos.
ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS.
JANUARY 157 7 0 JUNE 307 11,1875.
DA CUNHA,J. GERSON, Eng.,&c.—Memoir on the His
tory of theTooth-Relic of Ceylon .
FLEET,J . F Bo . O.S.-O ld Canarese and Sanskrit Inscrip
tions relating to the Chieftains of the Sindavarhsa with T ranslations.
Notes,and Remarks.
MANnu x,T a n HON . Rao Sa’nnn V. N.—Saiigame6vara MM
mya and Linga-Worship.
PIERCE,E.-A Description of the Mekranee-Beloochee Dialect .
R i-mu'
ss x,E.,M .C .E.—The Subjugation ofPersia by the Modern,
and the Extinction of the Sisanian Dynasty.
PRESENTS TO THE LIBRARY .
FROM THE 18? JANUARY TO T H E 3013 JUNE 1875.
Administration Report of the Resident at Hyderabad for the year
1873-74 . By the Resident at Hyderabad.
A Lecture on Political Economy,Part I. By the Author .
Appendix D to the Report of the Director of Public Instruction,Bombay,for 1872-73. By the Director of Public Instruction,Bombay.
Archaeological Survey ofWestern India,by J . Burgess,Esq.,F.R.G.S
By the Government ofBombay.
Bibliotheca Indica a Collection of Oriental Works,published bythe Asiatic Society of Bengal . New Series,Nos. 308,309,and313. By the Society.
Bombay University Calendar for 1874-75 . By the University of
Bombay.
Carter on Mycetoma or the Fungus Disease of India. By the Govern
ment of Bombay.
Catalogue of Books printed in the Bombay Presidency,1874 . By the
Government of Bombay.
Do. do. during the quarter ending 31“
December 1874 .
during the quarter ending 31“
March 1875 .
PRES ENTS TO THE LIBRARY .
Map ofGuzerath. Bv the Superintendent G. T . Survey of India.
Do. the Administration Report of the N.W. Provinces for the
vear 15 73-74 . Bv the Superintendent Government N.W .
part of the Viramz aum Taluka of the Ahmedabad Collec
torate. w ith portions of the Lagtar and Limri States.
Bv the Superintendent G. T . Survev of India.
do. do. and Map of Kattywar Survey. Bythe Superintendent G. T . Survev of India.
Do Town and British Cantonment of Rajkote. By the Sn
perintendent G. T . Survev of India.
Memoirs of the Gmlogieal Survev of India,Vols. I. and II. Bythe Superintendent Geological Survey of
India.
Vol . XL,Part 1. Dv the Government of
India.
Do. Roval Az tronomical Societv,Vol. XL,for 1874-75 . Bythe So eietv .
Memoir on the Ten th-Relic of Cey lon,with a Preliminary Ba y on
the Life and Sy stem of Gautama Buddha. Bv Dr . J. G. da
Cunha. Rv the Author.
Minutes of the Trustees of the Indian Museum for the vear 1873-74.
Dv the Tmsturs.
Notiees of Sanskrit MSS . bv Rajendrala'
l Mitra. By the Asiatic So
cietv of Bengal.
Vol . III Part 2. Bv the Government
of Bombav .
Notes on the Saks. Sai n t. and Gupta Bras. By the Author .
M ichisehe Monatm hritt fur denOrient. Bv the Secretary,Ori
. or the Patriot : a Portuguese and l-Inglish Periodiea1; for
er Br the Editm'
.
I 1 B r Dr . J. G. Da Cunha.
: Societv ofBengal,Nos. IX. and X,for 1874 . By the Society .
Nos. I.- IV.,for 1825 .
passsnrs TO THE msaaav . xxxiii
Proceedings of the Council of the Governor of Bombay for makingLaws and Regulations,Vol. XIII. for 1874 . By the Government
of Bombay.
Do. Parliament of South Australia for 1874,Vols. I.—III. Do.
Do Royal Institution of Great Britain,Vol. VII Parts 3 and 4 .
By the Institution.
Records of the Geological Survey of India,Vol. VIII.,Parts 1and 2,for 1875 . By the Government of Bombay.
Reise der Osterreichischen Fregate Novara,17 vols. By theEmperor
ofAustria.
Report (Annual) of the Bombay Presidency for the years 1863-64,1864-55 (with Supplement),1807-68,1868-69,and 1809-70. Bythe Government of Bombay.
Do. do. of the Municipal Commissioner of Bombay for the
vear 1874 . By the Municipal Commissioner .
(General) 011 the Administratwn of the Bombay Presidencyfor 1873-74 . By the Government of Bombay.
Do. do. on the Operations of the Great T rigonometrical Sur
vey of India for 1873-74 . By the Government of India.
Do. do. do. By Colonel J . T . Walker,R.E.,F.R .S ,Superintendent Trigonometrical Surveyof India.
Do. do. on the Topographical Surveys of India for 1873 74 .
By the Government of India.
Report of the Director ot Public Instruction for the year 1873-74 .
By the Director .
D0 . ofthe Schools of the Sir J amsetp Jejeebhoy Parsee BenevolentInstitution for the year 1874 . Dv the Secretary to the Institu
tion.
Do. on Public Instruction in Mysore for 1873-74 . By the
Chief Commissioner of Mysore,by order of Government of
India.
Do. on the Administration of the Madras Presidency during the
year 1873-74 . By the Government ofMadras.
Do. do. ofMysore for 1873-74 . By the Commissioner
ofMysore.
Do. on the Administration of N.\V. Provinces for 1873-74 . By
the Government ofN. W. Provinces.
5 a
xxxiv Passsur s TO THE LIBRARY .
Report on the Bombav Chamber of Commerce for the vear 1873
Dv the Chamber .
Do. on the Census of British Burma taken in August 1872
the Government of Bombav .
Do. do . of the Bombay Presidency taken on the 2lst
I ebruary 1872,Parts I. and 11. Do.
Do . on the h enna Universal Exhibition of 1873,w ith Maps and
Plans. Do.
Rig-Veda-Sanhita,together w ith the Commentarv of Sayanacharva.
Iidited bv F. Max ) Iiiller,M .A . Vol. VI. Do.
Selections from the Records of Government,North-Western Provinces,2nd Series,Vol. VI.,1874 . RV Government N.\V. Provinces .
Svnopsis of the Results of the Operations of the Great T rigono
metrical Survey of India. Vols . 11.—IV. By the Government of
India.
The History of India as told by its own Historians—The Mahomedan
Period. By Sir H . M. Elliot,and edited bv John Dowson.
" 01. V. Bv Director of Public Instruction,Bombav .
T ransactions of the Asiatic Societv of J apan,Vol. Part 1,fromOctober to December 1874 . Bv the Society .
Tukaram’
s Abhangs,Vol. II. (5 copies.) By the Director of Public
Instruction,Bombav .
Vocabularv ofDialects spoken in the Nicobar and Andaman Isles. Do.
Do. do. do. Bv the Government of India.
Do . do. do. Do. through Govt. of Bombav .
Yajadiu Prasti and J arathoshati Dharama. Bv the Author .
xxxvi ABSTRACT os m s socm'
ry’s Paocssnmos,
A Monthly Meeting of the Society was held on l lth September
1875,the Honourable Raio 811t Vishvamith Naraiyan Mandlik,ViceP resident,in the chair .
Books and pamphlets presented to the Society since the last meeting
were laid before the meeting. A vote of thanks for the same was
passed to the donors.
Mr . E. Rehatsek read a paper on the Labours of the Arab A strono
mers,and their Instruments,with a description ofan Astrolabe in the
Mulla Firuz Library.
In this paper Mr. Rehatsek described at considerable length the
works of the Arabs in astronomy,and described the astrolabe,whichwas kindly lent for exhibition by Mr. Khursetjce Rustomjee Cams,andthe manner ofusing it for taking observations.
The Chairman,having previously sent the paper to Professor K ern
Lakshuman Chhatro,read a letter from that gentleman on the subject,and proposed a vote of thanks to Mr . Rehatsek for his interesting
paper .
Mr . Atmairxim Paindurang having seconded the proposition,it wascarried.
A Meeting of the Society was held 011 20th October 1875,theHonourable James Gibbs,Pr esident,in the chair .
Dr . Andreas gave a sketch of the subjects which he proposes toinvestigate in Persia.
He said that the main objects in the investigations he pmposed
pursuing in Persia were,first,the obtaining fuller information as
to the history of the Persian race,to gain which a close and detailed
study of geographical and ethnological features of Persia were abso
lutely necessary. He must,to effect his object,study the monumentsand inscriptions,which were scattered throughout the country in toler
able profusion.
The method which he proposes to pursue is to investigate the subjectof the geographical names of the country,its towns,&c.,and to
examine into their identity as at present existing with the old names
OFFICIAI LITERARY,AND SCIENTIFIC. XXXVII
w ith which we are familiar through the writers and writings which we
possess and which treat either directly or indirectly of Persia. To
obtain this information the best course would be to follow the fate of
any given city from the time of its foundation,marking the changes
in dvnasties,names,and localities which affected it throughout its
existence. But in Persia this cannot be done ; the sources of such ia
formation are not forthcoming there,—as indeed in toomany other cases ;
i'l their absence,of necessity some other course must be adopted,andthat w ill be to ascertain,by means of whatever information may be
for thcoming,the geographical identity of each locality ; to ascertain
wbother the old names w ith which we are familiar are the now disused
names of cities still the home of industry and life,or are merely the
lettered remembrance of cities that once have been and now havepassed
awav . There is the linguistical proof,—the identitv ofa namementioned
bv some old w riter w ith some name at present current. IIaving paid
particular attention to the study of the nomenclature of the different
w riters upon Persia and to its historv,the learned doctor thought hewould in this way be able to derive some valuable results.
Dr. Andreas stated that the great aim of his investigations was to
obtain,by the study of the actual geography and ethnography of
Persia,a full insight into the history and civilization of the Persian
race. It was in harmony with the historical tendency of his investiga
tions that particular care would be bestowed on the study of the monu
ments and inscriptions.
As for the accomplishment of this object the identification of the
names of ancient places was of considerable importance,he shortly
pointed out the method by which we can arrive at such identifications,an d in~is ted principally on the necessity of using the severest and most
refined method in the linguistical identification of a modern with an
ancient name .
With s
pec ial regard to the geographical nomenclature of Persia,heremarked that the names actually used could easily be traced upwards
( l l ll l‘ Ill l l t‘s of the ‘Iongols . Further up there was a break ; but
new r tlu les s se veral instances made him hope that a more complete and
care ful M IN cv of the countrv would restore to us a considerable part
of the r ich catalogue of geographical names given by the Arab
geog raphers—for instance,the oldes t of them,lstalthri,a native of
Is ltthlfl '
.
orr tctAL,LITERARY,AND scxsx'
ri r ic. xli
with the granite at Kohrud,north from l spahan. With regard to the
western parts,no one has ever tried to cross and study the mountain
ranges running parallel to the coast.
O f the hvdrography nothing more in fact is ascertained than the
mouths of a certain number of rivers flowing into the Gulf,thedelineations of their course upwards on our maps being the”? fanciful constructions.
As to the ethnography of Southern Farsistan,exact data as to the
number and names of the Turkoman tribes should be collected,as thiselement seemed to become predominant in these regions.
Dr . Andreas then turned to the country north fromthe road Bushire
Shiraz .
Ilere the celebrated Kala-i-Sefid ofl'
ered special interest,as sculpturesand inscriptions are said to be found within its walls. It was generallybelieved to be the Persikai Pulai which Alexander the Great had to
force before he could reach Persepolis. Dr . Andreas rather inclined to
put these passes more to the east,and more due north from Persepolis,and remarked that the question could only be solved on the spot,havingthe necessary books at hand. He would further try to fix the site of
Taoke,mentioned in the I’er iplus ofNeurobus. This town was situated
not far from Bushire,to the north,near the mouth of a river called
Granis. It was evident that this was the same city known in later
times under the name ofTawaj,and that the Granis is the same river
called by the A rab geographers Ratin. These data will easily enable
any traveller to ascertain the exact locality near one of the small rivers
north from Bushire.
Following the coast towards the north we arrive at the old town of
Gcnaweh,where extensive mounds w ith masses of masonry set in
mortar and burnt bricks indicate the site of a city of considerable
antiquity.
The hydrography of this tract of country is in adeplorableconfusion,and it is impossible to reconcile the statements of the Arab geographers
w ith those which we find embodied in the best of our maps. As the
Arabs are generally found to be very exact,it will be necessary to
follow their indications in surveying the course of the rivers flowingthrough this part of the province .
We now arrive at the mountain ranges extending between Media,Susiana,and P 'rsis,and known in ancient times as the Z agros. The
xliv ABSTRACT or m e socrsrv’s Paocssmuos,
Persian empire,and ismost probably a Persian pendant to the wellknown Monumentum Ancyranum of Augustus. We even know that
Ardesh ir composed a book on that subject called the ‘Kar Nameh,’
rerumgastaram liber and it may be suggested that the inscription of
Pai Kul i is either ident ical w ith that record of his actions,or forms an
epitome of it.
Before leaving Media,Dr . Andreas pointed out the necessity of
surveying the triangle between Hamadan,Teheran,and l spahan,whichis a complete blank in our maps. Major St.J ohn had observed,northwest from l spahan,hills ofa conical shape,which would point towardsa volcanic or igin.
After hav ing finished his investigations inPersia,Dr. Andreas intendsto travel through the southern parts ofArmenia. It has been proposedby the Academy to investigate the question ofthe true site of theArmenian cap ital Tigranoccrta. Professor K iepert,the well-known geographer ofBerl in,afew years ago discussed th is question in a very elaborateessay,and placed the Armenian city north of the Tigris at Arzen. But
Professor Mommsen has shown in a br i l liant paper that the city musthave been situated south of the Tigris,—probably near the village of
Kefr Ioze,v isited in 1863 byMr . Taylor,a place where coins are con
tinually dug up in considerable quantity. Professor Kiepert has now
joined the opinion ofMommsen. North-west of the lake Van the plainofMush w i l l be more special ly surveyed. Dr . Andreas concluded bysaying that he would return to Europe through the trans-Caucasian
provinces ofRussia,and make a stay at the Armenian cloister ofEtschmiadz in,in order to study themanuscripts ofArmenian historians,whichare of great importance in the investigation of the geography and his
tory ofPersia during the reign ofthe Sassanians.
A vote of thanks was passed to Dr . Andreas on the motion of Mr .
Dhanjibhzii Framji and Rev. J. S. S. Robertson.
A Monthly Meeting of the Society was held on Saturday,l l thDecember 1875,the Honourable JamesGibbs,President,in the chair .
Surgeon-General J . G. Ingl is,M.D.,C .E.,and Carlo deMarchesetti,M.D.,were elected Members of the Societv .
OFFICIAL,m saaar,AND scrssr rrre. xlv
Professor Monier Wi l l iams,M.A ., Boden Professor of
Sanskrit University ofOxford,was elected an Honorary Member of theSociety on the proposal of the Honourable James Gibbs,P resident,the Honourable V . N . Mandlik,Vice-President,and O . Codrington,Secretary .
Read a letter from Sir Bartle Frere,sent with a copy of Dr . Goldstticker
’
s reproduction of the Mali cibhéshya presented by B .B.B . the
Prince ofWales,and the fol low ing Resolution was proposed by theHonourable President,seconded by the Honourable V . N . Mandlik.and
carried
That the respectful thanks of this Society be tendered to H .R.H .
the Prince of Wales for the handsome present of the Malidbluishya
which he has been pleased to make to the Society as a souvenir of
II . R . IL’
s v isit to Bombay .
Several other books and pamphlets presented to the Soc iety were laidbefore the meet ing,and thanks voted to the donors.
The President,referring to the recent death ofDr .Wi lson,HonoraryPr esident,said that the first meet ing of the Society after the great losssustained should not be al lowed to pass w ithout some expression of
their regret . A more formal mot ion on the subject would be made at
the Annual Meeting next month . He therefore proposed the follow ingresolut ion
This meeting desires to record the very sincere and heartfeltmannerin which it feels the death ofDr . Wi lson,Honorary P resident.
”
Seconded by the Honourable Raio Saheb V. N . Maudlik,and supported by Mr. Martin Wood,the motion was carried.
xlv i ABSTRACT or Tm: socrs'rv’s Pnocssomos.
ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS .
J U LY lsr TO Ds cs srmcn 3181,1875 .
DA Comm,J . GERSO N,M .R-O .S . Eng,&c.—Historical and Ar
chaeological Not ice of the Island ofAngediva.
REHATSEK,E.,M.C .E.—Labours of the Arab Astronomers,and
their Instruments w ith a description of an Astrolabe in the MullaFiruz Library .
Axnasas,Da .—Sketch of the Subjects which he proposes to Iaves
tigate in Persia.
LIST OF PRESENTS TO THE LIBRARY .
Fnosr rm: l sr J ew TO T HE 3137 DECEMBER 1875 .
Aarboger for Nordisk Oldkyndighed 0g Historic,Part I I I . for 1874 .
By the Société Royals des Antiquaires du Nord is Cepenhague.
Abstract ofResults ofStudy of theGeneraGeomys and Thomomys,&c.,by Dr . E . Cones . By the Author.
Album Litterario Periodico Mensal Directores,Nos. 1to 4 . By A . F.
Pereira .
A Pamphlet dedicated to His Royal Highness the Pr ince of Wales,by Bowmanj i Cursetj i Cowasji. By the Author .
Appendix II,Tables required by the Govt . of India to the Report of
the Director of Publ ic Instruct ion,Bombay,for the year [873-74 .
Bv the Director .
Blnigavadgitzi translated into Engl ish Blank Verse,w ith Notes,byKaisirnith Trimbak Telang,M .A .,LL .B . By the Author.
B ibl iotheca Indica z—Chaturvarga Chintzimani,Vol . Fasc. I . Bythe Asiat ic Soc iety of Bengal .Szima Veda Sanlntzi,Vols. IV .,and V. Bythe Asiat ic Society ofBengal .
Siima Veda Sanhitzi . New Ser ies,Nos. 321and
322. By the Asiat ic Soc iety of Bengal.
The Ag ni Puraina. New Series,No. 3l6. Bythe Asiat ic Society of Bengal .
